JP2020039817A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of minimizing the time when a game ball is unnecessarily shot.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine includes: measurement means for measuring the time from when the storage number of holding information becomes one before the maximum storage number to the maximum number; and determination means for determining whether the measurement time by the measurement means exceeds a prescribed time or not. The average variation time of variation display when the determination means determines that the time does not exceed the prescribed time is shorter than the average variation time when the determination means determines that the time exceeds the prescribed time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 101

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a pachinko machine, a player operates a firing handle to fire a game ball and hits the game ball into a game area of a game board, so that the game ball flows down while rolling in the game area. When a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board, a lottery for shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is performed, and a plurality of pieces displayed on display means such as a liquid crystal display device are displayed. When the symbols fluctuate and the winning lottery is won, a transition is made to an advantageous gaming state (a so-called big hit gaming state) triggered by stopping a plurality of symbols in a predetermined combination. When a game ball enters the starting winning opening while a plurality of symbols are changing, the change of the symbol is suspended.

  In a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while a plurality of symbols are changing, a reserved symbol is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device. In the case where the number of pending symbols is a maximum of four, a maximum of four symbols are displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The ball symbol is not displayed. Conventionally, in the case of a pachinko machine, when the maximum number of pending symbols reaches the maximum number (for example, four) during the change of the symbols, after the plurality of symbols during the variation are stopped, the number of the pending symbols is reduced. The number of symbols is reduced to one and the symbol starts to change. In this case, the variation time is generally shorter than the variation time when the number of reserved symbols is 2 or less.

JP-A-2002-210107

  By the way, firing game balls in a state where the maximum number (for example, four) of the holding symbols is displayed on the liquid crystal display device means that the holding number does not increase even if the game balls are put into the starting port. Therefore, a game ball (a so-called possession ball) owned by the player is wasted. Therefore, in the case of a player, there is a person who strikes, such as interrupting the launch of the game ball when four reserved symbols are displayed, and resuming the launch of the game ball after the number of the reserved symbols is reduced to three or less. Many. In particular, when the plurality of symbols corresponding to the second held symbol in the four held symbols starts to change, in other words, when the number of held symbols changes from four to two, firing is restarted. Some players have a style of hitting that is called "stop hitting." For example, when launching starts when the number of pending symbols is reduced by one from the maximum number (when the number of pending symbols becomes three), if a game ball already flowing down on the game board enters the starting opening, If the ball is thrown, the newly launched game ball will be wasted, but such a waste can be prevented by “keeping 3 hits”.

  However, when the player performs the above-mentioned hitting method, the firing stop time becomes long, which is not preferable for the game store. In addition, since the player needs to operate the firing handle and the firing stop button, it is difficult for the player to calmly play the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of minimizing the time in which the launch of a game ball is wasted.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention has the following configuration.

(1) a game board (for example, a game board unit 17) having a game area in which game balls roll,
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 420, a second starting port 440) provided in a game area of the game board and through which a game ball can pass;
A game state determination unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S118) that determines whether or not to shift to a game state advantageous to the player upon the passage of the game ball through the start area; ,
Identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74, and the liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying identification information for enabling a player to identify the determination result of the game state determination section; ,
Identification information display control means for controlling the display of the identification information in a variably displayed manner and stopping and displaying the result of the determination by the game state determination means on the identification information display means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S103 to S104) , Sub CPU 201),
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the identification information (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S781, a fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 13, 97 and 98));
Hold information storage means (e.g., main memory) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information necessary for the determination as hold information when a game ball passes through the starting area while the identification information display means performs the variable display. RAM 103),
Measuring means for measuring the time from when the storage number of the hold information in the hold information storage means becomes one before the maximum storage number to the maximum number (for example, the processing of steps S753, S762, and S757 can be executed) Main CPU 101 (see FIG. 100)),
Determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 (see FIG. 100) capable of executing the processing of step S758) for determining whether or not the time measured by the measuring means exceeds a specified time;
With
The fluctuation time determination means determines a fluctuation time in the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold information stored first in the hold information stored in the maximum number in the hold information storage means, based on a determination result by the determination means. (For example, the main CPU 101 (see FIG. 101) capable of executing the process of step S787),
The average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display when the determination means determines that the predetermined time is not exceeded is shorter than the average fluctuation time when the determination means determines that the predetermined time is exceeded (for example, the fluctuation pattern). A gaming machine characterized by a decision table (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

  According to (1), there is provided a measuring means for measuring the time from the time when the number of storage of the hold information becomes one before the maximum number of storage to the maximum number, and the measuring time by this measuring means is defined. It is determined whether or not the time is exceeded, and if it is determined that the time is not exceeded, the variation time of the identification information corresponding to the number of held items, which is one less than the maximum number (for example, four), is shortened. ing. For this reason, for example, when launching is started at the point in time when the number of held pieces is reduced by one from the maximum number (when the number of held symbols becomes three), before the already launched game ball enters the starting port In addition, since the possibility that the number of holdings is further reduced by one (the number of holding symbols is two) increases, the number of holdings increases when the already launched game ball enters the starting port. become. As described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the time during which a game ball is unnecessarily fired as much as possible, and for a player, the merit of performing the so-called three-stop hitting is reduced. In this way, it is possible to reduce the number of players who perform the hitting.

  (2) The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the prescribed time is 1.2 seconds or less.

  According to (2), since the game balls are fired at intervals of about 1.2 seconds, by setting the specified time to 1.2 seconds or less, for example, the number of holdings is reduced by one from the maximum number (holding). Immediately after the number of symbols becomes three), if two game balls remaining on the board enter the starting port in succession, the number of pending balls becomes the maximum number by entering the first starting port. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the number of items to be retained is reduced by one before the second ball enters the starting port. Therefore, the possibility that the second ball at the start opening becomes a reserved ball is increased, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the time during which a game ball is unnecessarily fired as much as possible.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to provide the gaming machine which can reduce the time when the launching of a game ball is wasted as much as possible.

FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of a diagram showing a group of operation buttons of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example showing a front exploded perspective view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed obliquely from the upper right. It is an example of the front view showing the LED unit including the 1st and 2nd special symbol display sections. It is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a figure showing the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a table which shows the probability of a big hit of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the decoration design determination table memorize | stored in the program ROM of a sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the other example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. It is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub control circuit. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process performed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game permission processing. 6A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting process, and FIG. 6B is a flowchart illustrating another example of the setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a backup clear process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game return processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of abnormal time processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of power failure occurrence. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a system timer interrupt process by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch input detection process performed by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting opening winning detection processing by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting check process performed by a main CPU 101. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control main processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design memory check processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a time saving number subtraction process by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit end interval process by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern table setting process by a main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol control processing by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process performed by a sub CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process performed by a sub CPU. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command transmission process by a sub CPU. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a message setting process by a sub CPU. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a direct table registration process performed by a sub CPU. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a message transmission process by a sub CPU. 13 is a table showing an example of a selectivity of the number of limiters in a pachinko gaming machine of an extended example 1 for each set value. In a pachinko gaming machine of an extension example 4, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a right-gate for continuously operating accessory. In the pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 4, it is a figure showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a left-gate for continuously operating the role of the role. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the whole menu task performed by a sub CPU. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example when a hole menu screen is displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is an example of the hole menu screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hole menu display processing is executed. It is an example of the hole menu screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hole menu display processing is executed. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hole menu screen displayed in a display area of the liquid crystal display device when a hole menu redisplay process is performed. It is an example of the screen in which the content of the error was displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, (a) a screen indicating that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing was executed, and (b) an abnormal start-up opening winning error occurred. Screen indicating that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed, and (c) both backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed and an abnormal start-up winning error Screen after the notification period indicating that the backup clear process has been executed in the state where the backup clear process has been executed. 10 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201 when the sub CPU 201 performs a setting determination process of determining whether the setting value information is appropriate. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a hole menu process executed by a sub CPU. It is an example of the error information history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process executed by a sub CPU. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, continued from FIG. 59. It is a figure showing an example of an initial screen of a setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on a display area of a liquid crystal display. It is a figure showing an example when “Page” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated on a setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure showing an example when “clear” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure showing an example of a data clear screen where each history data was cleared in a setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, which is an example of an initial screen. FIG. 14 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when “setting display” is selected. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when a new set value is displayed. FIG. 18 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device, which is an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of an operation procedure until a setting change / confirmation history screen on which a set value can be confirmed is displayed on a hole menu screen displayed in a display area of the liquid crystal display device. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a maintenance process performed by a sub CPU. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example when a maintenance screen is displayed in a display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is an example of a maintenance screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example when a guide initial image is displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example when a unimemo initial image is displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example when a password request screen is displayed in a display area of the liquid crystal display device. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an authentication process in a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed in Modification Example 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. is there. 13 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device when an input password is inappropriate in a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. On the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU, a setting change / confirmation history screen for confirming the set values is displayed. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of an operation procedure until the operation is performed. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a volume switch that generates a volume password applied to an authentication process in a modified example 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an authentication process in a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which a password request screen is displayed in a display area of a liquid crystal display device when a setting change / confirmation history process is executed in a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. is there. 15 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for confirming a setting value of setting change / confirmation history information in Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the game system concerning the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing performed by sub CPU. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process in a pachinko gaming machine configuring a gaming system according to Modification Example 3. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process in a portable wireless communication terminal and a server device of a gaming system according to Modification 3. It is a figure showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in a pachinko gaming machine of a gaming system according to a modification 3. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for confirming a setting value of setting change / confirmation history information in a gaming system according to a third modification. It is a figure showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in a portable radio communication terminal of a game system according to a modification 3. FIG. 17 is a view illustrating an example of a password input screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the gaming system according to Modification 3. It is a figure showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the gaming system according to Modification 3. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting opening winning detection processing by main CPU101 in a 2nd embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer counting process performed by a main CPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern determination process performed by a main CPU. It is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of a clune device 630. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of a game ball in the cloon device 630. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit according to a third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of the special electrically-powered accessory and V solenoid in the big hit game state in 3rd Embodiment. It is. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch input detection process by a main CPU according to a third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end interval processing by the main CPU in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design game end processing by the main CPU in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation | movement of the special electric accessory 600 and the V solenoid 635 in the big hit game state in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of a clune device 903. It is an explanatory view showing a rolling path of a game ball in the cloon device 903. It is an explanatory view showing a rolling path of a game ball in the cloon device 903. It is an explanatory view showing a rolling path of a game ball in the cloon device 903. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of an attacker unit 510. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit according to a fourth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a subroutine of a switch input detection process by a main CPU 101. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a subroutine of a V region passage detection process executed in a switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU101. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of a modification of the fourth embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[1. Game machine configuration]
[1-1. Appearance configuration]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the operation button group. FIG. 4 is an example of a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention from the rear side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed obliquely from the upper front right side. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including first and second special symbol display portions. The directions shown in the drawings are directions in front view. Therefore, for example, "left" in the right direction of the drawing means "right" in the drawing as "left" in the front view since the drawing is a rear view. Similarly, in the case where “right” is described in the left direction of the drawing, “left” in the drawing is “right” in the front view for the same reason.

  In the following description, the front-rear direction is defined as the front side and the back side is defined as the front side when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, unless otherwise specified. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side, and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front is a surface that is visible when viewed from the player side, and the back is a surface that is visible when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 and FIGS. 4 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a firing device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, and a game board unit. 17, a payout unit 18, and a substrate unit 19.

  The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back side, and has the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the firing device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front side. I support.

  The glass door 13 is attached to the base door 12 so as to be freely opened and closed. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22 and an operation button group 66. A transparent protective glass 23 is disposed in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protection glass 23 is disposed so as to face a game board unit 17 described later in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. In addition, a speaker 24 and an LED 25 are provided above the glass door 13. The loudspeaker 24 performs, for example, notification by voice, production, error notification, and the like. The LED 25 is, for example, an effect light emitting unit for performing notification or effect with light, and is not limited to the LED as long as the light emitting effect can be performed, and may be, for example, a lamp.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 has a main button 662 and a select button 664. The select button 664 has an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c, and a right select button 664d. Hereinafter, the term “select button 664” means a general term for the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform an operation on a later-described guide menu screen, hole menu screen, or the like using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. The position at which the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13, and may be provided on the plate unit 14, for example, on the upper plate 26.

  The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The plate unit 14 is arranged at a lower front part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

  The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are fired from the launch device 15 toward a game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout opening 61 and an effect button 62. Game balls to be lent out or game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called “CHANCE button”, a “push button”, or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting upward based on a result of a special symbol big hit determination described later.

  The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout opening 63. The game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 are paid out from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27.

  The firing device 15 is for firing game balls stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The firing device 15 is disposed at the lower right front of the base door 12 and at the lower right of the plate unit 14. The firing device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

  The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the firing device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the front side of the panel body 31. The driving device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31 and is constituted by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). In this way, when the firing handle 32 is operated by the player in the firing device 15, a game ball is fired by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

  The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the special symbol big hit determination (hereinafter, the special symbol big hit determination may be simply referred to as "big hit determination") and various effect images related to the game. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an effect design symbol (decorative pattern), an effect image according to the result of the jackpot determination, an effect image during the big hit, a demonstration effect image, This includes the number of suspensions of variable display (variable display) of special symbols and the like. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is disposed substantially at the center of the game board unit 17 (the inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

  In the present embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided for displaying the various effect images, but two liquid crystal display devices are provided, and the effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. It may be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). Sub-control board 40, a payout / firing control board 50 having a payout / firing control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 described later) for controlling payout / firing of game balls, and a power supply circuit 338 (described later) for supplying power. A power supply unit 60 having a power supply unit 60 (see FIG. 9), a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9 described later) are provided.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six stages of “1” to “6” in the present embodiment) in which various data related to the pachinko game are different. The setting “6” is most advantageous to the player, and the smaller the value of the set value, the lower the advantage for the player gradually.

  In the main board case accommodating the main control board 30, a setting switch 332 operated when changing the set value, a setting key 328 operated when changing or confirming the set value, a performance display monitor 334 and an error notification monitor 336 (both refer to FIG. 9 described later) are accommodated. The performance display monitor 334 displays, for example, performance display data and setting values described later. The error notification monitor 336 displays, for example, an error code described later. Note that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case in consideration of security from the viewpoint of the manager of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “gaming machine manager”). ) To prevent the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 from being easily accessed by a third party (for example, a player). In addition, in the main board case, in addition to those in which the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, only the position corresponding to the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the main board case is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the gaming machine manager and the back is exposed, Also includes those in which the responsible person can access the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328.

  The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 is formed in which the shot game balls can roll down.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board unit 17 is disposed at a substantially central part of the game area 20 and a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which the shot game balls can be rolled down is formed. A center unit 174, a normal electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176 are provided. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 includes respective accessories such as an upper accessory 1000 (see FIG. 7) arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Each of these special effects 1000 functions as a directing effect operable based on the result of the special lottery.

  An opening 1722 is formed in the transparent panel 172 at a position where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, a guide rail 26 is provided, and game nails and the like are implanted. The game ball fired from the firing device 15 jumps out of the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20 and collides with a game nail or the like and flows downward under the game area 20 while changing the traveling direction.

  The guide rail 26 includes two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as “outer rail 26a” and “inner rail 26b”). The game area 20 is defined (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the shot game balls to an upper portion of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is disposed on the left side of the transparent panel 172 inside the outer rail 26a.

  The center unit 174 includes a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is disposed above the game area 20, and divides a downflow area of the game ball in the game area 20 into left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

  The game balls fired by the firing device 15 are divided into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20, and the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are planted on the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to the collision with the installed game nails and the like, the water flows downward while changing the traveling direction. The flow-down area of the launched game ball is distributed according to the operation amount of the launch handle 52. Specifically, when the operation amount of the launch handle 52 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area of the center rail 1742. Note that the method of hitting the game ball down the left area of the center rail 1742 is called "left hit", and the method of hitting the game ball down the right area of the center rail 1742 is called "right hit", It is allowed to be separated by the player.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the special winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed substantially at the lower right in the game area 20 and below the pass gate 49.

  The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of the jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward in the front-rear direction, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 9). The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be (or easily) won to the special winning opening 540, and the special winning combination 600 It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the big hit gaming state based on the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or a second starting port 440 described later. It is performed when it is done. In addition, the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420 or a second starting port 440 described later is displayed in the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 in the special symbol. Is indicated by the stop display mode.

  In this specification, when simply referred to as "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol and second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

  The first starting port 420 provides an opportunity for a jackpot determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and causes the result of the jackpot determination to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a first special symbol display unit 73 described later. Is to give. The first starting port 420 is provided with a first starting port switch 421 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the first starting port 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421, a big hit determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a predetermined number of game balls are discharged from the payout port 61. It is paid out (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is performed by left-handing.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The normal electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is disposed on the right side in a front view, and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side in a front view. Conventionally, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 has often been arranged, for example, below the first starting port 420. However, in recent years, the liquid crystal display device 16 has been required to be larger, and it has been difficult to arrange the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged substantially at the lower left of the gaming area 20.

  The second starting port 440 provides a trigger for a jackpot determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and a trigger for displaying the result of the jackpot determination on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a second special symbol display unit 74 described later. Is to give. The second starting port 440 is provided with a second starting port switch 441 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, a big hit determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the payout port 61. From the outlet 63 to the lower plate 27 (discharged). The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. Note that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handing in principle.

  The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 rotatable rightward, a starting port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the power of the starting port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620. ). When the blade member 4620 is driven by the starting port solenoid 4630, the ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state where game balls easily pass and a closed state where game balls hardly pass. It is composed of When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is driven, the game ball wins the second starting port 440 or is discharged from the out port 450 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is done. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

  The pass gate 49 normally gives an opportunity for symbol determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed). The passage gate 49 is disposed on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9). When a game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the passed game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball to the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the special winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed substantially at the lower right of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially at the lower right of the game area 20 is that in recent years it has been required to make the liquid crystal display device 16 larger, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such a large-sized liquid crystal display device 16.

  The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of the jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward in the front-rear direction, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 9). The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be (or easily) won to the special winning opening 540, and the special winning combination 600 It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is performed when the special symbol is in a specific stop display mode on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and is shifted to the big hit game state. Done in

  The general winning openings 53, 54 and 55 are arranged at the lower left of the game board unit 17, and the general winning opening 56 is arranged at the lower right of the gaming board unit 17. The general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a are provided in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, and 56 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27). (Discharged).

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 have three prize balls, the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, and 56 have 10 prize balls, and the large winning port 540 has three prize balls. The number of prize balls is set to 15, respectively. This value (the number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

  The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost portion of the center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the downflow direction of the game ball). The out port 57 finally flows in when the fired game ball does not win any of the starting ports or winning ports.

  The LED unit 70 is arranged at the lower right of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 41 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display sections, a normal symbol display section 71, a normal symbol hold display section 72, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74, a first special symbol display section. It has a symbol holding display section 75 and a second special symbol holding display section 76.

  The normal symbol display section 71 displays the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game for determining whether or not to drive the normal electric accessory 460 to be in an open state based on the result of the determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display section 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is usually displayed as a symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the variable display.

  When the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter, referred to as “normal hit”), a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (normal symbol) is a specific stop display mode. Thus, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern. The difficulty of winning the game ball to 440 is changed.

  The ordinary symbol reserved display section 72 displays the number of times of execution of the suspended display of the ordinary symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of suspended regular symbols of variable display”). The normal symbol hold display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol holding display section 72 displays the number of held normal symbol variable displays by a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of the ordinary symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. When the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended twice, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. In addition, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b is turned on. In addition, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

  The first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74 display the result of the judgment (big hit judgment) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or the maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (big hit determination).

  The first special symbol display section 73 includes a display LED group 73a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs a fluctuation display in response to a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 (start winning), and also displays a result of a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) of turning on and off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

  When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is a jackpot, a combination of turning on and off (special symbols) of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a is a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which the gaming ball can enter the special winning opening 540 is set. Become. In the following description, a special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 is referred to as a first special symbol.

  The second special symbol display section 74 includes a display LED group 74a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs a fluctuation display in response to a prize of a game ball to the second starting port 440 (start prize), and displays a result of a jackpot determination based on the prize of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) of turning on and off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

  When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a jackpot, a combination of turning on and off (special symbol) of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a is a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which the gaming ball can enter the special winning opening 540 is set. Become. In the following description, a special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display section 74 based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  As described above, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, a normal display is performed. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state which is a state advantageous to the player is determined. In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 and a jackpot determination based on a winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440. That is, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the game is shifted to the big hit game state in which the round game in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

  The first special symbol holding display section 75 and the second special symbol holding display section 76 indicate the number of times of execution of the change display of the held special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of holding special pattern change display”). To display. The first special symbol hold display section 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol holding display section 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of held special symbol change displays by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display mode of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b is the same as the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display section 72.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 for controlling a game, a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling an effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and a payout / launch control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338.

  The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

  The main CPU 101 is connected to a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

  The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store written information even in a non-energized state. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

  The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, a first special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, There are provided a first special symbol start storage area (1) to a first special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, a second special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as a start memory, and a second special symbol start storage area of up to four times. There are provided a second special symbol start storage area (1) to a second special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as start memory.

  Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 for generating a reset signal when power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 retains various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103 when power is turned off (power is turned off).

  Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

  For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display section 71, a normal symbol hold display section 72, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74, a first special symbol hold display section 75, The second special symbol holding display section 76, the starting opening solenoid 4630 for driving the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the big winning opening solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. In addition, the main control circuit 100 transmits data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 700 for managing a pachinko gaming machine in the entire hall. An external terminal plate 323 to be used is connected.

  In the main control circuit 100, a first starting port switch 421, a second starting port switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a performance display monitor 334, and the like. Is connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power failure in accordance with an operation of a game arcade manager.

  Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is a key or a key which is a trigger for executing a setting change process and a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 is operable to be pressed, and is used to change a set value set in a setting change process described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager cannot easily access the setting key.

  The main control circuit 100 is connected to a payout / firing control circuit 300. The payout / firing control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 for paying out game balls, a firing device 15 for firing game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370 in accordance with a player operation.

  Upon receiving the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / firing control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, Control is performed to cause the payout device 340 to pay out game balls. When the firing handle 32 is gripped by the player and rotated clockwise, the payout / firing control circuit 300 controls the firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotating angle (the amount of rotation). ) To control the firing of game balls.

  Further, the sub-control circuit 200 (command input port 208) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub-control circuit 200 performs display control on the liquid crystal display device 16, control on sound generated from the speaker 24, control on light of the LED 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  In the present embodiment, a command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, while a signal is not supplied from the sub-control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control circuit 200 may be configured to transmit a signal to the main control circuit 100.

  The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, an LED control circuit 206, a character control circuit 207, a command input port 208, and the like. The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. The sub-control circuit 200 includes an effect button switch 621 that is turned on / off by operating the effect button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned on / off by operating the main button 662, and a select button 664a to 664d. Select button switches 6641a to 6641d that are turned ON / OFF by operation are connected. In practice, select button switches 6641a to 6641d corresponding to the select buttons 664a to 664d are provided, respectively. However, in FIG. 9, these are collectively referred to as a select button switch 6641.

  The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is, another mode may be used. For example, a storage medium such as a hard disk drive, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, and a ROM cartridge may be used as the storage unit. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may not be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after power-on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

  The work RAM 203 has a function of storing values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a read / write storage medium may be used.

  The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control on the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter, referred to as a VDP), an image data ROM storing data for generating various image data, a frame buffer for buffering the image data, and an image signal A D / A converter or the like for converting the data as is provided.

  The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in a frame buffer according to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Note that the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data indicating a decorative design, background image data, and effect image data.

  Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can perform control to display an image related to a game on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The audio control circuit 205 is a circuit for performing control relating to audio generated from the speaker 24. The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC for controlling audio, an audio data ROM for storing various audio data, an amplifier for amplifying an audio signal (hereinafter, referred to as AMP), and the like.

  The sound source IC controls a sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one audio data from a plurality of audio data stored in the audio data ROM according to an audio generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies an audio signal and generates a sound from the speaker 24.

  The LED control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the LEDs 25 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

  The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory. The accessory control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and an accessory data ROM in which an operation pattern and a lighting pattern are stored. Etc.

  Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM according to the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read out from the accessory data ROM, and a driving signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

  The command input port 208 receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and lending balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1. The payout / firing control circuit 300 includes a payout device 350 for paying out gaming balls, and a game. A launching device 340 for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power failure in response to an operation of a game arcade administrator, and the like are connected.

  The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply a power supply voltage required for playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the like. .

  The power supply circuit 338 is connected to the power switch 35 and the like. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, but may be connected to the power supply circuit 338 instead. Even in this case, it is preferable that the information is stored in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. . Even in such a case, the inside of the predetermined case includes not only a case where the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, but also a case where the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the case correspond. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned from the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the gaming machine manager, , And those in which the gaming machine manager can access the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328.

  Here, display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. The performance display monitor 334 displays performance display data under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a state other than the jackpot game state to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 shots) of game balls, and is also referred to as a base value.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 totals the base value based on the past game history, and stores the totaled result in a specific work area described later in the work area of the main RAM 103. Although this specific work area will be described later, it is an area in which data is not cleared even when a backup clear process described later is performed. It should be noted that the totaling of the base values may be performed based on a predetermined operation being performed, or the totaling may be always performed and the base value may be constantly displayed on the performance display monitor 334. .

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 includes: all history totaling means for totalizing all base values based on all game histories from the initial power-on (first power-on after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured) to the present; A set value-based history tallying means for executing tallying of set value-based base values based on past game histories for each set value.

  For example, when the display operation of all the base values is performed by the game machine manager or the like, the all history totaling means executes the totalization of the above all base values. All the base values totalized by the all history totaling means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. When the display operation of the set value-based base values is performed, the set value-based history tallying means executes the tally of the set value-based base values. The set value-based base values totaled by the set value-based history totaling means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  The set value-based history tallying means can also tally only a base value for an arbitrary set value in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base value for the set value that has been set, but also the base value for another set value other than the set value can be totaled. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base value of another set value on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting change process described later.

  In addition, the main CPU 101, for example, in response to an operation by a gaming machine manager or the like, both the total base value totalized by the total history totalizing means and the set value-specific base value totalized by the set value-specific history totaling means. Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of them can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

  Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base value of the specific set value on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all the set values in a list. Alternatively, both the total base value and the set value-specific base values may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all the set values in a list or displaying both the all base values and the base values for each set value in a list, the performance display monitor 334 and both other display means are used. It may be displayed.

  Further, the main CPU 101 includes a total history totalizing unit and a set value-specific history totalizing unit. A post-setting change history summarizing means for summing up the post-setting change base value based on the game history may be provided. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

  In this way, by displaying all or a part of the entire base value and the set value-based base value and / or the set value-based base value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game is performed. It is possible to easily confirm information based on past game history in the machine 1.

  In this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, the total number of game balls to be paid out is paid by entering a special electric auditorium (large winning prize port) or an ordinary electric auditorium. You may make it display the ratio of the number of game balls issued (payout by the accessory). In addition, it may be a display for the total number of shots, or may be a display for a ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric auditors (large winning opening). They may be displayed for each setting.

  The error notification monitor 336 displays an error code described later. The error notification monitor 336 may display, in addition to the error code, a setting change code indicating that a setting change process described later is being performed, a setting checking code indicating that a setting check process is being described later, and the like. it can. During the setting change, a symbol (setting change symbol) which is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device may be displayed.

[2. Function flow]
Next, a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a view illustrating a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is fired by a user's operation and a payout control process of the game ball is performed when the game ball wins various kinds. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

  When the "big hit" in the special symbol game or the "normal hit" in the normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball will win is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

  In addition, in various winnings, a special symbol start winning prize, which is one condition for performing a special symbol variable display in a special symbol game, and one condition for performing a normal symbol variable display in a normal symbol game. It also includes certain regular symbol starting prizes.

  Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game will be described. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed by the main CPU 101 as control processing.

  (1) When a special symbol starting prize is won in the special symbol game, various random numbers (for example, a random number for a jackpot determination and a random number for a symbol determination) are read from various counters (for example, a jackpot determination counter and a symbol determination counter). ) Is extracted (acquired), and the extracted random numbers are stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 10).

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this discriminating process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random numbers are stored by the special symbol starting prize, and the change display of the special symbols is performed on the condition that various data such as random numbers are stored as one condition. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

  Next, when starting the variation display of the special symbol, the big hit determination random number value extracted from the big hit determination counter is referred to, and a big hit determination as to whether or not the big hit is made is performed. Thereafter, a stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the symbol determination random number value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described big hit determination.

  Next, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the above-described big hit determination, and the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the special symbol variation pattern (variable display pattern) is referred to. ).

  Next, an effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the above-described big hit determination, the above-described special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the above-described special symbol variation pattern are referred to. An effect pattern to be executed in accordance with the special symbol change display is determined.

  Next, as a result of the determined big hit determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. An effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is performed.

  Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a “big hit” is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that "big hit" has been reached, a big hit game state control process for performing a big hit game state is executed. In the big hit game state, the possibility of the various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “big hit” has not been achieved, the big hit gaming state control process is not executed.

  If it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or if the big hit game state control processing has been completed, a game state shift control processing for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control processing, management of a normal game state different from the big hit game state is performed.

  As the gaming state at the time of normal, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, a gaming state determined as “big hit” with a predetermined probability (hereinafter, referred to as “normal gaming state”) or a probability determined as “big hit” A game state (hereinafter, referred to as a “high-probability game state”) that is greater than a normal game state, or a game state in which a special symbol starting prize is easily obtained as a result of a normal hit determination described below (hereinafter, referred to as a “time reduction game state”) ). After that, a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-described special symbol control process are repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins during a special symbol fluctuating display, various data extracted at the time of the start winning (a random number value for a jackpot determination, a random number value for a symbol determination, etc.). ) Are stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. As described above, storing various data (for example, a random number value for determining a big hit) until the condition for starting the change display of the special symbol is satisfied is referred to as “holding”, and the various data to be held is referred to as start storage.

  That is, when the game ball wins during the special symbol change display, the execution of the special symbol change display corresponding to the start winning is suspended, and is suspended after the currently executed special symbol variation display ends. The fluctuation display of the special symbols is started in order. Hereinafter, various data on the reserved special symbols are also referred to as “reserved balls”.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described later, two types of special symbol starting prizes (first and second starting opening prizes) are provided, and up to four special symbol starting prizes are provided for each special symbol starting prize. Until the execution of the special symbol change display can be suspended. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol can be suspended up to a maximum of eight in total of four first special symbols and four second special symbols.

  Although not shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment determines a hit of a reserved ball (whether a “big hit” has been won) based on the information of the reserved ball described above, It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

  (2) When a normal symbol start prize is won in the normal symbol game, a random value is extracted from the normal hit determination counter and the random value is stored (the normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 10). Refer to the winning process flow).

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this discriminating process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol starting prize, and assuming that the random number value is stored as one condition, the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Determine.

  Next, when starting the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination is performed as to whether or not the “normal hit” is set. Thereafter, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this processing, the result of the ordinary hit determination is referred to to determine the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol.

  Next, the result of the determined normal hit determination and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process of controlling the variation display of the ordinary symbol and the effect control process of performing a predetermined effect are executed. .

  When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not “normal hit” is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that "normal hit" is achieved, a normal hit game control process for performing a normal hit game is executed.

  In the normal winning game control processing, the possibility of the various winnings described above, especially the possibility of the special symbol starting winning of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not become "normal hit", the normal hit game control processing is not executed. Thereafter, a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-described normal symbol control process are repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout of the game ball is performed according to conditions such as whether or not a “big hit” is obtained in the special symbol game, a transition state of the gaming state, and whether or not the “simple hit” is generated in the normal symbol game. The ease with which the control process is performed changes.

  In the present embodiment, as a method for extracting various random numbers, a soft random number method in which a random number value is generated within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at predetermined intervals, a random number value is counted from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. May be adopted as the above-described method for extracting various random numbers.

  When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 12 shows a hit type when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit (hereinafter, referred to as “main symbol”). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation time (variable display time) determination table stored in the main ROM 102. As shown in FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200. In the following description, the terms of the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 103 not shown in FIGS. 11 to 14 are used, but these are shown in FIG.

  In describing the probability of a big hit shown in FIG. 11, first, a big hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be briefly described.

  When detecting the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts the first special symbol big hit determination random number from the big hit determination counter, and stores the random number stored in the main RAM 103. With reference to the 1 special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), a big hit determination (hereinafter, referred to as a "big hit determination of the first special symbol") is performed on the extracted random numbers for big hit determination. In addition, the extraction of the random number for the big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed even when the big hit game state is controlled.

  Similarly, when detecting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (for example, see FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts the second special symbol big hit determination random number from the big hit determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the second special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), a big hit determination (hereinafter, referred to as a “big hit determination of the second special symbol”) for the extracted random number for big hit determination is performed. In addition, the extraction of the random number for the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot game state is controlled.

  When the big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "losing". Further, when the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, it is determined to be one of “big hit” and “losing” as in the big hit determination of the first special symbol. The value of the probability change flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)” is stored in the jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively. ), The relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number determined to be “big hit” or “losing” and the corresponding determination value data (“big hit determination value data” and “losing determination value data”) Is stipulated.

  In this embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the big hit determination random number is generated in a range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the range of the jackpot determination random number. In addition, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

  The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”, the probability change flag is “1”, and when the gaming state is the “low-probability gaming state”, the probability variation flag is “0”.

  The time reduction flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “time reduction gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “time reduction gaming state”, the time reduction flag is “1”, and when the gaming state is “non-time reduction gaming state”, the time reduction flag is “0”. In the time saving game state, the number of time savings is also managed by the main CPU 101, and each time the special symbol fluctuates once, the number of time savings is decremented by one.

  In the time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being determined as a normal hit in the normal hit determination (normal hit probability) is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, the frequency of the ordinary electric auditors goods 46 changing from the closed state to the opening state, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is higher than in the non-time-saving gaming state. However, in the time-saving gaming state, instead of increasing the normal winning probability as compared with the non-hours-saving gaming state, for example, by increasing the frequency of executing the normal winning lottery (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric winning combination The frequency at which the object 46 changes from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the normal electric accessory 46 may be easily won by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 46. Further, two or three of the above three aspects may be combined.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal game state in which both the probable change flag and the time saving flag are OFF, the promiscuous time saving game state in which the probable change flag is ON and the time reduction flag is ON, and the time saving game in which the probable change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 in one of the game states.

  When the main CPU 101 detects a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts a random number for a jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the extracted random for jackpot determination of the first special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as the start memory until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, at the time of starting the variable display of the first special symbol, a big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

  When the main CPU 101 detects a winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the extracted big hit determination randomness of the second special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a starting memory until the change display of the second special symbol is started. Then, at the time of starting the variable display of the second special symbol, a big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss.

[3-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 11, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. In the low-probability gaming state where the jackpot probability is relatively low (probable change flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/300 in setting 1, about 1/290 in setting 2, and about 1/290 in setting 3. The setting is 1/280, the setting 4 is about 1/270, the setting 5 is about 1/260, and the setting 6 is about 1/250. When the game state is the high-probability game state (probable change flag ON) in which the big hit probability is relatively high, the big hit probability for each set value is about 1/30 in setting 1, about 1/29 in setting 2, and 3 in setting 2. The setting is about 1/28, the setting 4 is about 27/27, the setting 5 is about 1/26, and the setting 6 is about 25/25.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, since the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, the number of jackpot determination value data of the first special symbol is set to the set value. By changing the probability according to the set value, the big hit probability is changed. For example, in the low-probability gaming state of the first special symbol, the number of the big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 for the range of the random number for the big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of hits is 234 in setting 3, 243 in setting 4, 252 in setting 5, and 262 in setting 6, so that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value. In addition, the number of big hit determination value data in the high-probability gaming state is 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, and 26 in setting 6. It has become.

  Also, in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the gaming state is a low-probability game state (probability change flag OFF) in which the jackpot probability is relatively low, the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, and 280 minutes in setting 3. 1, setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. In the high-probability gaming state (probable change flag ON) in which the jackpot probability is relatively high, the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, and 28 in setting 3. The setting is 1/1, setting 4 is 1/27, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

  That is, the big hit probability of the second special symbol is also changed according to the set value by changing the number of the big hit determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the second special symbol, the number of the big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 for the range of the random number for the big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of hits is 234 in setting 3, 243 in setting 4, 252 in setting 5, and 262 in setting 6, so that the jackpot probability varies depending on the setting value. In addition, the number of the big hit determination value data in the high-probability gaming state is also 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, and 26 in setting 6. It is individual.

  Note that the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the big hit determination of the second special symbol have the same big hit probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the set values are the same, the big hit probability in the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the big hit probability in the big hit determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, if the setting is 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low-probability gaming state (1/28 in the high-probability gaming state), and the jackpot probability is the second special symbol. Is the same as the big hit probability in the big hit determination (1/280 in the low-probability game state, and 1/28 in the high-probability game state).

  In the present embodiment, the setting values are six steps from setting 1 to setting 6, but the setting values are not necessarily six steps and can be arbitrarily determined as long as the setting values are plural.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability is configured to be different when the set value is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a common jackpot probability (first probability) is common to settings 1 and 2; a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability) is common to settings 3 and 4; A common jackpot probability (third probability higher than the second probability) may be set to the setting 6.

  In the present embodiment, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535. By changing the number of the jackpot determination value data according to the set value, the jackpot probability is varied for each set value. However, the technique for varying the jackpot probability for each set value is not limited to this. By setting the number of data common to all the settings and changing the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as the total random number according to the set value, the jackpot probability may be varied according to the set value. For example, the number of the jackpot determination value data is 218 common to all the settings, and the range (width) of the random number for the jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 65535 in the setting 1 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300) and in the setting 2 The range of 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), the range of 0 to 61039 in setting 3 (big hit probability of 1/280), the range of 0 to 58859 in setting 4 (big hit probability of 1/270) Setting 5 is in the range of 0 to 56679 (big hit probability is 1/260), setting 6 is in the range of 0 to 54499 (big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 determines the big hit in the range according to the set value. By generating a random number for use, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. In addition, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (the range of the jackpot determination random number) having more digits than the numerator (the number of jackpot determination value data). Compared to a method in which the range is a fixed value and the number of the big hit determination value data is changed according to the set value, the big hit probability for each set value can be set more finely.

  In the above description, the number of the big hit determination value data is common to all the settings, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value. It is not always necessary to make them common. For example, in setting 1, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218, and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 65535 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300). 219, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is in the range of 0 to 63509 (the jackpot probability is about 1/290), and in setting 3, the number of jackpot determination value data is 220, The range (width) is in the range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280). In setting 4, the number (221) of the jackpot determination value data and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination are in the range of 0 to 59669. (The big hit probability is about 1/270). In the setting 5, the number of the big hit determination value data is 222 pieces, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is 0 to 57719 (the big hit probability is about 1/260). And in setting 6 , The number of the jackpot determination value data and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number are in the range of 0 to 55749 (the jackpot probability is about 1/250). Even when both the range (width) is changed according to the set value, the set value is compared with the method in which the range of the big hit determination random number is fixed and the number of the big hit judgment value data is changed according to the set value. It is possible to finely set the big hit probability for each.

  If the main CPU 101 changes the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as the total random number in accordance with the set value, the main CPU 101 performs the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 described later (see FIG. 31). In addition to or instead of determining whether the set value data is within the range of “0” to “5”, for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number is set to the set value. It may be checked whether the value is within the range, and / or whether the number of the big hit determination value data is the number specified in the set value. Then, if it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number and / or the number of the jackpot determination value data is out of the range according to the set value) (step described later) If it corresponds to NO in S721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and the game cannot be advanced.

[3-2. Jackpot distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, a description will be given of the jackpot distribution when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the distribution of the main symbol is common to all the settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 12 are stored in the main ROM 102.

  As shown in FIG. 12, when the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol on the basis of the extracted symbol determination random numbers, as shown in FIG. 25.0%), Toku 1-2 (allocation probability 25.0%), Toku 1-3 (allocation probability 25.0%), and Toku 1-4 (allocation probability 25.0%) ). The special chart 1-1 is a big hit with the number of rounds being 4, the probability change flag being OFF, and the number of times saved being 100 times. In the special figure 1-2, the number of rounds, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed (the time saving flag is set to OFF when the next big hit game state is started). It is a big hit. The special chart 1-3 is a big hit with the number of rounds 10, the probability change flag OFF, and the number of time savings of 100. The special map 1-4 is a big hit where the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving is continued until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the first special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner over a variable time determined with reference to FIG. Execute control to stop.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, if a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the positive change flag is turned ON as in the special figures 1-2 and 1-4). This is a so-called “probable loop machine” in which the high-probability gaming state continues after the big-hit gaming state ends and then the next big-hit gaming state starts. In such a probability changing loop machine, the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the high-probability game state is a big hit, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the big hit game state ends, and then the next big hit game state starts again. The high-probability gaming state continues until the game is played. Then, if the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the high-probability gaming state is a big hit and a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag is set as in the special figure 1-1 or the special figure 1-3). If it is a big hit that does not become ON), after the big hit game state is ended, the game is controlled to the low probability game state without being controlled to the high probability game state.

  When the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 converts the main symbol into a special symbol 2-1 (allocation probability 50.0%) or a special symbol based on the extracted symbol determining random numbers. 2-2 (allocation probability 50.0%). The special map 2-1 is a big hit with the number of rounds 10, the probability change flag OFF, and the number of time savings of 100. The special figure 2-2 is a big hit in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving is continued until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner over a variable time determined with reference to FIG. Execute the control to stop.

  When the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines a loss symbol and executes control to stop the special symbol at the determined loss symbol.

  The number of rounds is the number of rounds of a round game executed in the big hit game state. If the probability change flag is ON, the game state after the big hit game state ends is controlled to a high probability game state (game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON), and if the probability change flag is OFF, the big hit game state is set. Is controlled to a low-probability gaming state (a gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF). In the following, the number of rounds, the probability change flag is OFF, and the big hit of 100 times (for example, the big hit in FIG. 1-1) is called “4R normal big hit”, and the number of rounds, the certain change flag is ON, and the next big hit game is A jackpot whose time saving continues until it is executed (for example, the jackpot of Toku-zu 1-2) is called a “4R probability changing jackpot”, and has a number of rounds of 10, a probability changing flag OFF, and a jackpot of 100 times-saving times (for example, FIG. 3, the big hit in the special map 2-1 is referred to as "10R normal big hit", and the number of rounds, the probability change flag is ON, and the big hit in which the time saving is continued until the next big hit game is executed (for example, the special map 1-4, The big hit in Tokujin Figure 2-2) is referred to as "10R probability variable big hit".

  Further, in this embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the time saving flag is always set to ON. Whether the time reduction flag is set to ON or OFF may be determined according to the main symbol to be performed.

[3-3. Special design fluctuation time]
Next, a flow until the change time of the special symbol is determined will be described with reference to FIG. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol at the same time. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5) by the sub control circuit 200 (the sub CPU 201). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the determined special pattern change pattern (that is, the change time and the effect content) can be different depending on the set value. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 13 are stored in the main ROM 102. In addition, there is a case where the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. .

  As shown in FIG. 13, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol big hit determination, and the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol big hit determination. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the present embodiment, the change time of the special symbol is determined using a common table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the variation time of the special symbol may be determined using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The special symbol fluctuation time determination table includes a special symbol big hit determination result, a game state, a random number range for reach determination, a main symbol when the special symbol big hit determination result is a big hit, and an effect selection. The relationship between the random number range for use, the variation pattern (variable display pattern), the variation pattern designation command, the variation time, and the effect contents is defined. However, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the probability-variable time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are not distinguished. Further, as for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, different random number ranges are set according to the set values.

  The reach determination random number range is a random number used for determining whether or not to execute a reach effect for each set value when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss. The main CPU 101 extracts a reach determination random number from a reach determination counter when a game ball has won a first start port 420 or a second start port 440 (both shown in, for example, FIG. 5), and the extracted reach determination. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit determination using the random number value for the big hit determination when starting the fluctuation display of the special symbol. When the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the main CPU 101 stores the big hit determination in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not a reach effect is to be executed using the reach determination random number. In the present embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be changed as appropriate.

  For example, if the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss, the reach determination random number range in which the reach effect is determined to be executed is 0 in the settings 1.2. The setting is set to 0 to 26 in the setting 3.4, and is set to 0 to 27 in the setting 5.6. In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probability-variable time-saving game state (probability-variable flag ON and the time-saving flag ON) is a loss, the reach determination random number range for determining that the reach effect is to be executed is set to 1. 2 is defined as 0 to 10, setting 3 and 4 is defined as 0 to 11, and setting 5.6 is defined as 0 to 12.

  As described above, in the case where the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a loss, the reach effect is more easily executed in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2;・ Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than 4 That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the reach effect.

  In the present embodiment, when determining whether or not to perform the reach effect, the reach determination random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and common to the setting 5 and the setting 5. 6, but is not limited to this, and may be different for all settings.

  Also, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is for the case where the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss. Determines that the reach effect is to be executed regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

  The effect selection random number range is a random number used for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol for each set value. The main CPU 101 extracts an effect selection random number from the effect selection counter when a game ball wins in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 (both shown in FIG. 5 for example), and the extracted effect selection. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines an effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to a game state and a result of determining whether or not to execute a reach effect (only when a result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss). Is used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the effect selection random number value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the gaming state.

  Specifically, the special symbol fluctuation time when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag OFF and the time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined to execute the reach effect is: It is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normally normal reach) is set to 0 to 57 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 58 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5 and 6, it is defined as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 58 to 89 for setting 1.2 and 59 to 89 for setting 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 for settings 1 to 6 in common.

  In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined not to execute the reach effect is as follows. Is determined. In other words, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 10000 msec (normal fluctuation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in the setting 1.2 and 0 to 50 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5 and 6, it is defined as 0 to 49. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal fluctuation B) is set to 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2 and 51 to 99 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 50 to 99.

  In addition, the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and the time reduction flag ON) or the normal time reduction game state (probability variation flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON) is lost, and the reach effect is executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during working hours) is defined as 0 to 57 in the settings 1.2 and 0 to 58 in the settings 3.4. In the settings 5 and 6, it is defined as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super-reach A during working hours) is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1.2 and 59 to 89 in settings 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 msec (super-reach B during the working hours) is set to 90 to 99 for settings 1 to 6 in common.

  In addition, the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and the time reduction flag ON) or the normal time reduction game state (probability variation flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON) is lost, and the reach effect is not executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (shortened fluctuation A) is set to 0 to 51 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 50 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 0 to 49. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortened fluctuation B) is set to 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2 and 51 to 99 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, it is defined as 50 to 99.

  Since the main symbol is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, the determination of the change time of the special symbol is not involved.

  The fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal gaming state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF) is a big hit is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. In other words, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal normal reach) is set to 0 to 1 in the setting 1.2 and 0 to 2 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, 0 to 3 are specified. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 2 to 49 in the setting 1.2 and to 3 to 49 in the setting 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 for settings 1 to 6 in common.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the probable variation time saving game state (probability variation flag ON and time saving flag ON) or the normal time saving game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is a special symbol variation time, It is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during working hours) is set to 0 to 1 in the setting 1.2 and to 0 to 2 in the setting 3.4. In the settings 5.6, 0 to 3 are specified. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super-reach A during working hours) is set to 2 to 49 in the setting 1.2 and to 3 to 49 in the setting 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 msec (super-reach B during the working hours) is set to 50 to 99 for the settings 1 to 6 in common.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as long as the gaming state, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and the result of the determination as to whether to execute the reach effect are the same, the variation of the special symbol is changed. As for the time, it is easier for the setting 3.4 to be determined to have a shorter fluctuation time than for the setting 1.2, and the setting 5.6 is more likely to be determined to be a shorter fluctuation time than for the setting 3.4. Therefore, the higher the set value is, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the number of lotteries) is increased. Eventually, there is a high expectation that the number of executions of the big hit game state when viewed in the unit time is high, and the probability that the big hit game state is executed in the unit time is also high. An advantageous game can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the effect selection random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and common to the setting 5 and the setting 6. Although common, it is not limited to this, and may be different for all set values.

  In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit is determined commonly for all the main symbols, but is not limited to this, and the special symbol is changed according to the main symbol. May be configured to vary.

  The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the effect contents. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” represents the normal super reach B having the fluctuation time of 40000 msec.

  The fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 as data representing the fluctuation time and the effect contents. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is “05H”, a fluctuation pattern designation command of “83H05H” is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol designating command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[3-4. Stop pattern of decorative pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, an example of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined at the selection rate shown in FIG. 12 when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit will be described. . The contents of the table shown in FIG. 14 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200.

  Upon receiving the symbol designating command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) changes the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designating command, regardless of the set value. decide. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designating command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special symbol 1-2, the sub CPU 201 determines that all the decorative symbols are the same as the specific symbol (for example, “7” symbol). Since the distribution probability of the aspect is 0%, all of the decorative symbols (three decorative symbols in the present embodiment) are the same even-numbered symbol (allocation probability of 30.0%), or all of the decorations The pattern is determined so that the symbols become the same odd-numbered symbols (allocation probability: 70.0%). In the present embodiment, the specific symbol is a “7” symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and another symbol (for example, a “V” symbol) may be used as the specific symbol if it can be recognized as a big hit having a high degree of profit as viewed from the player. Is also good.

  As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 14 is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 14 when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, FIG. Are determined as the stop symbols of the decorative symbol. The symbols other than the symbols shown in FIG. 14 correspond to, for example, symbols in which at least one of the decorative symbols is different from the other decorative symbols.

  As described above, according to FIG. 14, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped depends on which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the big hit determination. Whether the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is a jackpot controlled to the high-probability gaming state, and whether the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot gaming state is 10R Or it can vary.

  That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 12 is the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, or the special figure 2-1 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot in which the probability change flag is not set ON), Regardless of the set value, the operation always stops in a mode (hereinafter, referred to as a "first mode") in which all the decorative symbols are the same even symbol.

  Also, when the main symbol is the special symbol 1-2 (4R probability variable big hit), the first mode or all odd symbols having the same decoration symbol (other than the "7" symbol which is the specific symbol) regardless of the set value (Odd number symbol) (hereinafter, referred to as “second mode”).

  In addition, when the main symbol is the special symbol 1-4 (10R probability big hit), regardless of the set value, all the decorative symbols have the same odd number symbol, or all the decorative symbols have the same specific symbol. (Hereinafter referred to as a “specific mode”).

  Further, when the main symbol is the special map 2-2 (10R probability change big hit), it stops in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Both Toku-zu 1-4 and Toku-zu 2-2 have a 10R probability variable jackpot, but since Toku-zu 1-4 is a jackpot based on a prize of a game ball to the first starting port 420, a jackpot in a normal game state It is highly likely that he was won. In addition, since the special map 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, it is highly likely that the big hit is won in the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state.

  In this manner, when stopping in a specific mode, the 10R certain jackpot with the greatest profit for the player is determined, and when stopping in a mode in which all decorative symbols have the same odd number symbol, a certain variable jackpot (4R certain jackpot or 10R) is achieved. (Variable jackpot) is determined. On the other hand, when the game is stopped in the first mode, it is determined that the 10R probability of change is not the largest, and the possibility of the 4R probability of change is still large.

  If the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, which jackpot is the jackpot may be notified to the player when all the decorative symbols are stopped, or the jackpot game The notification may be performed during the execution of the state, or may be notified when the big hit gaming state ends. Although not employed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even though the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends is a big hit controlled to the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state May be controlled to a so-called “latency change state” that does not clearly indicate to the player.

[4. Other examples of basic specifications of pachinko machines]

Although the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment are as described above, the present invention is not limited to the above specifications and can be changed as appropriate. An example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described below. However, the following description is an example, and it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to this.
[4-1. Variation of special symbol fluctuation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a description will be given of a variation of the special symbol fluctuation time (that is, the special symbol fluctuation pattern). FIG. 15 is a diagram showing another example of the special symbol fluctuation time determination table stored in the main ROM 102. In addition, as described above, the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation decreases as the number of reserved special symbols increases. Is omitted.

  In addition, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation of the special symbol described with reference to FIG. A counting means (not shown) is provided. This lottery number counting means resets, for example, at the start of the big hit gaming state, and starts counting the number of times the special symbol has changed starting from when the big hit gaming state ends.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in another example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (probable change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect is made. This is performed in accordance with both the number of times the special symbol has been changed counted from the point in time when the big hit gaming state ends and the set value.

  Specifically, when the number of times the special symbol has changed from a specific point in time (eg, the point at which the big hit game state ends) is 0 to 1000, a reach determination random number range in which it is determined that a reach effect is to be executed is determined. Are set to 0 to 25 in the setting 1.2, set to 0 to 26 in the setting 3.4, and set to 0 to 27 in the setting 5.6. These are the same as FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of times the special symbol changes from the point when the big hit gaming state ends becomes 1001 or more, the reach determination random number range in which the reach effect is determined to be executed is 0 to 10 in the setting 1.2. Are set to 0 to 5 in the settings 3 and 4, and are set to 0 to 1 in the settings 5.6. That is, if the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, the execution probability of the reach effect is twice as high in the setting 1.2 as compared to the setting 3.4, and compared to the setting 5.6 in the setting 3.4. The execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 5 times (the execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 10 in the settings 1.2 and 5.6 compared to the settings 5.6).

  As described above, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 or more, the case where the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 0 to 1000 times In comparison with the above, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined that a reach effect is to be executed, the special symbol change time is also changed. The setting difference is remarkable between the case where the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the end of the state is 0 to 1000 times and the case where it is 1001 times or more.

  Specifically, when the number of times the special symbol changes from the point in time when the big hit gaming state ends is 0 to 1000 times, the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normally normal reach). Are set to 0 to 57 in the settings 1 and 2, set to 0 to 58 in the settings 3.4, and set to 0 to 59 in the settings 5.6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 58 to 89 for setting 1.2 and 59 to 89 for setting 3.4. It is stipulated, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 for settings 1 to 6 in common. These are the same as FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of times the special symbol fluctuates from the point in time when the big hit gaming state ends becomes 1001 or more, the fluctuating time of the special symbol is determined to be 20,000 msec (normally normal reach). No. is not specified in No. 4 to No. 4 and is specified in the range of 0 to 99 in Settings 5.6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30000 msec (normally medium super reach A) is defined as 0 to 89 in settings 1 to 4 and not defined in settings 5 and 6. . Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally medium super reach B) is set to 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 4, and is specified in the settings 5 and 6. Absent. Therefore, in a so-called "big hit" situation in which the number of times the special symbol changes from the point in time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 or more, the set value is suggested to the player by the reach effect executed. It becomes possible.

  In addition, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed, the time when the big hit game state ends is determined as a starting point. When the number of times the special symbol changes is 1001 or more, the higher the set value is, the lower the execution probability of the reach effect is. Further, even when the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of execution of the reach effect that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short.

  In this way, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit gaming state becomes 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the change time of the special symbol for one time, and the unit The number of times the special symbol changes per time (that is, the number of lotteries) is further increased. Eventually, the expectation that the number of executions of the big hit game as viewed in the unit time increases will be higher, and the probability that the big hit game will be executed in the unit time will be higher.

  When the number of times the special symbol changes from the end of the big hit game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the big hit game state When the number of times the special symbol changes starting from the end of the pattern becomes 1001 times or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect remarkably differs according to the set value. There can be room to do it. With this, when a so-called "big hit" occurs, the set value set for the player can be changed without giving a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving a game ball to the player). Providing an opportunity that can be guessed makes it possible to give the player pleasure. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the player thinks that the reach effect should normally be achieved, the present embodiment expects that the lower the execution frequency of the reach effect is, the higher the set value will be when the so-called large rehearsal is performed. Since the player can embrace, even if the frequency of execution of the reach effect is low, it is possible to reduce a decrease in willingness to continue the game.

  In the present embodiment, the starting point at which the number of times of the change of the special symbol is counted is the time when the big hit game state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. An arbitrary time point can be set as the starting point, such as when the high-probability gaming state ends or the time-saving gaming state ends in a pachinko machine called a so-called ST machine that ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from the specific time point becomes 1001 or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the change time of the special symbol remarkably differ according to the set value. It need not be more than one time. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as the player feels that the player is absorbed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol starting from a specific point in time becomes equal to or more than the specified number, the execution probability of the reach effect and the change time of the special symbol significantly differ according to the set value. Are not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined standby time (hereinafter, referred to as an “opening time”) between the time when the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is determined to be a jackpot and the actual control to the jackpot gaming state. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 also provides a predetermined standby time (hereinafter referred to as “ending time”) between the end of the big hit game state and the start of the display of the change of the special symbol. The sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204) displays the opening effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the opening time, and displays the ending effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the ending time. In the opening production, for example, a production that shows that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a production that congratulates that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, and a game method (for example, right-handed) in the big hit game state An effect to teach is performed. In the ending effect, an effect indicating the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state, an effect indicating the number of times the jackpot game state is continued (the number of extended games), and a game state after the jackpot game state ends with a high probability game An effect indicating that the state is controlled, an effect that teaches a game method (for example, returning to left) in the game state after the big hit game state ends, and an effect that displays a logo of a manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Etc. are performed.

  Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value increases, the time required for the big hit gaming state increases as the set value increases. Can be shorter. As a result, it is possible to increase the average of the number of times of change of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the number of lotteries), and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the execution of the game for the player.

  Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the expected value of a ball is higher as the set value is higher (for example, as the higher the set value, the greater the probability of a big hit), a larger amount of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than the lower set value. Considering that there is a possibility that the setting time is longer, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be configured to be longer as the set value is higher. In this case, the higher the set value with a higher expected value of the ball, the longer all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time, thereby ensuring the interest of the game by the high set value. In addition, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time.

  It should be noted that even when the main CPU 101 is controlled to the opening time, the ending time, and the big hitting game state, the main CPU 101 determines that a game ball will be awarded to the starting port (the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440). Upon detection, various random numbers are extracted, and a setting check process (see FIG. 31) in step S74 or step S82 described later is executed. If it is determined in the setting check process that the set value data is out of the range of “0” to “5” (NO in step S721 described later), even if it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and the game cannot be advanced.

[4-2. Variation of stop design of big hit distribution and decorative design]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18, a first modified example and a second modified example of big hit distribution (selection rate of a main symbol) when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, The stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the first modification and the second modification will be described. In the first modified example and the second modified example, the selectivity of the main symbol differs according to the set value. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a first modification of the selectivity of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and FIG. 17 shows a case where the special symbol big hit determination result is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol of FIG. FIG. 18 is a modified example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200, and is used commonly in the first modified example and the second modified example.

[4-2-1. First Modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 16 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 18 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the first modified example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol based on the extracted symbol determination random number in accordance with the set value. By probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure 1 -8. However, in the first modified example, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R ordinary big hit", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R certain variable big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, Tokujin 1-7, Tokujin 2-1 and Tokujin 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", Tokujin 1-6, Tokujin 1-8, Tokujin 2-2 and Tokujin 2- 4 is "10R probable big hit".

  Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 12.5%) and the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 12.5 %), Special map 1-3 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-4 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-5 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-6 (Distribution probability 12.5%), Toku-zu 1-7 (Distribution probability 12.5%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (Distribution probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbols are set as special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 10.0%), and special figure 1-3 (allocation probability). Minute probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 15.0%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 15.0%). In the setting 6, the main symbols are set as the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 5.0%), the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 5.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (allocation probability 20%). 0.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (allocation probability 20.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (allocation probability 5.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (allocation probability 5.0%), One of Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 20.0%) and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 20.0%) is determined.

  In other words, the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 (both 4R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type have a high set value ( For example, in the setting 5.6, the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5, and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% for setting 6) (higher for settings 1 to 4).

  Similarly, the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8, which share the big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), have a combined probability of 25.0% irrespective of the setting, but have a high set value. (E.g., setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 1-8 (15.0% in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate in special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0%, 20.0% for setting 6) (higher for settings 1 to 4).

  Further, for the special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value (E.g., settings 5 and 6), the selectivity of special figure 2-4 (30. 0%, 40.0% at setting 6).

  By the way, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, as shown in FIG. , The special figure 2-1 and the special figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot in which the probability change flag is not set to ON), regardless of the set value, be sure to display, for example, a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Are controlled to stop in the first mode.

  On the other hand, when it is the special map 1-2 (4R probability variable hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) regardless of the set value. ) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variable big hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75) regardless of the set value. 0.0%). Here, at a high set value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selectivity of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher degree of expectation than the first mode) is increased.

  Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 irrespective of the set value, the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50. 0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 1-6 (10.0% for setting 5 and 5.0% for setting 6) is higher than that of special figure 1-6. 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, although the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the setting 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the specific mode (the mode having the highest degree of expectation for the player) is increased.

  Further, similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Is controlled to stop. In addition, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity (20.0% at setting 5 and 10.0% at setting 6) of the special figure 2-2 is higher than the selectivity of the special figure 2-2. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% in setting 5, 40.0% in setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special map 2-2 and the special map 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the setting 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

  As described above, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, it is possible to realize that the stop style of the decorative symbol can be different depending on the set value even if the big hit type is the same. Become. In particular, when the setting value is a high setting value (for example, setting 5 or 6), when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, it is assumed that the combination probability determined for a specific big hit type (for example, a 10R probability variable big hit) is the same. Also, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player with a higher probability than when the value is a low set value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Become.

[4-2-2. Second Modification]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 17 are stored in the main ROM 102.

  In the first modified example, it is determined whether or not the probable change flag is set ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. On the other hand, in the second modified example, it is not immediately determined whether or not the probable change flag is set ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Absent. More specifically, in the second modification, unlike the first modification, a certainty change attacker (not shown) is provided inside, for example, the special winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5). And, for example, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state, when the entry of the game ball to the probability change attacker is detected, the game state after the big hit game state is ended is controlled to the high probability game state, and to the probability change attacker When the big hit game state ends without detecting the entry of the game ball, the game state after the big hit game state ends is controlled to the low-probability game state. As described above, a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability game state based on the entry of a game ball into a probable variable attacker is also a so-called “probable loop machine”.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the second modification, the ease of entry of the game ball into the certainty-variable attacker differs depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. ing. For example, in the special map 1-1, the big hit game state is controlled in a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability change attacker, and in the special figure 1-2, the big hit game state is set in a mode in which the game ball easily enters the probability change attacker. Is controlled. In the present embodiment, the number of times saved during a big hit in the “difficulty of entering a game ball into the probable attacker” is 100, and the “emission of the game ball into the probable attacker is easy”. If it is a big hit, the time reduction continues until the next big hit game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the “mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probable attacker” is equivalent to almost no possibility that the game ball enters the probable attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state (almost 100%). Is controlled to a low-probability game state with a probability close to the above.) In addition, the “mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probable attacker” means that the hit ball is in the big hit game state as long as the game ball is fired toward the location of the probable attacker (for example, the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5 for example)). This is a mode in which a game ball almost enters a probability change attacker while being controlled (a high probability game state is controlled with a probability close to almost 100%). Therefore, in the second modified example, the jackpot in the "mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probable change attacker" is referred to as "normal jackpot", and the "mode in which the game ball easily enters the probable change attacker". The big hit is called a "probable change big hit".

  However, if it is “an aspect in which the game ball can easily enter the probable attacker”, the game state is controlled to the high-probability game state with a probability close to 100%, and if “the aspect in which the game ball enters the probable attacker is difficult”. Instead of being controlled to a low-probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, when the “easily-entering of the game ball into the probable attacker” is performed, “the game ball is difficult to enter the probable attacker” A mode in which the game state is controlled to the high-probability gaming state with a relatively higher probability than the “mode” may be adopted.

  As a method of creating a mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the probable attacker and an easy mode, for example, apart from the special winning opening 540 (for example, see FIG. 5) having the probabilistic attacker inside, the probabilistic attacker is not provided. It is conceivable to provide another special winning opening (not shown). Then, a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probable change attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2) -4), it is controlled to the big hit game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened, and it is difficult to enter the game ball into the probable change attacker (for example, Toku-zu 1-1, Toku-zu 1-3, Toku-zu 1) -5, Toku-zu 1-7, Toku-zu 2-1 and Toku-zu 2-3), by controlling the big hit game state in which the other big-winning openings are opened without opening the big-winning opening 540, It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probable change attacker and a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter. The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment as long as it is possible to create an embodiment in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probable change attacker and an easy embodiment.

  In addition, as described above, when the special winning opening 540 including the probability changing attacker therein and another special winning opening (not illustrated) not including the certain probability attacker are provided, the special winning opening opened in the jackpot game state. The mouth may have a setting difference. For example, at the low setting value such as the setting 1, the big hit game state in which the other big winning opening is opened more easily than the big winning opening 540, and at the high setting value such as the setting 6, the larger winning opening is more than the other big winning opening. The higher the set value, the easier it is to select the big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened, such that the big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is easily selected.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in such a second modification, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol on the basis of the extracted symbol determination random numbers to the set value. With the probability according to, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, One of the special figures 1-8 is determined. However, in this second modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R ordinary big hit", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R certain variable big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, Tokujin 1-7, Tokujin 2-1 and Tokujin 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", Tokujin 1-6, Tokujin 1-7, Tokujin 2-2 and Tokujin 2- 4 is "10R probable big hit".

  Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 12.5%) and the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 12.5 %), Special map 1-3 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-4 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-5 (allocation probability 12.5%), special map 1-6 (Distribution probability 12.5%), Toku-zu 1-7 (Distribution probability 12.5%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (Distribution probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbols are set as special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 10.0%), and special figure 1-3 (allocation probability). Minute probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %), Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 15.0%), and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 15.0%). In the setting 6, the main symbols are set as the special figure 1-1 (allocation probability 5.0%), the special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 5.0%), and the special figure 1-3 (allocation probability 20%). 0.0%), Tokuzu 1-4 (allocation probability 20.0%), Tokuzu 1-5 (allocation probability 5.0%), Tokuzu 1-6 (allocation probability 5.0%), One of Toku-zu 1-7 (allocation probability 20.0%) and Toku-zu 1-8 (allocation probability 20.0%) is determined.

  In other words, the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 (both 4R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type have a high set value ( For example, in the setting 5.6, the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5, and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% for setting 6) (higher for settings 1 to 4).

  Similarly, the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8, which share the big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), have a combined probability of 25.0% irrespective of the setting, but have a high set value. (E.g., setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 1-8 (15.0% in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate in special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0%, 20.0% for setting 6) (higher for settings 1 to 4).

  Further, for the special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variable big hits) having the same big hit type, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value (E.g., settings 5 and 6), the selectivity of special figure 2-4 (30. 0%, 40.0% at setting 6).

  By the way, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, as shown in FIG. , The special figure 2-1 and the special figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot in which the probability change flag is not set to ON), regardless of the set value, be sure to display, for example, a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Are controlled to stop in the first mode.

  On the other hand, when it is the special map 1-2 (4R probability variable hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) regardless of the set value. ) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variable big hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75) regardless of the set value. 0.0%). Here, at a high set value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selectivity of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher degree of expectation than the first mode) is increased.

  Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 irrespective of the set value, the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50. 0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity of special figure 1-6 (10.0% for setting 5 and 5.0% for setting 6) is higher than that of special figure 1-6. 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6). Therefore, although the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variable big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the setting 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the specific mode (the mode having the highest degree of expectation for the player) is increased.

  Further, similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Is controlled to stop. In addition, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selectivity (20.0% at setting 5 and 10.0% at setting 6) of the special figure 2-2 is higher than the selectivity of the special figure 2-2. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% in setting 5, 40.0% in setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special map 2-2 and the special map 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability big hits), the high setting value is lower than the low setting value (for example, the setting 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

  As described above, in the second modified example, similarly to the first modified example, if the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, even if the big hit type is the same, the decoration is made according to the set value. It becomes feasible to make it possible to change the stop mode of the symbol. In particular, when the setting value is a high setting value (for example, setting 5 or 6), when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, it is assumed that the combination probability determined for a specific big hit type (for example, a 10R probability variable big hit) is the same. Also, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player with a higher probability than when the value is a low set value (for example, the settings 1 to 4). Become.

  In each of the first and second modified examples described above, by changing the selectivity of the main symbol according to the set value, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be changed according to the set value. are doing. That is, the sub CPU 201 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, the decorative symbol according to the set value. Stop symbols can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control by the sub CPU 201 may be configured so that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be different depending on the set value.

  According to the first and second modifications, it is possible to provide a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the setting value, that is, to provide a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability change entry rate, and the time reduction entry rate. It becomes possible.

[5. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. However, in the following description (description of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms of the power switch 35, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the performance display monitor 334, the error notification monitor 336, the external terminal board 323, and the hall computer 700 are used. But these are shown in FIG.

[5-1. Power-on process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process performed by the main CPU 101. For example, when the person in charge of the hall turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a power-on process (step S10), a setting process related to a set value (step S20), and a game return process (step S20). S30) are sequentially executed. Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level. If the voltage drops to a predetermined level when a power failure occurs or when the power switch 35 is turned off, etc. The processing at the time of the occurrence of power interruption described later is performed.

[5-1-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the power-on processing. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value to a stack pointer, as shown in the figure (step S11).

  Next, after permitting access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S12), the main CPU 101 performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 200 can accept a signal (step S13). After that, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process for various devices built in the CPU (step S14).

  Next, the main CPU 101 activates a switch related to the set value (step S15). The switches related to the setting values are switches used when performing the setting process in step S20. Equivalent to. Then, after activating the switches related to the setting (step S15), the main CPU 101 performs a reading process of each switch (step S16), and then performs a game permission process (step S17).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S17 (see FIG. 20), a game permission flag for permitting execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not the execution of the game is permitted, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. . Hereinafter, the game permission process (step S17) will be described.

  The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the power-off state identification flag is ON (step S1710). The power failure state identification flag is a flag that identifies the state at the time of the last power failure. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during a setting change process described later or the like, it is highly likely that the power failure has occurred before the setting change process is properly completed. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is possible to identify the situation at the time of the previous power failure. In the present embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON until the power failure occurs. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during a setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF before the power failure. Also, when a power failure occurs during an abnormal state in steps S722 to S727, which will be described later, the power-off status identification flag is set to OFF. The power-off status identification flag is OFF when the power of the main RAM 103 has been lost due to an initial state where the power has not been turned on yet or the power has not been turned on for a long period of time. The above-mentioned "during normal game" means a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is OFF. (same as below).

  In step S1710, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S1720 if the power-off state identification flag is ON (YES in step S1710), and the game permission flag if the power-off state identification flag is OFF (NO in step S1710). Is turned off (step S1750), and the process moves to step S1720.

  In step S1720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. The checking of the work area includes checking whether the set value data set is within a prescribed range (in the present embodiment, within a range of “0” to “5”).

  Note that the work area of the main RAM 103 holds a general work area in which data is cleared when a backup clear process described later is performed, and data is not cleared in principle even if a backup clear process described later is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. In this specific work area, for example, performance display data, set value data set, and the like are stored. This is data indicating a set value. In the present embodiment, the set value data “0” to “5” correspond to each of the six set values “1” to “6”. That is, for example, if the set value set is “4”, the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”.

  In step S1730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal. If the work area is normal (YES in step S1730), the process proceeds to step S1740. If there is, the game permission flag is turned off (step S1760), and then the process proceeds to step S1740. For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (in the present embodiment, within the range of “0” to “5”), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

  In step S1740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In this step S1740, a power interruption occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later (YES in step S1710), and if the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned on. Is determined. On the other hand, when a power interruption occurs during the setting change process or during the abnormal state (NO in step S1710), and when the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is OFF. Is determined. If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S1740), the game permission process ends. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the process moves to step S1770.

  In this specification, a power interruption that occurs during a normal game, a power interruption that occurs during a setting confirmation process, and a power interruption that occurs during a setting change process are referred to as normal power interruptions, and are described below in Steps S722 to S727. The power interruption occurring at is assumed to be an abnormal power interruption.

  In step S1770, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power has been turned on while the setting key 328 has been turned on (the operation to turn on the power switch 35 has been performed), that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal has been turned on. If the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1810.

  At step S1780, main CPU 101 determines whether or not backup clear switch 330 is pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES at step S1780). Then, the process proceeds to step S1790. If the backup clear signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1810.

  In step S1790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S1800.

  As described above, even if the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740) due to the situation at the time of the previous power interruption or the abnormal working area of the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 turns on the setting key switch signal ( If YES in step S1770 and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed while the setting key 328 is turned on, the game permission flag is turned on even if the game permission flag is turned off. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag is not set from OFF to ON.

  In step S1800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON, and ends the game permission processing. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not a backup clear process described later needs to be performed. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON, and when the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

  In step S1810, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. After performing the process in step S1810, the main CPU 101 ends the game permission process. In this way, by displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336, the person in charge of the hole confirms the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and is not in a state in which the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF). ) Can be understood. In the present embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, only when both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed while the setting key switch 328 is ON, the game permission flag is set. Can be set to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the power supply operation is performed to temporarily stop the power supply, and the game permission flag does not turn ON unless a setting change process described later is executed. In the above description, the game permission process is terminated when the process of step S1810 is performed. Alternatively, the process returns to step S1740 after the process of step S1810 is performed, and the condition for turning on the game permission flag is set. (In FIG. 21, until YES is determined in step S1780), the processing of steps S1740 to S1810 may be looped.

[5-1-2. Setting process]
FIG. 22A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting process in step S20 (see FIG. 19), and FIG. 22B is a flowchart illustrating another example of the setting process in step S20. The difference between FIG. 22 (a) and FIG. 22 (b) is that only the processing when it is determined in step S21 that the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21) is different, and that other processing (step S21) is different. Steps S22 to S28) are common to both. Hereinafter, the setting process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, first, in step S21, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S21), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S22. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21), the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S24). The setting process ends without executing any of the steps S26).

  When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S23), the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (step S24), and turns ON the setting key switch signal (YES in step S22). If the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S23), a setting confirmation process (step S26) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the setting change process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step S24) if the backup clear signal is OFF. S26) is performed.

  If the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S27), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S28), and performs a setting change process (step S28). S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) are not executed, and the setting processing is ended. If the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S27), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process without executing the process of step S28 (setting change). The processing (step S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) are not executed).

  That is, if the previous power interruption is a normal power interruption occurring during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later, and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, YES is determined in the step S21. At this time, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (step S24) and a setting confirmation process (step S26) according to the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. Alternatively, a backup clear flag process (step S28) is executed. When the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change processing (step S24), the setting confirmation processing (step S26), and the backup clear flag processing (step S28) Without executing any of the above, the process proceeds to the game return process (step S30), and after the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed.

  On the other hand, if the previous power interruption is abnormal power interruption, or if the previous power interruption is normal power interruption but power interruption occurred during the setting change process, NO is determined in step S21. . At this time, the main CPU 101 performs the setting change processing (step S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) regardless of the operation state of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation state of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. Neither the backup clear flag ON (step S28) nor the backup clear flag is executed, and the setting process ends. Therefore, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is abnormal power failure, the setting key switch signal is turned on (YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is turned on (YES in step S1780). (That is, both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed in a state where the setting key 328 is turned ON and the setting is changed to a setting change state), and the set value is determined. Only when the setting change process (step S24) is executed, the process moves to the game return process of step S30, and after the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated, or even if only one of them is operated, the setting change processing (step S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) ) And the backup clear flag process (Step S28) are not executed, and the routine goes to the game return process (Step S30). However, in the game return process (step S30), an abnormal time process (see step S38 in FIG. 26 described later) is executed, the game cannot be executed, and the game is stopped.

  As described above, in an example of the setting process illustrated in the flowchart of FIG. 22A, when a power interruption occurs during the setting change process or when the previous power interruption is abnormal, the power is turned on. The setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag ON (step S28) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. The setting process is terminated without executing the setting process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as in another example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. In the case of, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S24) regardless of the operation state of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation state of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. You may do so. If a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on are changed. Regardless, by forcibly executing the setting change process (step S24), when the power is turned on with the operation of the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330 being forgotten, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of forcing a disconnection.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 22A, if NO is determined in the step S21, the setting process is performed without determining any of the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. Finished. Similarly, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 22B, if NO is determined in the step S21, the operation state of the setting key 328 and the operation state of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are set without discrimination. The change process (step S24) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 and / or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are determined, and the setting process is ended or the setting change process is performed (step S24) regardless of the result of this determination. May be executed.

[5-1-2-1. Setting change processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting change process. The setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 22) is a process for changing the set value that has been set. However, the setting change process may be ended with the same set value as the set value. . Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag does not turn ON unless the power cut operation is performed to temporarily stop the power supply and then execute the setting change process.

  First, in step S2410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2410), main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, the game permission flag is set ON in step S1790 (see FIG. 21). Therefore, a setting change process is executed.

  When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2420 and executes a backup clear process. This backup clear processing will be described later.

  After executing the backup clear process in step S2420, the main CPU 101 shifts to step S2430, stores the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 in the register, and shifts to step S2440. The backup clearing process may be executed at any timing as long as it is between the start of the setting change process and the end thereof.

  In step S2440, main CPU 101 performs output setting of a setting change security signal. This setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. Note that the setting change security signal is output for a fixed time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

  In step S2450, main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on performance display monitor 334. On the performance display monitor 334, the set value data stored in the register is converted into a set value and displayed. For example, when the set value data stored in the register is “3”, the set value “4” corresponding to the set value data “3” is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, if the set value data stored in the register corresponds to the set value set, the numbers need not necessarily be displayed on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data “0” to “5” are respectively associated with “A” to “F”, and when the set value data stored in the register is, for example, “3”, the corresponding “D” May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step 2450, the performance display monitor 334 converts the set value data stored in the register into a set value and displays the set value. The set initial value (for example, “1”) may be displayed. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a predetermined initial value (for example, “1”) or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, “8”) on the performance display monitor. 334 may be displayed. When displaying a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S2510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. It may be.

  In step S2460, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thus, the person in charge of the hall can confirm that the setting change process is being performed by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336.

  In step S2470, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2470), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2510.

  In step S2510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 has been pressed. If the setting switch 332 has been pressed (YES in step S251), the process proceeds to step S2520, where the setting value stored in the register is set. After updating the data, the process returns to step S2440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S2510), the process returns to step S2440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2470), steps S2510, S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470 are looped (step S2510, step S2520, step S2520). The processing from S2440 to step S2470 is repeated).

  When the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S2510), the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting in step S2450 so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. .

  Unless the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the main CPU 101 changes the setting value data stored in the register from “0” to “5” each time the setting switch 332 is pressed. (Returns to “0” when the setting switch 332 is pressed while the setting value data is “5”). Thus, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the setting value data stored in the register may be circulated and reduced from “5” to “0”, or the circulating increase and the circulating may be performed depending on the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. It may be possible to execute both of the reduction.

  In step S2470, when determining that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), main CPU 101 shifts to step S2480. In Step S2480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of Step S2510, Step S2520, and Steps S2440 to S2470.

  In step S2480, the main CPU 101 stores the set value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S2480 is performed, the set value is determined. That is, in the setting change processing, the setting value is determined based on the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal (determination of YES in step S2470), and the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal is performed. If the setting switch 332 is only depressed without executing (the step S2510, the step S2520, and the steps S2440 to S2470 are simply looped), only the setting value data stored in the register is updated, The setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

  After the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470), even if the operation of returning setting key 328 is performed again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected as ON). However, the set value cannot be changed unless a power-off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35) is performed. At this time (when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470) and the operation of returning the setting key 328 is performed again), the main CPU 101 sets the setting stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At this time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may set the game permission flag to OFF until the setting key switch signal is turned OFF.

  By the way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or when the previous power failure is abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the backup status when the power is turned on thereafter (at the time of power failure recovery). A case where the setting change process (see FIG. 23) is forcibly executed irrespective of the operation status of the pressing operation of the clear switch 330 (the state of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal) (see FIG. 22B). The setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned ON (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). As described above, when the setting change process (step S24) is performed without turning on the setting key 328, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF. Therefore, the main CPU 101 sets the setting key in step S2470. Without immediately determining that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned on and then turned off. The process moves to S2480 (set value is determined). Note that, in this case, the main CPU 101 may determine that the setting key switch signal has been turned on, and further determine that the setting key switch signal has been turned off, thereby determining YES in step S2480. Alternatively, YES may be determined in step S2480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal has been turned from ON to OFF without detecting that the setting key switch signal has been turned ON. In the above, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is abnormal power failure, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal and backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, forced Although it is described that the setting change process is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state may be forcibly changed to the setting change state by the main CPU 101 irrespective of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of power recovery. Also, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, the power failure is restored in the setting change state at the time of power failure (that is, the state is maintained when the power failure occurs, At the time of power failure recovery, a process of returning to the held state may be executed irrespective of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery).

  In step S2490, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step S2500, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. The process ends.

  When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470), a command indicating that the setting key switch signal has been turned OFF, that is, a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed, is provided. The initialization command is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

  When the setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 22) ends, the setting process in step S20 (see FIG. 19) ends, and the process proceeds to the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 19).

  If the game can be executed through the game return process after the setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 22) is executed, a certain period after the game is started, or At a predetermined timing after is started, information indicating that the setting change process may have been performed, information indicating that the setting change process may have changed to a higher set value, Information indicating that there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed to a lower setting value by the setting change processing, and the setting value has been changed in a plurality of steps by the setting change processing (for example, two or more steps such as setting 6 to setting 4 are changed). Information related to the setting change processing, such as information indicating that there is a possibility, may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like, for example. For example, it is possible to make the variation pattern of the effect or the decorative pattern performed by the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like different between when the setting change process is executed and when it is not executed, or to set a higher set value by the setting change process. It may be different between when it is changed and when it is changed to a low setting value, or it may be different when the setting value is changed by more than one step by the setting change process and when it is not changed by more than one step. May be.

  The output period of the setting change security signal and the period during which the setting change code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end of the setting change process. Has become. However, these periods need not be exactly the same.

  Note that the above-described setting change process is a process that is internally executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF. Also, a command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in the step S24 is started, every time the setting switch is pressed in the step S2510, and when the process in the step S2480 is executed. Accordingly, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the like may perform notification that the setting is being changed, notification that the setting value has been changed, notification that the setting change has been completed, and the like. .

[5-1-2-1-1. Backup clear processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the backup clearing process in step S2420 (see FIG. 23). This backup clearing process is a process for clearing information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in the backup clear processing, as described above, information stored in the general work area is cleared, but information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

  First, in step S2421, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421), the process proceeds to step S2422. Move on to

  In step S2422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power interruption occurred during the setting change processing, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear processing is being executed during the setting change processing in which the previous power interruption occurred. Therefore, when the previous power interruption occurs during the setting change processing, the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared together with the backup clear processing executed during the setting change processing in which the previous power interruption occurred, In this backup clearing process, it may be only partially cleared.

  In the process of step S2422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set value data set is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. You. When it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. When the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared. In this case, the game permission flag is turned off, and the game is permitted unless the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 23) is performed. The flag may not be turned on.

  In step S2423, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that information indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. Thereafter, in step S2424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF, and ends the backup clear processing. The notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed) is transmitted to, for example, the sub-control circuit 200, and the display control circuit 204 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the backup clear processing has been executed. The displayed image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example.

  When the backup clearing process is performed along with the setting change process (see, for example, FIG. 23), the main CPU 101 causes the performance display monitor 334 to display the set value information in step S2450 of the setting change process. Make notification settings. Similarly, even when the backup clearing process is performed without the setting change process, the notification setting may be made so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[5-1-2-2. Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 22) is a process for confirming the set value that has been set. The set values that have been set are stored in the main RAM 103.

  First, in step S2610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

  If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2620 and performs output setting of a setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. Note that the setting confirmation security signal is output for a fixed time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

  In step S2630, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating set value data set. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”, “4” corresponding to the set value data “3” is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 as information indicating the set value.

  In step S2640, main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on error notification monitor 336. Thus, the person in charge of the hall can confirm that the setting confirmation processing is being performed by confirming the display on the error notification monitor 336.

  In step S2650, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2650), the process returns to step S2620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2650), the process of steps S2620 to S2650 is looped (the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are repeated). It will be.

  In step S2650, when determining that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2650), main CPU 101 shifts to step S2660. In step S2660, the main CPU 101 ends the processes in steps S2620 to S2650.

  When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2650) in step S2650, a power interruption reset command is transmitted to sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed in step S37 described later. Will be done.

  In step S2660, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step S2670, the main CPU 101 performs non-report setting so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. To end.

  When the setting confirmation processing in step S26 (see FIG. 22) ends, the setting processing in step S20 (see FIG. 19) ends, and the flow proceeds to the game return processing in step S30 (see FIG. 19).

[5-1-3. Game return processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the game return process. In the setting process of step S30 (see FIG. 19), a process of returning to a state in which a game can be executed is performed on the assumption that the game permission flag is ON. Hereinafter, the game return processing will be described.

  First, in step S31, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31), the main CPU 101 executes the abnormal time process in step S38. The processing at the time of abnormality will be described later.

  When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32, and performs a process of validating all switches.

  In step S33, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is off. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S34.

  In step S34, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power-off state identification flag is ON. If the power-off state identification flag is ON (YES in step S34), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S35. As described above, the power failure state identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. If power failure occurs during the change process, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power interruption occurs during the normal game or the setting confirmation process, the process of step S35 is performed.

  In step S35, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when power is restored.

  Next, in step S36, when the gaming state at the time of power-off recovery is the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting indicating that the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state.

  Next, in step S37, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power-off recovery (power-off recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 200. This command also includes setting value information on the set value that has been set. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 19), and ends a series of power-on processes. Thereby, execution of a game is attained. The above-mentioned power interruption recovery command functions as a command indicating that power recovery is being performed or a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed.

  In step S33, when the main CPU 101 determines that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the backup clear processing in step S39. This backup clearing process is the same as the backup clearing process of step S2420 shown in FIG. 23 (the backup clearing process shown in FIG. 24), and thus the description is omitted.

  When the backup clear processing in step S39 ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S40, and performs initialization of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

  Next, in step S41, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command for RWM initialization (initialization command) to the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 19), and ends a series of power-on processes. Thereby, execution of a game is attained. Note that the above initialization command is a command indicating that the setting change processing has been completed (backup clear processing has also been executed) or a command indicating that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed. Function.

  The output period of the setting confirmation security signal and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end of the setting confirmation process. Has become. However, these periods need not be exactly the same.

[5-1-3-1. Abnormal processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the abnormal time process. As described above, the abnormal-time process in step S38 (see FIG. 26) is executed when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF (NO in step S31) in the process in step S31 (see FIG. 26). Processing.

  First, in step S381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting to the sub-control circuit 200 an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, the game cannot be executed. Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective, and the information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204).

  Note that the main CPU 101 does not necessarily need to transmit the abnormal command. For example, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective when a normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started. You may make it.

  In step S382, the main CPU 101 sets output of an abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above.

  In step S383, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Accordingly, by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336, the person in charge of the hall can grasp that the game is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF).

  In step S384, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power interruption detection signal is ON. The power interruption detection signal is a signal that turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. If the main CPU 101 determines that the power-off detection signal is ON (YES in step S384), the process proceeds to step S385, and a power-off occurrence process is executed. On the other hand, when the power interruption detection signal is OFF (NO in step S384), the main CPU 101 loops steps S382 to S384 (the processing of steps S382 to S384 is repeated).

[5-1-3-1-1. Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process at the time of power failure occurrence. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level. When the voltage drops to the predetermined level, the main CPU 101 performs a process when a power failure occurs.

  First, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt processing is not executed (step S3851). Then, a checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S3852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the main RAM 103 before the power failure are properly retained when the power is restored. In this way, various game data stored in the main RAM 103 can be held even when the power supply is stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets a power-off status identification flag in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S3853). That is, as described above, the main CPU 101 determines the power-off state identification if the power-off occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. The flag is set to ON, and if it occurs during the setting change processing, it is set to OFF.

  After finishing the processes in steps S3851 to S3853, the main CPU 101 shifts to step S3854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), and enters an infinite loop to prepare for stopping power supply.

  As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, as described above, the supply of power is temporarily stopped by performing a power interruption operation so that the game permission flag is not turned ON unless a setting change process described later is executed. Has become.

  By the way, in this processing, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a short-time power failure or the like (hereinafter, referred to as “instantaneous power failure”) and the processing at the time of power failure occurrence is started, it is possible to return from the infinite loop. It may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically during normal processing, but is not updated when power-off processing is started. As a result, the process starts when a power failure occurs due to a momentary power failure, and even if the process enters the infinite loop in FIG.

  Note that a rewritable nonvolatile memory (such as an EEPROM) may be provided instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103). In this case, there is an advantage that a regular power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by constant power supply. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area when the power is turned off. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the save data into the processing area, so that the load required for these processes is reduced.

[5-1-4. Flow of power-on processing as seen from the operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on processing by the main CPU 101. The flow of the power-on processing viewed from a person who performs an operation (for example, a person related to a hall) will be briefly described.

[5-1-4-1. Setting change processing flow]
First, a setting change process, that is, a flow for changing a set value that has been set will be described. In order to change the set value, it is necessary to first perform a power-off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35). Then, in a state where the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and both the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and the operation of turning on the power switch 35 are performed.

  When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is disabled, only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) is activated, and the setting change is performed. The process is started, and the setting can be changed.

  When the setting change process is started, a setting changing code indicating that the setting change process is being performed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 switches from the light-off state to the information indicating the set value set after the power switch 35 is turned on.

  In the setting change processing, backup clear processing, that is, initialization processing of the main RAM 103 (clearing of the work area of the main RAM 103, notification of clearing of the work area of the main RAM 103, initial setting of the work area of the main RAM 103, commands for initializing the RWM When the transmission) is executed, a sound indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed is output from the speaker 24. As will be described later, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed, but the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24. It may be displayed in an area.

  In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is circulated and displayed. That is, the information indicating the set value increases by one each time the set switch 332 is pressed when the set value is “1” to “5”, but when the set value is “6”, the set switch 332 is set. Pressing returns to "1" and is displayed.

  When the setting key 328 is turned OFF during the setting change process, the setting change state ends, and the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting change code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all switches is validated.

  As described above, during the setting change process, only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) among all the switches is enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. . When the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[5-1-4-2. Setting confirmation process flow]
Next, a setting confirmation process, that is, a flow for confirming the set value that has been set will be described. The setting confirmation processing is internally executed on condition that the game permission flag is ON, and is not executed when the game permission flag is internally OFF.

  In order to confirm the set value that has been set, on condition that the game permission flag is internally ON, the setting key 328 is turned ON while the power is not turned on, and the backup clear switch 330 The ON operation of the power switch 35 is performed without pressing the.

  When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all switches is disabled, only the operation of the setting key 328 among all switches is enabled, the setting check process is started, and the set settings can be checked. Becomes

  When the setting confirmation process is started, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is being performed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 switches from the light-off state to the information indicating the set value set after the power switch 35 is turned on.

  During the setting confirmation process, the information indicating the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change even if the setting switch 332 is pressed.

  When the setting key 328 is turned OFF during the setting confirmation processing, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Is displayed and the operation of all switches is enabled.

  As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 among all the switches is activated, and all the other switches remain inactivated. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains invalidated. When the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, the setting confirmation process may be a process that can be executed during a normal game, regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[5-1-4-3. Flow in abnormal processing]

  As described above, when the game permission flag is internally OFF, the setting change process can be executed, but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally OFF, an operation for executing the setting change process (when the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned ON, and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed. If the user performs an operation for executing the setting confirmation process without performing the ON operation of the power switch 35), performs a backup process without setting change process (details will be described later), or When only the operation of turning on the power is performed, the abnormal-time process is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of the abnormal-time process will be described.

  After the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all switches is disabled, and only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) among all the switches is enabled (internal). Abnormal processing is started in general). The reason why the operation related to the setting is activated is to enable the game permission flag to be turned on by executing the setting change process.

  When the abnormal time process is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the operator can confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating an error.

  Furthermore, when the abnormal time process is started, the operation related to the setting is also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal time process is started, no operation is performed even if any operation is performed, and the pachinko game is set to a state in which the game can be executed unless the above-described setting change process is performed after the power switch 35 is turned off. Machine 1 cannot be restored. Note that the operation of all the switches is disabled in a situation in which a game in which all devices controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 are completely stopped cannot be played, and a device controlled by some of the sub-control circuits 200 (for example, The LEDs 25) include those that can be controlled.

[5-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register to the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S51).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S52).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (step S353. The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S54).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process of outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S55).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S56). The game information is information related to a game processed in the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the like, and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700. You.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the saved values of the registers (step S57). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[5-2-1. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described system timer interrupt process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S61). The start-up winning detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passage detection processing, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the special winning opening passage detection processing, based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 541, the count value of the special winning opening winning counter is incremented by one, and, for example, the number of payouts at the time of winning in the special winning opening 540 is indicated. Set the payout information.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S64). In the ball passage detector passage detection processing, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol game (based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 (for example, see FIG. 5) by the ball passage detector (not shown)) Random value). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection processing.

[5-2-1-1. Starting opening winning detection process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the starting opening winning detection processing by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described switch input detection process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port switch 421 (step S71). When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421 (YES in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S52. When a game ball has not been detected by the first starting port switch 421 (NO in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S81.

  In step S72, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check processing will be described later.

  In step S73, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol determining random number for the first special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first starting opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained first winning opening winnings (the number of retained special first symbols) is less than four (step S74). If the suspended number is less than four (YES in step S74), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S75. When the number of the holdings is four (NO in step S74), the main CPU 101 discards the various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, and proceeds to the processing of step S80.

  In step S75, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of held first winning opening winnings.

  Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 420 in the main RAM 103 until a change start condition (start condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied. Perform (Step S76). As a result, the display of the change of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the starting condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S77). In the first special stop symbol determination process, a large hit random number determination table, a symbol determination table, and a large hit type determination for the first special symbol are determined based on the random number for jackpot determination and the random number for symbol determination extracted for the first special symbol. With reference to the table, a symbol designating command, a hit selection symbol command, and the like for a main symbol (a first special symbol to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process (step S78). The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described start-up winning detection process. Also, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table of FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15), and selects a variation pattern based on the hit determination result, the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. , To perform the determination process.

  As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15, since the variation display time of the decorative symbol is stored in association with the variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination processing described above is stored. The pattern designation command is substantially information that can represent the fluctuation time.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of held first winning opening winnings (step S79). The first start opening winning number increase command is a command indicating that the number of held special first symbols is increased by one, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a variation pattern determined in the process of step S78. Is sent.

  In step S80, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a number-of-first-start-port winning winning number overflow command, and proceeds to step S81. The first start opening winning number overflow command is a command indicating that the first starting opening has been won when the number of first special symbols held is the upper limit (for example, four). Is sent.

  Note that, as is clear from FIG. 31, the reason why the overflow command for the number of retained first opening winnings is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is that the setting value data is determined to be normal in the setting check processing in step S72 described later. It is assumed that

  In step S81, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting port switch 441 (step S81). When the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S81), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S82. If a game ball has not been detected by the second starting port switch 441 (NO in step S81), the main CPU 101 ends the starting port winning detection processing.

  In step S82, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check processing will be described later, but is the same processing as step S72.

  In step S83, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the second special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second start opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained second starting opening winnings (the number of retained second special symbols) is less than four (step S84). If the suspended number is less than four (YES in step S84), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S85. When the number of the holdings is four (NO in step S84), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, and ends the starting port winning detection process.

  In step S85, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of held second winning opening winnings.

  Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440 in the main RAM 103 until the variation start condition (start condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied. Perform (Step S86). Thereby, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S87). Similarly to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process is based on the extracted big hit determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the second special symbol, and the second special symbol determination process. With reference to the big hit random number judgment table, the symbol judgment table and the big hit type determination table, a symbol designating command, a big hit selecting symbol command, and the like for the main symbol (a second special symbol to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process (step S88). This variation pattern determination processing is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described start-up winning detection processing, as in step S78, and the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). Then, a process of selecting a variation pattern is performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the reach determination random number, and the effect selection random number.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of held second winning opening winnings (step S89). The second start opening winning number increase command is a command indicating that the number of held second special symbols is increased by one, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 together with a command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S88. Is sent. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the start-up winning detection process.

  If the game ball winning in the first starting port 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting port 440 are simultaneously detected, either of the setting check processing in step S72 and the setting check processing in step S82 is performed. Only one of them may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S81), it is assumed that the number of retained second starting port winnings is four (NO in step S84). Also, the main CPU 101 does not transmit the command for overflowing the number of reserves for the second start-up port to the sub-control circuit 200, but discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls to the second start-up port 440 for starting. The winning detection processing has been completed. This is because the setting value suggestion effect described later can be effectively performed in the non-time saving game state.

[5-2-1-1-1. Setting check process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check process by the main CPU 101. This setting check process is the same in steps S72 and S82 (both refer to FIG. 31). The setting check process is a process for checking whether the set value set is normal. In this setting check processing, for example, the same processing as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S1720 (see FIG. 21) may be performed. The emphasis is on checking for normality.

  As shown in the figure, first, in step S721, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a specified range). As described above, in the present embodiment, “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the set value data corresponding to the set values “1” to “6”. It is determined whether it is within the range of "0" to "5". If the set value data is within the range of “0” to “5” (YES in step S721), the setting check processing ends. When the set value data is out of the range of “0” to “5” (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S722.

  In step S722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S723.

  In step S723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is being changed and displayed (YES in step S723), the process proceeds to step S724. If the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is not being changed and displayed (NO in step S723), the process proceeds to step S725.

  In step S724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display. That is, referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15), even if the variation time of the special symbol determined in step S78 or step S88 (both refer to FIG. 31) has elapsed, The variable display of the special symbol is continued, and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S726.

  For example, if a game ball wins in the starting ports 5442 and 440 while the special symbol is being displayed by the main CPU 101, the step is performed during the display of the special symbol (before the display of the variable of the special symbol ends). The setting check process of S72 (or step S82) may be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting is not normal (NO in step S721) in this setting check process, even if the special symbol is being changed and displayed (the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the changed display is not displayed). ), The game permission flag is turned off, and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. In this case, since the game cannot be executed unless the power is once turned off and the setting change processing is executed, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol during the fluctuation display is cleared in the backup clear processing including the data on hold. The Rukoto.

  In step S726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball. That is, control is performed so that power is not supplied from the payout / firing control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) to the firing solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player grips the firing handle 32 and performs a turning operation in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not fired, and the game cannot be played.

  When prohibiting the launch of the game ball in step S726, the main CPU 101 shifts to an abnormal time process in step S727.

  In step S725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the change display of the special symbol, so that the next new change display is not started. For example, even if the special symbol change display is suspended when the special symbol is not in the variable display, or the special symbol change display is stopped and the next variable display is waiting to be started, the special symbol change display is started. Not done. After ending the processing in step S725, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S726.

  In the abnormal time process of step S727, the main CPU 101 performs the same process as the abnormal time process of step S38 (see FIG. 26). That is, the processes in steps S381 to S384 shown in FIG. 27 are performed until the power-off detection signal ON is detected. The processing in steps S3851 to S3854 shown in FIG. 28 is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port 420 and at the time of winning a game ball to the second starting port 440, and the main RAM 103 If the stored set value data is not normal, execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even during the execution of the game, if the set value data is not normal, it is impossible to continue the game, and unless the power is once turned off and turned on again to perform the setting change process, The game cannot be executed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the setting is not normal.

  Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the set value data is not appropriate in step S721, as described above, the power is temporarily turned off and the power is turned on again even if the display of the change of the special symbol has not been started yet and has been suspended. Since the game cannot be executed unless the player inputs the setting and the setting change process is performed, all the various data (for example, the random number for the jackpot determination) stored in the main RAM 103 are cleared. That is, regardless of whether the various data held is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420 or based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 440, all Cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various types of data related to the suspension from being processed based on abnormal setting values, and to enhance security.

  In addition, as described above, in the setting check processing, the same processing is performed in step S72 and step S82 (both refer to FIG. 31). Therefore, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal (NO in step S721) in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420, the main CPU 101 determines in step S724. Prohibits stopping the second special symbol during the variable display not only when the special symbol during the variable display is the first special symbol but also when the special symbol during the variable display is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S721) in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball has won the second starting port 440, the process proceeds to step S724. The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol during the variable display not only when the special symbol during the variable display is the second special symbol but also when the special symbol during the variable display is the first special symbol.

  Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball has won the first starting port 420 (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is suspended is the first special symbol but also when the special symbol is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal (NO in step S721) in the setting check process (step S82) performed when a game ball has won the second starting port 440, the process proceeds to step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is suspended is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of turning on the power (see step S1730 of FIG. 21) and at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of setting confirmation processing (see step S24 of FIG. 22), at the time of setting change processing (see step S26 of FIG. 22), at the time of execution of backup clear processing (see FIG. 24), the fluctuation display of special symbols starts When a special symbol is changed, the setting check process is triggered by a predetermined timing, such as when the special symbol is stopped, when passage is detected by the passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9), when the normal symbol starts changing, or when the normal symbol stops changing. It may be performed. In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined timing is an example listing. The setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or a part of the above timings). Even in such a case, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the setting is not normal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if it is determined in the setting check process that the set value data is not normal, it is impossible to immediately turn off the game permission flag and proceed with the game regardless of whether or not the game is in the big hit game state. Although it is made possible, the timing is not limited to this, and the timing at which the setting value data is determined to be incorrect in the setting check processing may be shifted from the timing at which the execution of the game is disabled. As a result, it is possible to reduce a sense of loss of the player that can be caused by the fact that the fluctuation display is not performed even if the game ball has won the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. However, since it is not preferable to perform various determination processes (for example, a big hit determination process or the like) in a state where the set value data is not normal, the special symbol variation display is performed for a predetermined time without performing the various determination processes. It is preferable to stop the special symbol with a loss.

  Although not shown in FIG. 32, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S722, it is preferable that the stop of the ordinary symbol is also prohibited if the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner. . Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[5-3. Main control main processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing main control main processing by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process as shown in the figure (step S91). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs processing such as the above-described power-on processing.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S93). The special symbol control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S94). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73, according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S 93 and S 94. A process of storing control signals for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the ordinary symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits control signals to the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74) and the normal symbol display section 71, and the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol based on the received control signal.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores the generated game state command in the main RAM 103.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the probable change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S92.

[5-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses to the left of each process shown in FIG. 6 indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing a process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the value of the read control state flag, whether or not to execute each of steps S102 to S110 described below. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S102 to S110. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process of steps S102 to S110. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processing related to another subroutine is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 29) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S102). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of suspended symbols in the variable display of the special symbol, and if the number of symbols is not “0”. In the case where there is a reserved ball, the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the determination of the main symbol, the result of the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like obtained in the starting opening winning detection processing are acquired. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets the control pattern flag to the fluctuation pattern acquired in the current process. The variable display time of the corresponding special symbol is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the special symbol variation time management process described later is set to be executed after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting opening winning detection process. On the other hand, when the reserved number is “0” (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. This special symbol storage check processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S103). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed, sets the control status flag to a special symbol described later. The value ("02") indicating the display time management process (step S104) is set, and the wait time after determination is set in the wait time timer. That is, after the elapse of the post-determination waiting time set in the process of step S103, the special symbol display time management process described below is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S104). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S103 has elapsed, the main CPU 101 determines whether the big hit is determined. It is determined whether or not the result is a “big hit”. If the big hit determination result is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S105) described later in the control state flag, and sets the big hit start interval as the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, the big hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process (step S110) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that a special symbol game ending process described later is executed. This special symbol display time management processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit start interval management process (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit start interval management process (“03”), and that the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, In order to open the winning opening 540, the variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating a process of opening a special winning opening (described later) (step S106), and sets an upper limit time for opening the special winning opening 540 (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special winning opening time timer. In other words, this process is set so that a process during opening of the special winning opening described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening process (step S106). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the special winning opening process, the main CPU 101 sets a condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and It is determined whether one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating the later-described winning prize opening ball monitoring process (Step S107) in the control state flag, and sets the monitoring time of the remaining prize ball in the winning prize opening to a waiting time timer. I do. That is, by this processing, after the monitoring time of the remaining sphere in the special winning opening set in step S107 elapses, it is set so that the processing of monitoring the remaining sphere in the special winning opening described later is executed. Immediately before the end of the special winning opening processing, a round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process for monitoring the remaining sphere in the special winning opening (step S107). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to the value (“05”) indicating the processing for monitoring the remaining sphere in the special winning opening, and when the monitoring time for the remaining sphere in the special winning opening has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the number of times of opening the special winning opening counter. It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum winning opening number (the last round) is satisfied. When determining that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("06") indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the waiting time management processing before reopening of the special winning opening described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value indicating the jackpot end interval processing (“07”) in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (the jackpot end interval). Time) to the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit end interval set in this process has elapsed, the big hit end interval process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening release frequency counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening re-opening waiting time management process (step S108). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the special winning opening, and opens the special winning opening when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The value of the number-of-times counter is stored and updated so as to be increased by "1". The main CPU 101 updates the storage so as to reset the value of the special winning opening winning counter. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the special winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening time timer. That is, it is set such that the above-described opening processing of the special winning opening (step S106) is executed again in this processing. In addition, immediately before the end of the special winning opening waiting time management process, a special winning opening opening command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening release frequency counter is equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit end interval process (step S109). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value (“07”) indicating that the control state flag indicates the big hit end interval process and indicates the special symbol game end process (“07”) when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed. 08 ”) is set in the control state flag. That is, by this processing, it is set so that the special symbol game ending processing described later is executed after the processing of step S109. When the above-mentioned main symbol is any one of Toku-zu 1-2, Toku-zu 1-8 and Toku-zu 2-2, the main CPU 101 performs control to shift the gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. If the main symbol described above is any one of the special maps 1-1, 1-3 and 2-1, the control to set the gaming state to the low-probability gaming state (probable change flag OFF) is performed. Do.

  Next, when the big hit game state ends or when the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game ending process (step S110). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 updates the data (startup storage information) indicating the number of held items so as to decrease by “1”. I do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next special symbol change display. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the above-described special symbol storage check process (step S102) is executed after the process of step S110. When the special symbol game end processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control processing.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state and the result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “02”, and “08”. Set in order. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104), and the special symbol game end process (step S110). At a predetermined timing in this order.

  When the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state and the big hit determination result is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “00”, “01”, “02”, and “03”. I do. As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104), and the big hit start interval management process (step S105). At a predetermined timing in this order, and control to shift to the big hit gaming state is executed.

  Further, when the transition control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “06”. Thereby, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described processing for opening the special winning opening (step S106), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S107), and the waiting time management processing before reopening the special winning opening (step S108) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state is executed.

  When the big hit game state end condition is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, and “08”. Thus, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described processing during the opening of the special winning opening (step S106), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S107), the processing for ending the big hit (step S109), and the processing for ending the special symbol game (step S110). At the predetermined timing in this order, and the big hit gaming state ends.

  As described above, in the special symbol control processing, the processing flow is branched according to the status. Also, in the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 40 described later) in step S94 in the main control main process shown in FIG. 33, the process flow is branched according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

  The processing program according to the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the process is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[5-3-1-1. Special design memory check process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating a special symbol storage check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “00” (NO in step S112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is “00” (YES in step S112), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S113.

  In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserves (the second number of stored start-ups) of the second start-up winning (the display of the change of the second special symbol) is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of retained second starting opening prizes is “0” (YES in step S113), the process proceeds to step S114, and determines that the number of retained second starting opening prizes is not “0”. If it is determined (NO in step S113), the process proceeds to step S121.

  In step S114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the retained number (first stored number of memories) of the first starting opening winning (the change display of the first special symbol) is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of the first starting opening winnings is not “0” (NO in step S114), the process proceeds to step S115, and determines that the number of the first starting opening winnings is “0”. When it is determined (YES in step S114), the process proceeds to step S120.

  In step S115, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the number of first start opening winnings held. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display or on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the four times of the change display (reserved ball) of the first special symbol held for four times. Is stored as start storage information. In addition, the start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for symbol determination extracted at the time of winning the first opening 420, and data indicating the determined variation pattern. Is included.

  Next, in step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first winning opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S117.

  In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("01") indicating the special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

  In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 extracts the random number for jackpot determination extracted at the time of winning the starting opening and set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, reference value data is acquired with reference to a big hit determination table (not shown) corresponding to the type of the winning start port. Then, based on the obtained determination value data, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a “big hit” or a “loss” (big hit determination).

  Next, in step S119, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined in the fluctuation pattern determination processing in step S78 or step S88 (both shown in FIG. 31) in the waiting time timer. . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  Further, in step S121, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the number of held second start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a memory for starting a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display or on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as the start storage information. In the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the change display (holding ball) of the second special symbol held for four times. Is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for symbol determination extracted at the time of winning the second opening 440, and data indicating the determined variation pattern. Is included.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the winning of the second starting opening (step S122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S117, executes the processes of steps S118 and S119, and ends the special symbol storage check process.

[5-3-2. Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (NO in step S131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management processing (YES in step S131), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S132.

  In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variable display start waiting time) after the variable display is set, which is set in the waiting time timer, has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management processing. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S132), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S133.

  In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit” (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S140.

  In step S134, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S135.

  In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time-saving counter, the time-saving flag, and the probability change flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S136.

  In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control status flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S137).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S138). Thereby, the big hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 12, FIG. 16 or FIG. 17), and refers to the special symbol (type of symbol designating command) for the number of rounds (the maximum winning opening opening number). ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and a round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S139). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not the remaining round number is displayed in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. This time reduction processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end process to the control state flag (step S141). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[5-3-2-1. Time saving subtraction processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the number-of-time-save-times subtraction process by the main CPU 101. The time saving number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the big hit end interval process described later. As shown in the drawing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151). The time reduction counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time reduction becomes zero. If the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S151), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S154. When the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (NO in step S151), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process. Although the details will be described later, the number of times set as the time saving counter in this embodiment is 100 or 10000.

  In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S153), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S154. When the value of the time-saving number counter is not 0 (NO in step S153), the main CPU 101 ends the time-saving number subtraction process.

  In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “0” as the time saving flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

[5-3-3. Jackpot end interval processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the big hit end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The big hit end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value indicating the big hit end interval processing ("07") (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is the value indicating the big hit end interval processing (“07”) (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S162.

  In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S163.

  In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the special winning opening opening frequency display LED pattern flag. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by an LED light emission pattern.

  Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). The round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and indicates whether or not the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Flag. If the special winning opening 540 is opened and closed periodically even during one round, the round number distribution flag becomes “1”. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol big hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game ending process to the control state flag (step S165).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). If it is determined that the special symbol game is a “big hit” (YES in step S166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S167. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit” (NO in step S166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing in step S174.

  In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit flag to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probability change big hit (step S168). If it is a probability change jackpot (YES in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S169. If it is not a probability change jackpot (NO in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S171.

  In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “1” as the probability change flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting “1” as the time saving flag (step S171).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a prescribed number of times saved in the number of times saved counter (step S172). In the present embodiment, referring to the big hit type determination table (FIG. 12, FIG. 16 or FIG. 17), a big hit of 100 times (for example, Toku-zu 1-1, Toku-zu 1-3, Toku-zu 2-1) In such a case, the time-saving counter is set to 100 times, and the time-saving is continued until the next big-hit game state is executed (for example, Toku-zu 1-2, Toku-zu 1-8, Toku-zu 2-2) Is set to 10000 times in the time saving counter. However, the time saving counter set when the time saving is a big hit in which the time saving continues until the next big hit gaming state is executed is not limited to 10,000 times, and even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the hall, The number may be any number that cannot actually occur. In this way, by setting the number of times that can not actually occur even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the store in the time saving counter, the time saving is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed Will be done. Further, when the hit is a big hit with the number of time savings of 100, the counter processing is performed (the time saving counter is set to 100), and when the hit is a big hit in which the time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed, the flag processing is performed. (The time saving game state is continued as long as the time saving flag is ON).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing.

  In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the big hit flag, that is, a process of turning off the big hit flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM.

  In step S175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described time saving number subtraction process (step S175). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval processing.

[5-3-3-1. Variation pattern table setting processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the power-on process or the big hit end interval process described above. As shown in the drawing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is on (step S181). If the power is on (YES in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S182. If the power is not turned on (NO in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S183.

  In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). Table pattern 1 corresponds to a table pattern in the case where both the probable change flag and the time saving flag are ON (both big hits and loss) in the special symbol change time determination table shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). .

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S183). If the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S184. If the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process in step S185.

  In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. Table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is OFF (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15).

  In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. The table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is ON (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15).

[5-4. Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 40 indicate a normal symbol control state flag. Is stored in a predetermined storage area. The main CPU 101 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the ordinary symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the read value of the ordinary symbol control state flag, whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described below. The normal symbol control state flag indicates a game state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 29) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol storage check process (step S192). In this process, when the ordinary symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the ordinary symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of suspended symbols in the variable display of the ordinary symbol, and the number of retained symbols is “0”. If not, processing such as jackpot determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the later-described ordinary symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193) in the ordinary symbol control state flag, and sets the variation time determined in this process. Set the wait time timer. That is, by the processing of step S192, after the determined fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol elapses, it is set so that the ordinary symbol fluctuation time monitoring processing described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193). In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets the ordinary symbol control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the ordinary symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and sets the ordinary symbol control state flag to be described later when the ordinary symbol fluctuation time has elapsed. A value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and a wait time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a wait time timer. That is, in the process of step S193, after the set waiting time after the determination has elapsed, the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and that if the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S193 elapses, the big hit It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is “big hit”. Then, when the result of the big hit determination is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening setting process, and sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value indicating the later-described normal electric accessory opening process (step S195) (step S195). "03") is set. That is, the processing is set so as to execute the later-described ordinary electric accessory release processing. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S195) described later in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that a later-described ordinary symbol game ending process is executed.

  Next, when the result of the big hit determination is “big hit” in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 101 determines that a predetermined number of prizes have been won while the ordinary electric accessory 460 is being opened. It is determined whether one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (see, for example, FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described ordinary symbol game end process (step S196) in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that a later-described ordinary symbol game end process is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 decreases the data indicating the number of suspended symbols in the variable symbol display by “1”. Is updated. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the ordinary symbol storage area in order to perform the next variation display of the ordinary symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the ordinary symbol storage check process in the ordinary symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the setting is made so that the above-described ordinary symbol storage check process (step S192) is executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[6. Sub-control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub control circuit main processing. The sub-control circuit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process performed by the sub CPU 201. The sub-control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). In the watchdog timer, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set at the time of startup, and when a service pulse is not written (time-out), power interruption processing is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an operation means input process (step S203).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command analysis process (step S204). The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect mode determination process (step S205). The effect mode determination process is a process of determining an effect mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  The effect mode determined in the effect mode determination process (step S205) also includes a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value that has been set. The setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to a first example and a second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. For example, the sub CPU 201 counts the first start winning port overflow point, and when the main control circuit 100 transmits the number-of-first-start-port winning reserve number overflow command, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the first start winning port overflow point. I do. Then, when the first start winning port overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 determines in the above-described effect mode determination processing that a setting suggestion effect is to be executed. In a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag such as a normal game state is OFF, it is not easy to win a game ball to the first starting port 420. Therefore, when the first starting winning port overflow occurs, the player is not discouraged. . Therefore, by performing the setting suggestive effect on the condition that the first starting winning opening overflow has occurred in the non-time-saving gaming state, it is possible to suppress discouragement of the player without directly giving a loss to the hole. It becomes possible. Further, some of the players interrupt the emission of the game balls when the winning of the game balls to the first starting port 420 is the upper limit of the hold. In this regard, the game can be promoted by performing the setting suggestion effect on condition that the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 420 exceeds the upper limit of holding.

  In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The setting suggestion effect may be performed based on the transmission of the pending number overflow command from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the setting suggestion effect is frequently executed, for example, it is preferable that the effect is difficult to guess at the setting if the setting suggestion effect is performed only once. For example, it is difficult to guess a setting only by information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to estimate a setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is conceivable to do so.

  In addition, as described above, the reason why the overflow command for the first start-up opening winning number is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is based on the premise that the setting value data is determined to be normal in the setting check processing in step S72. is there. Therefore, when it is not determined that the setting value data is normal in the setting check processing, even if the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit, it is performed. , The sub CPU 201 does not add the first starting winning opening to the overflow point. Therefore, in a situation where the first start winning port overflow point reaches a predetermined point when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit (for example, the predetermined point). At 49 points for 50 points), when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the upper limit of holding, the setting check processing of step S72 (FIG. 31). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is not normal, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later) without performing the setting suggestion effect by the sub CPU 201, and the game cannot be advanced. .

  In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the hold upper limit ( The setting is performed in the same manner as when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit, provided that the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 exceeds the holding upper limit. A suggestive effect may be performed.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when a game ball wins a specific winning opening during execution of the reach effect. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the sub CPU 201 sets a specific winning opening out of the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (for example, see FIG. 5), for example. Randomly determined by lottery. Then, when the main control circuit 100 transmits a winning command of the game ball to the specific winning port determined above during execution of the reach effect, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. For example, some players stop firing game balls when a reach effect with a long fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, during the execution of the reach effect, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to a specific winning opening, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect . Further, in the reach production, there is a case where the expectation is low immediately when the reach production is started. In such a case, the fluctuation display is not started next for the player until the end of the reach effect, and there is a possibility that interest may be reduced. In this regard, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of winning of a game ball to a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Moreover, if the set value can be set by the gaming machine manager, the player may be skeptical that the set value of the pachinko game machine in which the player plays the game may be low. According to the example described above, such a fear can be reduced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When the specific winning port is randomly determined from the first starting port 420, the second starting port 440 and each of the general winning ports 53, 54, 55 (for example, see FIG. 5) by random selection, for example, It is preferable to keep the secret without disclosing which one is a specific winning opening. As a result, it is interesting for the player to determine which winning opening should be aimed.

  Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning opening is defined as the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning opening 53, 54, 55 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Among them, for example, a lottery is determined at random, but it is not always necessary to determine a specific winning opening at random, and a fixed winning opening may be set as a specific winning opening.

  In each of the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. However, the main CPU 101 may determine the effect.

  When a game ball wins a specific winning opening during execution of the reach effect, if the specific winning opening is a starting opening, the setting check process in step S72 or step S82 (both refer to FIG. 31) is performed. Will be The setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined that the setting check process is normal (YES in step S721). When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the main CPU 101 not only does not perform the setting suggestion effect but also prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display by the process of step S734. I do. Also, the sub CPU 201 continues to perform the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol even if the fancy effect accompanied by the reach effect is being performed. However, the sub CPU 201 may stop the output of the sound effect by the sound control circuit 205 or reduce the output sound volume.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the display control circuit 204 executes a drawing control process (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the voice control circuit 205 performs a voice control process (Step S208). In this process, the voice control circuit 205 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the LED control circuit 206 performs a control process on the light emission mode of the LED 25 (step S209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control for turning on or blinking the LED 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes an accessory control process (step S210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor for operating the movable accessory unit based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is completed, each process of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[6-1. Command analysis processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101), the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in a reception buffer of the work RAM 203 (step S241).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed in order to verify that the target data exists when the command is received, and that the data has no error or lack.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the production type (whether there is a speech notice or whether there is a SU notice) as the production pattern. The effect content (effect type, cut-in type, and the like) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process separately formed as a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and thereafter, the effect content executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the execution of the game, the setting check processing is performed in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 31), and in this setting check processing, the set value data is “0” to “5”. ("NO" in step S721 in FIG. 32), the processing in steps S722 to S726 is performed, and then the processing at the time of abnormality in step S727 is performed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is replaced illegally, there is a high possibility that the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 is not executed. Further, in the case where the set value that is set by the input of the illegal signal is changed, there is a possibility that the set value data is in the range of “0” to “5”. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting value data is “0” when the setting check processing is not executed in step S72 or step S82 or the setting value may be incorrectly changed. Assuming a case where the value is within the range from “5” to “5” (for example, a case where “YES” is determined in step S721), the sub CPU 201 executes a setting determination process of determining whether the setting value information is appropriate. This setting determination processing will be described below, not shown.

  First, the main CPU 101 starts the special symbol variation display when a special symbol variation display is suspended at a specific timing (for example, when a game ball is awarded to the first startup port 420 / second startup port 440). Is transmitted, a command indicating the set value information stored in the main RAM 103 is transmitted. Then, the sub CPU 201 that has received this command determines whether or not the setting value information (hereinafter, referred to as “current setting value”) indicated by the command received this time is appropriate. This suitability determination is, for example, a process of determining whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as “previous set value”) indicated by the previously received command matches the current set value.

  Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that the set value is normal if the previous set value and the current set value match, and determines that the set value is abnormal if the previous set value and the current set value do not match. Is determined.

  When the received setting value information is abnormal, the sub CPU 201 executes a setting value abnormal process. This abnormal time execution process displays, for example, an image notifying that the set value is abnormal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, or alternatively or additionally displays the image that the set value is abnormal. This is a process of outputting a sound to be notified.

  In addition, the determination of the suitability of the set value information described above is not limited to the determination of whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match. For example, all of the set value information received three or more times match. It may be determined whether or not some of the setting value information received a plurality of times (for example, the setting value indicated by the command received twice before and the current setting value) match. It may be determined whether or not there is any. However, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the setting change process (see step S24 in FIG. 22) has been executed, the current setting value is stored in the work RAM 203. Only in this case, it is not determined whether or not the past set value including the previous set value matches the current set value.

  In addition, the above-described setting determination processing (determination of appropriateness of the setting value information) is preferably performed not only during the execution of the game, but also when the power is turned on after the power interruption, unless the setting change processing is performed. . The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power failure will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The setting determination process executed by the sub CPU 201 described above may be executed in the command analysis process (step S204), or may be executed after exiting from the command analysis process subroutine.

[6-2. Command transmission processing]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a command transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of generating a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily storing the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a directory table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a corresponding directory table in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message and the presentation information stored in the directory buffer. This directory table registration processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of reading out a message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the directory table, and transmitting the message to predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission processing. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[6-2-1. Message setting process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a message setting process by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets a device (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the presence or absence of the system operation (step S262).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets stage information and each effect information (step S263).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted, messages indicating the presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a notice pattern. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting processing.

[6-2-2. Directory table registration process]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a directory table registration process by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration processing is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described command transmission processing. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a single table (step S271).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a slave table used in the master table (step S273).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as a slave table (step S274). When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the directory table registration processing.

[6-2-3. Message transmission processing]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a message transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the directory buffer corresponding to the directory table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) in accordance with the “transmission destination device” set in the message. Is transmitted (step S281).

  Next, after the transmission of the message is completed, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding unnecessary directory tables (step S282). When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission processing.

[7. Extensibility of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the variation time of the special symbol, the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probable inrush rate, Although the inrush ratio is changed, it is not always necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and only one or a plurality of them may be changed according to the set value.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the ordinary symbol stopped and displayed in the ordinary symbol display section 71 is in a predetermined mode ("normal hit" mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is set to the predetermined mode. From the closed state to the open state only during the period of. Therefore, the timing at which the ordinary electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state or the timing at which the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the open state to the closed state (that is, the timing at which game balls are fired) may be notified to the player. In this case, the frequency of notifying the firing timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the notification frequency of the fire timing).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the backup clearing process (for example, step S39) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. This backup clear processing is always performed when the setting change processing (step S24) is executed. Therefore, when the backup clear processing is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is always required. Is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which data is cleared is determined by the backup clear processing performed when the setting change processing is performed and the backup clear processing performed without performing the setting change processing. You may make it different. For example, after the jackpot game state ends, a high-probability game state is set until a predetermined number of games are executed (until a special symbol is changed and displayed a predetermined number of times), and a low level is set after the predetermined number of games are ended. In a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to the probability gaming state (a so-called “ST machine”), when the game is controlled to the high probability gaming state (before the execution of a predetermined number of games is completed), the setting change processing is performed. When the backup clearing process is performed without accompanying the setting change process, the probable change flag is set OFF, and when the backup clearing process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, the probable change flag is continuously set ON (remaining in the high probability game state). The storage of the number of games may be held). Further, when the backup clear processing is performed along with the execution of the setting change processing, the ON setting of the probable change flag is continued when the set value is set to the same value as the previous time, and when the set value is set to a different value from the previous time. May set the probability change flag to OFF.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in each round game in the jackpot gaming state, the special winning opening 540 is set when the number of gaming balls winning the special winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls, and When one of the conditions is satisfied when the time has reached 30 sec, the state is closed. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit gaming state, the condition for the large winning opening 540 to be changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions for the large winning opening 540 to be changed from the open state to the closed state are prepared (for example, a plurality of gaming balls with different expected values of the number of game balls that can cause the large winning opening 540 to win game balls in one round). A condition may be prepared), and the condition may be changed according to the set value, so that a higher set value makes it easier to select a condition having the higher expected value. As a specific example, it is considered that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the setting value, so that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 is likely to be longer at a higher setting value. Can be Also, by changing the count of game balls in which the large winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the set value, the more the number of game balls to the large winning opening 540 is likely to increase. It is also possible to do.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the stopped and displayed ordinary symbol is in the form of the ordinary hit, the ordinary electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. By setting the time during which the accessory 46 is in the open state (opening time) in accordance with the set value, the open time of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be easily increased as the set value increases.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a big hit in which the probable change flag is ON as in the special figure 1-2 or the special figure 1-4, the big hit game state is ended, and then the next big hit game is executed. The high-probability gaming state continues until the game is played, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440, the display of the change of the special symbol is suspended. (When the special symbol change display is started), a shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed. In this case, by changing the transition probability from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state according to the set value, the higher the set value, the higher the continuation probability of the high-probability game state (from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state). May be lowered). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting check process (steps S72 and S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. If it is determined that the process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the above-mentioned transfer lottery is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability change flag is also turned off). Set).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the change time of the special symbol, and the selectivity of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probability of change inrush rate, the time-saving inrush rate) are changed according to the set value set. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above has been described, providing a setting difference is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a part of the configuration may be changed. Hereinafter, another extended example in which the configuration is partially changed will be described. Note that components not particularly mentioned in the description of the other extended examples below are the same as the configuration of the present embodiment. However, in the following, except for the step numbers, for example, each member such as the main CPU is denoted by a reference numeral. I haven't.

[7-1. Extension example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the big hit gaming state ends, and then the high probability gaming until the next big hit gaming state starts. A description will be given using a so-called “probable variable loop machine” in which the state continues as an example. In the first extended example, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of loops”). When the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the jackpot gaming state ends. The later gaming state is controlled to a low-probability gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as “limiter number”) can be changed according to a set value (such gaming machines are referred to as “limiters”). Machine). This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a table showing, for each set value, an example of the selectivity of the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example.

  The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first extended example includes a loop number checking means for checking the number of loops when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and a limiter number for performing a limit number lottery when the number of loops is 0. Lottery means, loop number counting means for incrementing the number of loops when the number of loops is within a prescribed range (in this example, within the range of 1 to 4), and a prescribed number of loop times (5 in this example, the upper limit of the limiter). In this case, there are provided a game state control means for controlling the game state after the big hit game state ends to a low probability state, and a loop number reset means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a specified value. Note that the limiter number lottery may be performed at any timing when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, at the start of the big hit gaming state, during the big hit gaming state, or at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the setting 1, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 25%, twice with a probability of 30%, and three times with a probability of 25%. It is determined four times with a probability of 15% and five times with a probability of 5%. In setting 2, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once at a probability of 25%, twice at a probability of 25%, three times at a probability of 25%, and four times at a probability of 20%. And 5 times with a probability of 5%. In setting 3, for example, the number of limiters is determined to be one at a probability of 15%, to two at a probability of 25%, to three at a probability of 25%, and to four at a probability of 20%. And is determined 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 4, for example, the number of limiters is determined to be one at a probability of 15%, to two at a probability of 20%, to three at a probability of 25%, and to four at a probability of 25%. And is determined 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 5, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 5%, twice with a probability of 20%, three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 25%. And 25 times with a probability of 25%. In setting 6, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 5%, twice with a probability of 10%, three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 30%. , And 5 times with a 25% probability. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of expectation that the number of limiters is determined.

  In this way, by changing the degree of expectation for the number of limiters in accordance with the set value so that the higher the set value, the larger the jackpot game state and the higher probability game state can be repeated, the one chance (the big hit) It is possible to vary the amount of prize balls awarded to the player in accordance with the set value at the time of being controlled to the low-probability gaming state when winning once. Moreover, although the expected value for the limiter count is made different according to the set value, since the limiter count is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value based on the limiter count. Has become.

  In the first extended example, the limiter count is determined by lottery according to the installation value. However, the lottery is not necessarily required. For example, although there is a concern that the set value may be guessed by the player, The number of limiters may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as three times for 1.2, four times for setting 3.4, and five times for setting 5.6.

  The limiter count may be set separately for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

  For example, when the number of limiters is separately determined for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first limit number for the first special symbol if the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a big hit Is determined, and if the state is controlled to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, during the above loop, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol, the loop number of the first special symbol is not incremented, and the second limiter number of the second special symbol is not increased. To determine. In this case, when one of the first limiter count and the second limiter count reaches the limiter count, the loop may be ended (control to a low-probability game state), or the first limiter count and the second limiter may be set. The loop may be terminated when both the count reaches the limiter count.

  Also, for example, when the above-mentioned limiter frequency is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the big hit determination regardless of whether the symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is a big hit, the limiter count is determined, and during the loop, whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is controlled to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination, the loop Increment the count. When the number of loops reaches the number of limiters, the loop ends.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described extended example 1 is a so-called stochastic loop machine, but is not necessarily a stochastic loop machine. For example, the above technical idea is applied to a so-called "ST machine" pachinko gaming machine. You can also. The “ST machine” means that the game state after the big hit game state is completed is controlled to the high-probability game state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and the high-probability game state is controlled a predetermined number of times (hereinafter “ST times”). This is a pachinko gaming machine that continues until the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the predetermined number of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the high-probability gaming state is ended and the game is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. Even with such an “ST machine”, the degree of expectation for the limiter count can be made different according to the set value. That is, the higher the set value, the more the jackpot game state and the high probability game state can be repeated, so that one chance (an opportunity until the low probability game state is controlled when one big hit is won) is achieved. ), It is possible to vary the amount of prize balls given to the player according to the set value.

  In a so-called “ST machine”, the “ST times” can be set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but the number of STs can be varied according to the set value. . For example, the main CPU of the “ST machine” can determine the number of STs by lottery so that the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value is different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 72 times in setting 6. With 75 times, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of STs can be. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. When the number of times of ST is made different according to the set value, it is preferable that the number of times saved is common to all set values. For example, when the ST count or the expected value of the ST count is 60 for setting 1, 63 for setting 2, 66 for setting 3, 69 for setting 4, 72 for setting 5, and 75 for setting 6. For example, it is conceivable that the number of time savings is set to, for example, 60 times for all settings. Then, the sub CPU performs an effect on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, to determine that the game is in the high-probability game state until the ST count reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games). Regardless of whether the game state is the high-probability game state, it is preferable to perform an effect that is difficult to grasp that the game state is the high-probability game state, for example, on a liquid crystal display device. This makes it possible to make the ST count and the expected value of the ST count different according to the set value while preventing the player from noticing the set value.

  Also in the pachinko gaming machine of the first extended example, the setting check process (steps S72 and S82) is performed, for example, at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port and the second starting port. Then, when it is determined that the setting is not normal in the setting check process (NO in step S721), even during the loop (that is, when the jackpot game state and the high-probability game state are repeatedly executed), By executing the setting change process (step S24), the number of loops is cleared in the backup clearing process (step S2420) without the number of loops reaching the limiter number (the probability change flag is also set to OFF).

[7-2. Extended example 2-1]
The pachinko gaming machine of the second extended example has a specific area in which a specific port is provided. This specific area is defined as a flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is generally difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. As a result of the special symbol big hit determination, a small hit is also prepared in addition to the big hit.

  Specifically, the main CPU makes a special symbol big hit determination with a big hit probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, makes a small hit hit determination. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the small hit hit determination is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit involving the operation of the condition device, while the small hit is not a hit involving the operation of the condition device.

  In the second extended example, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, a first special symbol game based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port, and a second special game Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state such as the time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit hit determination.

  In addition, when the result of the big hit determination on the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU activates the predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. A small hitting game executing means for executing a small hitting game in which the small hitting game is changed to an open mode, and a payout / firing control circuit based on a game ball winning in a specific area which has been set in the open mode by execution of the small hitting game. Payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls.

  In addition, in the second extended example, the number of times saved is set to, for example, five, and a specific port is provided in a specific area. Then, for example, when a game ball wins as a normal hit in the five time-saving gaming states and wins at the starting port, when a small hit occurs, a predetermined movable piece is activated and the specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area further enters the specific opening, the main CPU executes the big hit game. In addition, if the normal hit has not been achieved in the five time-saving gaming states, the main CPU ends the time-saving gaming state and controls the non-time-saving gaming state. In the time-saving game state, the game is performed by right-handed firing of the game ball toward the right area of the game area. In the non-time-saving game state, the game is performed by left-handed fire of the game ball toward the left area of the game area. A game is played.

  In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the second extended example, at least the small hitting probability in the second special symbol game is made different according to the set value, so that the second special symbol game is mainly performed, for example, a time-saving gaming state. In, the opening frequency of the specific area and, consequently, the payout can be varied according to the set value.

  For example, the probability of small hit is 1/9 in setting 1, 1/8 in setting 2, 1/7 in setting 3, 1/6 in setting 4, 1/5 in setting 5, and 6 in setting 6. To 1/4. In this case, as long as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is higher, the higher the setting value, the longer the opening state of the ordinary electric accessory is, and the higher the setting, the more difficult it is for the game ball to enter the starting opening. Gaming balls are easier to win at the starting opening. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the winning frequency of the game ball in the specific area, and thus, it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed according to the set value.

  In the second extended example, in the time saving game state, the probable change flag may be set to ON, but it is not always necessary to set the probable change flag to ON.

  Also, if a game ball wins in the first starting port or the second starting port while the special symbol is being changed and displayed by the main CPU, the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 is also performed in this case. . If the main CPU determines in the setting check process that the pattern is not normal (NO in step S721), the main CPU sets the game permission flag to OFF even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the variable display is a small hit, Execute the processing when an error occurs. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, if the setting check process determines that it is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without this, the game permission flag is turned off and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data including the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is small in the backup clearing process.

[7-3. Extended example 2-2]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 2-2 has a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU performs a first special symbol jackpot determination (hereinafter, referred to as a “first special lottery”) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the main CPU determines the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Based on this, a big hit determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “second special lottery”) is performed.

  Further, the main CPU is configured to perform a first game state (for example, a probability change flag) in which a lottery of a first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “first special lottery”) is mainly performed among the first special lottery and the second special lottery. And the time saving flag are both set to OFF, and a second gaming state in which a lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “second special lottery”) is mainly performed (for example, the probability change flag is ON). And an advantageous game state in which the time-saving flag is set to OFF). In this pachinko gaming machine, if a big hit is won with a specific symbol in the first game state, the game is controlled to the second game state after the big hit game ends.

  Further, a general-purpose gate is provided in the right area of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is performed. If the result of the normal lottery is a specific result (for example, a normal hit), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), thereby facilitating the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Is done. Therefore, when the game is performed by firing the game ball toward the right area of the game area, the second starting port is smaller than when the game ball is fired toward the left area of the game area to perform the game. The winning frequency of the game ball to the is increased.

  In the first special lottery, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is determined to be a plurality of rounds. A first jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a number of times is provided.

  In the second special lottery, the main CPU determines the jackpot of the second special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is determined. A second jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, in the second special lottery, when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, the main CPU makes a small hit hit determination, and when the result of the small hit hit determination is a small hit, The small hit game executing means for executing the small hit game is also provided.

  The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The big hit probability in the first gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, and 1/270 in setting 4. , Setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. The big hit probability in the second gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, and 27 minutes in setting 4. 1, setting 26 is 1/25 and setting 6 is 1/25.

  The main CPU, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, a first big hit game executing means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined special winning opening is opened for a plurality of rounds, and a result of the second special lottery A second jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game in which a predetermined jackpot is opened for a plurality of rounds when the jackpot is won. The big winning opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, and the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big winning, Good or different winning prizes.

  In addition, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to setting 1 to setting 6) regardless of whether the probability change flag is ON or OFF. The small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 in setting 1, 1/8 in setting 2, and 1/7 in setting 3, regardless of whether the probability change flag is ON or OFF. , The setting 4 is set to 1/6, and the setting 5 is set to 1/6. As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery differs depending on the set value, but is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery regardless of the set value.

  In addition, the main CPU has a small hitting game executing means for executing a small hitting game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same big winning opening as the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is opened. When a game ball wins in the special winning opening, the payout / firing control circuit operates a payout device to control a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, since the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning port is smaller than the big hit game, the degree of advantage for the player is smaller in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

  As described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is zero. That is, the main CPU performs the small hit determination with the small hit probability of 0 when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

  The big hit is a hit involving the operation of the condition device, while the small hit is not a hit involving the operation of the condition device.

  Further, the main CPU includes a first special symbol variation display control means for performing a variation display of the first special symbol based on a winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and a control based on a winning of the game ball to the second starting port. And a second special symbol variation display control means for performing a variation display of the second special symbol. The first special symbol change display control means stops the first special symbol so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed after the first special symbol is displayed for change over a predetermined time. In addition, the second special symbol change display control means stops the second special symbol so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed after the second special symbol is changed and displayed for a predetermined time.

  The variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable display control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, if the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port, and if the game ball is awarded in the second starting port, the first special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. If a game ball wins in the first opening while the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed based on the winning of the game ball in the second opening, even if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  Also, the average time of the variation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is almost the same when the probability change flag is ON and OFF, but the second special symbol is changed. The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol executed by the fluctuation display control means is significantly different depending on whether the probable change flag is ON or OFF. For example, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 sec in the first game state and 10 sec in the second game state, while the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1000 sec in the first game state. It is set to 1 second in the second game state. The special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) is performed when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Therefore, when a game ball is won at the second starting port in the first game state, it takes a considerable time before the result of the second special lottery is displayed, although the second special lottery has already been performed. Becomes

  In this manner, in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF, even if a game ball is fired toward, for example, a right area of the game area and the game ball wins in the second starting port, the second special symbol is obtained. It takes time until the variable display is stopped. In addition, since the second special symbol is variably displayed in one of a plurality of patterns having different fluctuation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a mode indicating a small hit (the small special may be a small hit). Even if the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing when the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. For this reason, it is also difficult to perform a so-called aiming, such as causing a game ball to win in a large winning opening aiming at a timing at which the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Further, in the first game state, when a game ball is fired toward, for example, a right area of the game area, a warning sound is output from the speaker under the control of the sub CPU, for example. Therefore, in the first game state, a game is played by firing a game ball toward, for example, a left area of the game area. On the other hand, in the second game state, the passing of the game ball through the general-purpose gate facilitates the winning of the game ball to the second starting port through the ordinary lottery, and also the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. In the second special lottery, the second special lottery wins a small hit with a probability higher than 1/10 regardless of the set value. Done.

  The average time (for example, 1000 sec) of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first game state is, for example, 50 times or more the average time (for example, 10 sec) of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first game state. Is preferred, but is preferably at least 10 times or more.

  In addition, the sub CPU is a decorative symbol variation display control means that controls the variable symbol display to be displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device in synchronization with the variable symbol display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Is provided. However, in the first gaming state, the decorative symbol variation display control means does not display the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol in a prominent manner even if the game ball has won the second starting port. When a game ball is awarded at one starting port, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner.

  The example of the above-mentioned "conspicuous mode" will be described in detail. For example, the liquid crystal display device includes a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol) and a right symbol (third symbol) substantially at the center of the display area. And the result of the special lottery can be displayed. Further, in a small area of, for example, one of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, a circle or a circle) that can be displayed in a variable manner (eg, blinks) in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Such a shape) can be displayed. The ratio of the first symbol to the third symbol occupying the display area is extremely large as compared with the ratio of the fourth symbol occupying the display area. Therefore, the player's gaze is more on the first symbol to the third symbol than on the fourth symbol. It will turn. Then, for example, in the first game state, when a game ball is won at the second starting port, the sub CPU performs the variable display only on the fourth symbol without performing the variable display on the first to third symbols. When a game ball wins at one starting port, the first symbol to the third symbol are displayed in a variable manner, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is also performed. In this manner, in the first gaming state, even if a game ball wins at the second starting port, the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not performed in a prominent manner, and the gaming ball is inserted at the first starting port. Can be realized in such a manner that the display of the decoration symbol synchronized with the first special symbol when the player wins the game is conspicuous.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of Extended Example 2-2 described above, in the first gaming state, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed even if the gaming ball has won the second starting port, but the second gaming state In this case, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is not only facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second gaming state, when a game ball is won at the second starting port, the probability of the second special lottery being a small hit (1/9 to 1/4 depending on the setting) is a big hit. (From 1/30 to 1/25, depending on the setting), the big wins are opened with small hits at a high frequency, and the time reduction flag is not set (ie, normal lottery). Without increasing the frequency of execution), it is possible to increase the chances of paying out game balls as prizes. In addition, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit differs according to the setting that has been set. Therefore, even when the big hit game is not being executed, the payout is made according to the set value that has been set. Can be made different.

  Also, if a game ball wins in the first starting port or the second starting port while the special symbol is being changed and displayed by the main CPU, the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 is also performed in this case. . Therefore, for example, in the second game state, the main CPU also performs the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 even when a game ball wins in the first starting port during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the main CPU turns off the game permission flag and executes an abnormal process. That is, in the second game state, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol during the variable display is a small hit, if the setting check process determines that the result is not normal, the main CPU determines that the small hit Without executing the small hit game based on the hit, the game permission flag is turned off, and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol during the variable display in the second game state is a small hit, the result including the information indicating the second game state and the information indicating the small hit is also included. Unless various data are cleared in the backup clearing process, the game permission flag is not set to ON.

[7-4. Extension example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the third extended example is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for controlling the jackpot gaming state, and therefore has a specific area in which a specific opening is provided. This specific area is defined as a flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is generally difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. As a result of the special symbol big hit determination, a small hit is also prepared in addition to the big hit.

  Specifically, the main CPU makes a special symbol big hit determination with a big hit probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, makes a small hit hit determination. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the small hit hit determination is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit involving the operation of the condition device, while the small hit is not a hit involving the operation of the condition device.

  In the third extended example, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, a first special symbol game based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port, and a second special game Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state such as the time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit hit determination.

  Further, the main CPU activates a predetermined movable piece when the result of the big hit determination on the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, and activates the predetermined movable piece. A small hitting game executing means for executing a small hitting game that allows a game ball to enter the game. When the predetermined movable piece is actuated in this way, the game ball enters the specific area, and when the game ball entering the specific area is detected to enter (accept) the specific port, the main The CPU controls the jackpot game state. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a big hit, the main CPU performs the first big hit game in which the round game for opening the big winning port is performed over a plurality of rounds. A first big hit game control means for controlling the state, and a round game for activating the predetermined movable piece based on a game ball entering the specific port when the small hit game is executed over a plurality of rounds. And a second big hit game control means for controlling the second big hit game state to be performed.

  In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 3, the ease of winning of the game ball to the starting port (for example, the execution frequency of the small hit game and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory) is set to the set value. It is different according to. In the third extended example as well, the result of the ordinary symbol determination performed by the main CPU based on detecting that the player has passed through the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player hits right is a normal hit. At times, the electric accessory is usually controlled from the closed state to the open state. Normally, when the electric accessory is opened, it is easy to win a game ball to the starting opening. As a method of changing the execution frequency of the small hit game according to the set value, for example, the probability of a normal hit in the normal symbol determination is changed according to the set value, or if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different according to the set value. Can be realized.

  As a method of varying the ease of winning a game ball to the starting port according to the set value, a method of varying the probability of a normal hit in the ordinary symbol determination according to the set value will be described as an example.

  For example, the probability of a normal hit is 1/60 for setting 1, 1/50 for setting 2, 1/40 for setting 3, 1/30 for setting 4, 1/20 for setting 5, and 6 for setting 6. To 1/10. In this case, as long as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is higher, the higher the setting value, the longer the opening state of the ordinary electric accessory is, and the higher the setting, the more difficult it is for the game ball to enter the starting opening. Gaming balls are easier to win at the starting opening. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of execution of the small hit game, and thus the chance of being controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means is promoted. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed according to the set value.

  Also in this extended example 3, if a game ball wins in the first starting port or the second starting port while the special symbol is being displayed by the main CPU 101, the setting check processing in step S72 or step S82 is performed. Be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag, Execute the processing when an error occurs. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting is not normal in the setting check process, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without this, the game permission flag is turned off and the processing at the time of abnormality is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data including the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol during the fluctuation display is small in the backup clearing process.

[7-5. Extension example 4]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4, even if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is not controlled immediately to the jackpot gaming state by itself. , The condition device is operated based on the assumption that the gaming device has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the premise that the condition device has been operated, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through a right-of-cassette-actuation-operated right gate, and FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mode of game balls passing through a left-cassette-of-cassette-operated-operation left gate.

  As shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth extended example is provided with an accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and an accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 in the game area. In addition, a distribution device 1120 capable of distributing a game ball flowing down the game area to one of a continuously-operated-item left gate 1100 and a continuously-operated-item right gate 1110 includes a continuously-operating-portion-operating-gate 1100. It is arranged above 1110.

  A left gate sensor 1100 and a right gate sensor (both not shown) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball are provided at the left gate 1100 and the right gate 1110, respectively. In the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor, detection of the passage of a game ball is normally disabled, and the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are enabled based on the activation of the condition device. Further, after the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the activation of the condition device, the game ball passes either one of the left-casing-actuation-operated-left gate 1100 and the right-casing-object continuously-operated right gate 1110. Invalidated based on detection of passage.

  When the left gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, the main CPU controls, for example, an 8R jackpot game state in which a round game of eight rounds is executed. When the right gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the role of continuously operating the right gate 1110, the main CPU determines the 2R big hitting game state (selection rate 50%) in which the two rounds of the round game are executed, and the 16th round Of the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is determined by lottery, and the state is controlled to the jackpot game state determined by the lottery.

  It should be noted that a big hit occurs when the left gate sensor detects the passage of a game ball to the left-hand-operated-portion-operating left gate 1100 and when the right gate sensor detects passage of a game ball to the right-access gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount paid out in the gaming state is the same.

  Also, the game ball that has passed through the role of continuously operating the left gate 1100 or the continuously operated right gate 1110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead is discharged out of the pachinko machine from the out port. It may be configured as follows.

  The distribution device 1120 distributes the game ball reaching above the distribution device 1120 to one of the left-hand-operated-portion-operating-operation left gate 1100 and the right-acting-product continuous-operation right gate 1110 by a regular operation. In the first posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the left, the game balls easily pass through the right gate 1110 for successively actuating objects (see FIG. 48), and in the second posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the right, the game balls play a role. It easily passes through the left gate 1100 for continuous operation of objects (see FIG. 49).

  In the fourth extended example, the ease with which a game ball passes is different between the left gate 1100 and the right gate 1110 continuously operated according to the set value. For example, in the setting 1, the operation of the distribution device 1120 is repeated between the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds, and in the setting 2, the first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1.3. In the setting 3, the first posture is repeated 0.9 seconds and the second posture is repeated 1.1 seconds. In the setting 4, the first posture is repeated 1.1 seconds and the second posture is repeated 0.9 seconds. Operation, setting 5 is an operation of repeating the first posture 1.3 seconds and the second posture 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 is an operation of repeating the first posture 1.5 seconds and the second posture 0.5 seconds. Thus, it is possible to change the mode of the big hit game state according to the set value.

  In addition, in this extended example 4, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the left gate 1100, the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 1110. The expected value of the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state is the same as when the player wins. That is, although the mode of the big hit game state can be changed according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is paid out in the big hit game state when the game ball is detected to pass through the left gate 1100 and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 1110 when continuously operated. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the role of continuously operating the left gate 1100, either the 2R jackpot gaming state (selection rate of 70%) or the 16R jackpot gaming state (selection rate of 30%) Is determined by the lottery performed at the above selection rate, and when the right gate sensor detects the passing of the game ball to the right actor continuous operation right gate 1110, the 2R big hit game state (selection rate 30%) Which of the game and the 16R big hit game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed may be determined by the lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the prize ball amount paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the larger the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state where the expected value to be paid out as a prize ball is higher. It is possible to increase the possibility of being.

  In this extended example 4, when the game ball passes through one of the two gates (the successively operated right gate 1100 and the continuously operated right gate 1110) in the condition that the condition device is operated, the successively actuated objects are activated. The device is configured to operate to be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, even if the condition device is operated based on the result of the special symbol big hit determination performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball is connected to either of the above two gates. A game ball may win at the starting port before passing. In this case, in a situation where the condition device has been activated but the game ball has not yet passed through either of the two gates, the main CPU 101 sets the setting check process based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port (for example, 31 (see step S72 in FIG. 31), and it may be determined that the setting check processing is not normal (for example, NO in step S721 in FIG. 32). In this case, even if the condition device operates, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

  In addition, in this extended example 4, two gates (operator continuous operation) are provided below the distributing device 1120, when the passage of a game ball is detected on the premise that the condition device is operating, and when the passing of the game ball is detected. Although the right gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110) are provided, the one provided below the distribution device 1120 is not necessarily limited to the accessory continuous operation gate. For example, a starting port and a general winning opening are provided. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 1120 causes the game ball that has reached the upper side of the distribution device 1120 by a regular operation to have a starting port serving as a jackpot determination trigger for a special symbol, and a general winning not serving as the jackpot determination trigger. Distribute to the mouth and either. The operation of the distribution device 1120 is, for example, an operation of repeating the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds in the setting 1, and a first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1 in the setting 2. .3 seconds, setting 3 repeats the first posture 0.9 seconds and second posture 1.1 seconds, setting 4 performs the first posture 1.1 seconds and the second posture 0.9 seconds. In the setting 5, an operation of repeating the first posture 1.3 seconds and the second posture 0.7 seconds, and in the setting 6, an operation of repeating the first posture 1.5 seconds and the second posture 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it becomes possible to vary the winning rate to the starting port according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to change the winning rate to the starting port according to the set value, the game ball is fired by the player at any timing regardless of the set value. It is possible to have an interest that it is possible to aim for a prize at the starting opening.

[7-6. Extended example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 5 does not make the data relating to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine different according to the set value, but can change the game property of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value. . In addition, in the extended example 5, the configuration is such that the setting value can be set to any one of the five stages of the setting 1 to the setting 5. However, it is not always necessary to set the setting value to the five stages. Can be arbitrarily determined.

  Specifically, when the set value is set to setting 1, for example, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a special symbol with a probability of 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, five rounds Control to the jackpot game state. In other words, when the set value is set to 1, the jackpot probability is relatively high, less than 1/100, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot gaming state is relatively small, which is called a so-called sweet digi. It becomes possible to execute a game with game characteristics.

  When the set value is set to setting 2, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a special symbol having a probability of 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the game with a game characteristic called a general digi-pachi, such that the probability of a big hit is 1/300 and the amount of prize balls paid out in one big hit game state is about 1500 pieces. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the big hitting gaming state ends to the high probability gaming state, and after a predetermined period elapses, the high probability gaming state ends and the low probability gaming state ends. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called ST machine.

  When the set value is set to setting 3, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a 1/300 probability special symbol, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the game with a game characteristic called a general digi-pachi, such that the probability of a big hit is 1/300 and the amount of prize balls paid out in one big hit game state is about 1500 pieces. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability change flag to ON using, for example, a symbol random number. The game state after the state ends is controlled to the high-probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probable loop machine.

  When the set value is set to setting 4, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a 1/300 probability special symbol, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the game with a game characteristic called a general digi-pachi, such that the probability of a big hit is 1/300 and the amount of prize balls paid out in one big hit game state is about 1500 pieces. Can be executed. In this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability change flag to ON using, for example, a symbol random number. The game state after the state ends is controlled to the high-probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. However, an upper limit is set on the number of times the big hit game state and the high probability game state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned “loop number”). When the loop number reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the big hit game state. The second gaming state is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a limiter machine. In the above-described game characteristics, if the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state is continued until the next big hit gaming state is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a so-called ST machine in which the high-probability game state after the end of the big-hit game state is controlled to a low-probability game state after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

  Further, when the set value is set to the setting 5, the main CPU performs, for example, a jackpot determination of a special symbol with a probability of 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, (Approximately 1500). In other words, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the game with a game characteristic called a general digi-pachi, such that the probability of a big hit is 1/300 and the amount of prize balls paid out in one big hit game state is about 1500 pieces. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU always or at a certain probability when the big hit gaming state ends, sets the probability change flag to ON, and when the probability change flag is set to ON, the main CPU changes the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. , Control to a high probability gaming state. In addition, in the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU performs a gaming state shift lottery when performing a special symbol big hit determination, and when determining to shift the gaming state in the gaming state shifting lottery, sets the probability change flag to OFF. Then, control is performed to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, it becomes possible to execute a game with a game property in which a lottery is performed in the high-probability game state to shift to the low-probability game state.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extension example 5, the pachinko gaming machine can change the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine in accordance with the set value, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability, for example. The game can be executed by one unit.

  Note that, in the above, a game with a game property called a so-called sweet digital game can be executed in the setting 1, a game with a game property called a so-called ST machine can be executed in the setting 2, and a game with a game property called a so-called ST machine can be executed in the setting 3. It is possible to execute a game with a game property called a probable variable loop machine, a game with a game property called a limiter machine in setting 4 and a game with a low probability in a high probability game state in setting 5. It is possible to execute a game with a game property in which a lottery is performed for shifting to the probability game state, but it is not essential that all of these game properties can be executed in accordance with the set value. However, it is preferable to be able to switch between a game property called a so-called ST machine and a game property called a so-called probable loop machine in accordance with the set value. The game property called the so-called ST machine and the game property called the so-called probable loop machine are both common in that they can be controlled to the high-probability game state after the end of the jackpot game state. It greatly differs depending on whether the game continues to the next big hit game state or ends halfway. In this way, it is possible to switch between two seemingly similar but substantially different game characteristics so that the manager of the gaming machine can use the pachinko gaming machine with a wider range. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the interest while having fun.

[7-7. Other extension examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and a privilege is given based on the result of the game. That is, a game is performed by a game medium being fired or inserted by the action of a physical player, and not only a form in which the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but also the main control circuit 100 itself, The game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game balls or a game performed without medals. The game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and manages the game medium.

  When managed by the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100, the game medium management device is a device provided in the game machine having a ROM and a RWM (or a RAM), and is an external game device (not shown). The medium handling device is connected to the two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides a game medium lending operation (that is, a game medium necessary for a player to perform a game medium insertion operation). Operation) or a payout of a game medium when the player wins a role related to the payout of the game medium (the relevant role is established) (ie, pays out the game medium to the player and obtains the required game medium). Operation) or an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be used for a game. In addition, the game medium management device displays not only the actual number of game media but also the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the owned game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to the case where the player directly operates, there is a performance that cannot reduce the number of recorded game media, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In such a case, it is desirable that the player has such a capability that the player cannot transmit a signal indicating the number of the recorded game media unless through the external connection terminal plate.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means that can be operated by the player, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal, various other operation means such as a lending operation means, a return operation means, and an external connection terminal board on a game medium handling device side. It may be provided (all are not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, a player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the value which is subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when a further game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media is obtained as a result of the game, and when the game is completed, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, The medium handling device discharges the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange prizes, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on game media recorded on another stand.

  In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device. The processing may be performed in a divided manner. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but also cash or cash equivalent may be discharged, or the storage medium may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. In addition, the game medium handling device may be configured so that a member recording medium of a game hall can be inserted therein, and can be stored in the member recording medium to enable replay at a later date.

  Further, in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking game medium or valuable data communication can be performed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating predetermined operating means (not shown). Is also good. At this time, information that can be known only to the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by an imaging unit provided in the game medium handling device.

  In the above description, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko game machine has been described. It is also possible to provide a game medium of the player.

  As described above, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can reduce the number of components, but also prevent the player from directly touching the game media, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing power consumption by reducing the number of parts. It can be. In addition, it is possible to prevent an illegal act through a game medium or a game medium input port or payout port. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

  In addition, an enclosure-type gaming machine configured to be able to play a game without discharging the game medium to the outside, and a communication cable for the game machine, which relates to consumption of the game medium, data on increase and decrease of the game medium accompanying lending and payout, and the like. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal through the game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

  The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and fires a game ball as a game medium from above the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in a standby state toward the launch pad. Thereby, the game ball moves to the launch pad. A subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of possessed balls is decremented by one. As described above, since the game ball is fired from above to the game area as a game medium, a so-called return ball (a foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launch device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate in a series of paths in the game machine.

  In the enclosed game machine, since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine, no upper plate or lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball is provided. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game balls are not actually at hand of the player, and the game balls do not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In an enclosed gaming machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a possessed ball by lending from a game medium management device. Here, obtaining a possessed ball means that a player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is fired from the launch device, the possessed ball is consumed, and the number of possessed balls decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through the respective winning openings provided in the game area, payouts are made by the number according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of possessed balls increases. In addition, the number of possessed balls increases by lending from the game medium management device. In addition, "consumption, lending, and paying out of game media" indicates that consumption, lending, and paying out of a ball are performed. Further, “increase / decrease in game media” indicates that the number of possessed balls increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. The “data relating to the increase and decrease of game media accompanying the consumption, lending and payout of game media” is data relating to a decrease in possession balls due to the launch of game balls and an increase in possession balls due to lending and payout.

  The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a liquid crystal display device of a touch panel type. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the payout number of the game ball by that is added to the number of possessed balls. Further, when a game ball is fired, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data on the number of possessed balls to the game medium management device according to an operation of the player. The above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located above the gaming machine, and accepts a request for conversion from a game value managed by the game medium management device to a possessed ball (lending a ball) and counting (returning) the possessed ball. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data on the current number of balls held. Here, the "game value" refers to money and bills, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into a possession ball by the game media management device. In the present embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. Also, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like in a game arcade where a gaming system is installed.

  In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. Thus, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. In addition, the detection of the opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed by the backup power supply. As a result, it is possible to prevent improper conduct at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

  The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted / received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. When one of the gaming machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that has received the transmission signal has the same signal as the transmission signal. Is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the verification signal to determine whether they are the same.

  As described above, at the transmission source, the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not falsified by comparing the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determining whether or not these are the same. It can be confirmed that it is being sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as falsification of a transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device.

  Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. A demodulation unit for demodulation may be provided.

  Thereby, even if a transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decode this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

  Further, in the gaming system, the transmission destination, when receiving the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal, It may be transmitted to the transmission source.

  This not only confirms that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also confirms that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal, by comparing the transmitted signal with the confirmation signal. Therefore, the suppression of fraudulent activities can be further strengthened.

[8. Hall menu task]
First, the hole menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. The whole menu task is a task for controlling the whole menu. The hole menu task is performed by the sub CPU 201 at a predetermined cycle, in this embodiment, every 33 msec.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201.

  As shown in FIG. 50, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked (step S301). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a setting operation command (a setting change start command, a setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 when the power is turned on is received.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is being performed, that is, that the sub CPU 201 has received the setting operation command (YES in step S301), the sub CPU 201 executes the hole menu display processing in step S302. The hole menu display process (step S302) is a process of displaying a later-described hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204. The hole menu screen is also displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the processing of step S310 described later is executed. However, the hole menu screen displayed in step S302 and the hole menu screen displayed in step S310 are displayed. There is a difference from the menu screen, which will be described later.

  The image (screen) displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display processing of step S302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example when the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display processing in step S302 is performed. FIGS. 52 and 53 are diagrams illustrating an example of a hole menu screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display processing of step S302 is performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, when the hole menu display processing (step S <b> 302) is executed, a hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. As shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, the hole menu screen includes a hole menu item display area 1610 on the left side of the screen, an operation description area 1620 substantially at the center in the left and right direction below the screen, and a preview arranged substantially at the center of the screen. And a display area 1630.

  Each item of the hole menu is displayed in the hole menu item display area 1610. For convenience, FIGS. 51 to 53 show only time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, and warning display setting as hole menu items. In addition, items such as a notification setting, a power saving setting (power saving mode), a maintenance, a check of an accessory operation, a liquid crystal brightness setting, a liquid crystal check, and a volume adjustment setting may be displayed. However, since step S302 is a process during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, it is not possible to end the display of the hole menu screen and return to the game screen. Therefore, there is no item of the end of the hall menu among the items of the hall menu.

  In the operation explanation area 1620, an image corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, an image corresponding to the main button 662 and the up, down, left, and right select buttons 664a to 664d is displayed. In the hole menu screen, the enabled operation buttons of the operation button group 66 are displayed so as to be distinguished from the disabled operation buttons. For example, in FIGS. 51 to 53, activated operation buttons are displayed in white (the main button 662 and the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b are activated), and the invalidated operation buttons are displayed. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are disabled).

  By operating the activated select button (up / down select button 664a, 664b), the operator can select any of a plurality of hole menu items. In FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the hole menu items surrounded by solid lines are the selected hole menu items. For example, FIG. 51 shows that “time setting” surrounded by a solid line is selected. FIG. 53 shows that “setting change / confirmation history” surrounded by a solid line is selected.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item. However, it is not necessarily limited to the highlight display as long as the operator can easily grasp the selected item. The screen on which the time setting item is selected (see FIGS. 51 and 52) is the initial screen of the hole menu screen.

  In preview display area 1630, a preview screen for an item selected from a plurality of hole menu items is displayed. For example, when the item “time setting” is selected, the time setting screen is preview-displayed (see FIGS. 51 and 52), and when the item “setting change / confirmation history” is selected, A preview of the change / confirmation history screen is displayed (see FIG. 53). However, it is preferable that the setting values are not displayed on the preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. Note that no operation can be performed within the preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is displayed as a preview, the operation to set the time cannot be performed on the time setting screen displayed as the preview, and the time setting displayed as the hole menu item is selected and determined. Can be set on the time setting screen displayed by the user.

  Further, the sub CPU 201 sets the “setting is being changed” or “setting confirmation” in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 together with the hole menu screen, for example, in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to hinder the operation on the hole menu screen. It is in the middle. " At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the speaker 24 to output a sound such as “Setting is being changed” or “Setting is being checked” via the sound control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). Further, the sub CPU 201 executes a control of fully turning on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in white via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9). In this way, the operator is made aware of whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked without obstructing the operation on the hall menu screen.

  Next, returning to FIG. 50, the sub CPU 201 executes a hole menu process in step S303. Details of the hall menu processing (step S303) will be described later.

  After executing the hole menu processing (step S303), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed, that is, a command (initialization command) indicating that the setting change processing is completed or the setting confirmation. It is determined whether or not a command indicating that the processing has been completed (power interruption recovery command) has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S304). If neither the initialization command nor the power-off recovery command has been received (NO in step S304), sub CPU 201 continues to execute the hole menu processing in step S303.

  When transmitting the initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed set value information to the sub CPU 201 at the same timing as the command.

  The changed setting value information need not always be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at a different timing as long as it can be associated with the setting change process.

  When transmitting the power interruption recovery command, the main CPU 101 does not need to transmit the setting value information to the sub CPU 201 because the setting value has not been changed. However, the main CPU 101 may transmit the setting value information to the sub CPU 201 as well. It may be.

  In step S304, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, that is, when the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command or the power-off recovery command from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S304), the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203 is reduced. It is determined whether or not the number is equal to or more than a predetermined number N (step S305). This is because it is desirable to record the history while keeping as much history data as possible by appropriately determining whether to overwrite data or write data in a free area according to the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203. It is intended to prevent a situation where recording cannot be performed sometimes. Note that the predetermined number N can be appropriately set according to the capacity that can be stored in the work RAM 203, but is set to, for example, 500 in the present embodiment.

  If the number of histories of the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is equal to or more than the predetermined number N (YES in step S305), the process proceeds to step S306, where the history information is overwritten (step S306). In the history information overwriting process in step S306, the history stored in the work RAM 203 is overwritten in order from the history stored first (the oldest history information).

  In the overwriting process of the history information in step S306, the history information already stored in the work RAM 203 is overwritten with new history information, so that the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is erased as a result. But it is not limited to this. For example, when a new history information is stored in the work RAM 203 at the time of receiving the initialization command or the power-off recovery command, if there is a possibility that the new history information may exceed a predetermined upper limit, at least a part of the history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be used. May be deleted and the history information may be stored. Even if an initialization command or a power-off recovery command has not been received, if there is a possibility that the upper limit may be exceeded when more history information is stored in the work RAM 203, at least one of the setting history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be exceeded. The copy may be deleted.

  If the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203 is smaller than the predetermined number N (NO in step S305), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S307, and records the history information in a free area of the work RAM 203 (step S307). S307) is executed.

  In this specification, the history information overwriting process in step S306 and the history information recording process in step S307 may be collectively referred to as a history recording process.

  Note that the history information is the time information measured by the RTC 209 and the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed or the setting confirmation information) when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received from the main CPU 101. (Information indicating that the processing has been executed) and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, the time information when the initialization command is received, information indicating that the setting change process has been executed, and the setting value information after the setting change transmitted from the main CPU 101 Is the history information. When the power interruption recovery command is received, the time information when the power interruption recovery command is received, the information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed, and the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 are associated with each other. The attached information is history information. When the power-off recovery command is received, it is not essential that the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 be included in the history information, but the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 is used to execute the above-described setting determination processing. It is preferable that the current setting value information is included in the history information. The browsing history is also included in the history information, and if the setting change / confirmation history has been browsed in the hole menu processing (step S303), whether the browsing history is overwritten as history information in step S306, Alternatively, the browsing history is recorded as history information in a free area of the work RAM 203 in step S307.

  In a normal state, when the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 immediately transmits some command (for example, a power-off reset command, a setting operation command, etc.) after the sub-CPU 201 is started. When a command is not received from the main CPU 101 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after activation, the sub CPU 201 determines that the command is abnormal, and sets the sub control circuit 200 to a game stop state. The display output, audio output, and LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 will be described later.

  It is preferable that the time information, which is one of the pieces of history information to be stored in the work RAM 203, stores not only the date and time information but also the information up to the hour and minute or the information up to the hour and minute and second.

  After executing the processing of step S306 or step S307, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S308.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting has been changed in step S308, that is, whether or not the initialization command has been received in step S304 (step S308). If the setting operation command received in step S301 is a setting change start command, the power interruption recovery command is not received in step S304, and the setting operation command received in step S301 is a setting confirmation start command. Does not receive the initialization command in step S304. In the process of step S308, the sub CPU 201 only needs to be able to determine that the setting change has been performed. Therefore, instead of determining whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, It may be determined that the setting change process has been performed by receiving the value information.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change has been performed (YES in step S308), the sub CPU 201 performs a setting change initialization process (step S309), and proceeds to step S310.

  In step S310, the sub CPU 201 executes a hole menu redisplay process. At this time, the redisplayed hole menu screen is different from the hole menu screen displayed during the setting change or the setting confirmation (the hole menu screen displayed in step S302), and the setting change process ends and the game This is a screen displayed in an executable state (or during the game return processing in step S30). For example, as shown in FIG. 54, one of the hole menu items has an end item of the hole menu displayed. Is done. FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hole menu screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu redisplay processing in step S310 is performed.

  That is, in the hole menu screen displayed during the setting change or the setting confirmation (the hole menu screen displayed in step S302), the display of the hole menu screen cannot be ended by the operator's intention, but the setting change processing is performed. The hole menu screen re-displayed after the completion of the processing (the hole menu screen displayed in step S310) is configured so that the display of the hole menu screen can be ended by the operator's intention. The hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) displayed in step S302 and the hole menu screen (see FIG. 54) displayed in step S310 can be operated by selecting and determining any one of the items. (For example, a function for browsing a setting change / confirmation history screen) and the like.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting has been changed in step S308 (YES in step S308), the sub CPU 201 displays the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the hole menu redisplay processing in step S310. For example, a character such as “Setting has been changed” is displayed in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to hinder the operation on the hall menu screen. Similarly, when a screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) is displayed, similarly, the "change of setting" Is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the speaker 24 to output a sound such as “Setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized” via the sound control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). This allows the operator to know that the setting has been changed (and that the backup clear processing has been executed) without disturbing the operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item. Becomes Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control for turning on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S308 that the setting confirmation has been performed (NO in step S308), that is, if the command received in step S304 is a power interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S309. Without executing the processing of Step S314, the game screen return processing of Step S315 is executed. Therefore, when the setting confirmation processing is completed, the hole menu redisplay processing (step S310) is not executed. Further, no character indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed is not displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Further, no sound indicating that the setting check has been completed is not output. However, the sub CPU 201 controls the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) to be fully lit in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

  By the way, when the processing of step S302 and the processing of step S310 are performed, the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the processing of step S302 is performed. The game cannot be executed when the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, while the game can be executed when the process of step S310 is executed. However, as described above, the character display mode in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not displayed when the setting check is completed) is performed when the processing in step S302 is performed and when the processing in step S310 is performed. ), The manner of sound output from the speaker 24, and the manner of light emission of the LED 25 are significantly different. Therefore, even if the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, the hole menu item) Of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily grasped by the appearance without obstructing the pachinko gaming machine 1 without obstructing the operation of selecting the pachinko machine or the operation of updating the page. It is possible to do.

  After executing the processing of step S310, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S311 and executes the whole menu processing. The hole menu processing in step S311 is basically the same processing as step S303, except that the processing at the time of YES in step S3072 in FIG. 60 described later is different, and this will be described later.

  In step S312, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “end hole menu” is selected on the redisplayed hole menu screen. If it is determined that “End Hall Menu” has been selected (YES in step S312), sub CPU 201 performs a game screen return display process (step S315). In this game screen return display processing, the sub CPU 201 does not operate the effect video or the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the firing handle 32) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when playing a game for a predetermined period of time. Displays the initial video that is displayed when the Then, after executing the game screen return process of step S315, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S316.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S312 that “hole menu end” is not selected (NO in step S312), sub CPU 201 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed (step S313). ). Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 50, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed (YES in step S304), the hole menu redisplay processing (step S310) is performed, and the hole menu processing (step S311) is performed. When the operator has performed any operation, such as when one of the hole menu items is selected, the timer in step S313 determines whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed. This is a process of determining whether or not the operation is not performed. If the operator does not perform any operation for a predetermined time or longer, the sub CPU 201 determines YES in step S313.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any operation (YES in step S313), the sub CPU 201 ends the display of the redisplayed hole menu screen, and performs the game screen return display processing in step S315. Execute.

  If the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without any operation (NO in step S313), the sub CPU 201 determines whether a command for generating an effect control object has been received (step S314). . The command for generating the effect control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed, such as a symbol change start command, a symbol change confirmation (change stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, and a jackpot game. , A round interval command in the big hit game, a big hit game end command, an initialization command, a power interruption return command, and the like. If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S314 that any of the commands for generating these effect control objects has been received, the display of the redisplayed hole menu screen is terminated, and the game screen return display in step S315 is performed. Execute the process. As a result, a game screen according to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. For example, an image irrelevant to the game despite the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being disturbed, such as being displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S314), the process returns to step S311.

  After executing the game screen return display processing (step S315), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S316 and executes the hall menu display prohibition processing. The hole menu display prohibition process is a process for prohibiting the hole menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the hole menu display prohibition processing (step S316) is executed, even if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, the hole menu screen is not displayed, and the power OFF operation is performed to execute the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing. Unless it is performed, the hall menu display process (step S302) cannot be executed.

  As described above, the hole menu screen is a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 while the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is being performed in principle. However, when the setting change processing is executed, even if the setting change processing ends, for example, the operator himself / herself does not select the item of “hole menu end” on the hall menu screen (NO in step S312), Under certain conditions, such as that the operation time has not elapsed for a predetermined time (NO in step S313) and that a command for generating an effect control object has not been received (NO in step S314), the processing of steps S311 to S314 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the hole menu screen is continuously displayed. Therefore, if the operator performs any operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen), the display of the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item is performed. It will be displayed continuously without ending. Thus, even when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed, it is possible to give the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item. In addition, even if the operator forgets to select “end the hole menu”, if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item ends and the game is terminated. Since the screen return process (step S315) is performed, a person without authority (for example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) easily browses confidential information such as a setting change history, a setting confirmation history, and a browsing history. And security can be ensured.

  In the present embodiment, the game screen return process (step S315) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S316) are performed when it is determined in step S314 that a command for generating an effect control object has been received. The game screen is not necessarily limited to this. For example, based on the reception of a command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated, the reception of a specific command that can be received when the execution of the game is started, the game screen The return processing (step S315) and the hall menu display prohibition processing (step S316) may be performed.

  Here, a notification mode when an error occurs, including a backup clear process without a setting change process, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is an example of a screen in which the content of the error is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and (a) a screen indicating that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed; A screen indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred and that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed; (c) the fact that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed and the abnormal start winning error FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a screen after a notification period (for example, 30 seconds) indicating that backup clear processing has been executed in a state where both are occurring.

  As shown in FIG. 55, when a plurality of errors have occurred, the sub CPU 201 displays all the details of the errors that have occurred in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and also operates the voice control circuit 205 ( Sound is output from the speaker 24 via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9), and light emission control of the LED 25 is executed via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

  When the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed and no other error occurs, the sub CPU 201 sets the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 as shown in FIG. 9 is controlled so that a character such as "RAM is cleared" is displayed, and a sound such as "RAM is cleared" is output from the speaker 24. The LED control circuit 206 (FIG. 9) (See FIG. 1) to control the LED 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) to be fully lit in red. Characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are displayed using an area larger than the above-described minimum area (see FIG. 54) in which characters such as "Setting has been changed" are displayed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when performing the setting change processing, the backup clear processing is also always performed (see FIG. 23), and in the hole menu redisplay processing in step S310 performed after the end of the setting change processing, as described above, Although the text "Setting changed" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed, and "Setting changed. RAM is initialized. Is output from the speaker 24 only. On the other hand, when the backup clear processing is executed without the setting change processing, the sub CPU 201 uses the area larger than the above-described minimum area (see FIG. 54) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Control is performed so that characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are displayed, and sound such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 55 (a)). Here, the main purpose of the backup clear processing with the setting change processing is to change the set value (not the backup clear processing), whereas in the backup clear processing without the setting change processing, the main purpose is the backup clear processing. It is considered to be. For this reason, when the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change process is executed, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is notified in a manner that does not hinder the operation of the redisplayed hole menu screen. On the other hand, when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed, the fact that the backup clear processing is executed is notified in a more prominent manner than when the backup clear processing with the setting change processing is executed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the backup clear process from being executed improperly.

  After the backup clear processing is executed, if another error such as a start-up opening prize error has occurred as another error, for example, as shown in FIG. The fact that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed as characters in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. At this time, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed has a higher priority than the start-up opening abnormal winning error, so that the character indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed at the top regardless of the order of occurrence. . In addition, a sound notifying that the backup clear process with a higher priority has been executed is output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 emits light in a manner indicating that the backup clear process has been executed.

  In addition, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) of the execution of the backup clear process has elapsed in a state where both the backup clear process has been executed and the start-up opening abnormal winning error, the backup clear process has been performed. Is deleted from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the character indicating the start opening abnormal winning error is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. You. Further, the sound output from the speaker 24 changes from a sound notifying that the backup clear processing has been executed to a sound notifying that an abnormal start-up winning error has occurred, and the light emission mode of the LED 25 is also changed to the backup clear. The mode changes from a mode indicating that the process has been executed to a mode indicating that an abnormal start-up opening winning error has occurred. In this way, the content of the error that has occurred can be easily grasped.

  In the above description, when it is determined that the setting change processing is being performed or the setting confirmation processing is being performed, that is, when it is determined that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S301), the hole menu display processing (step S302) is executed. However, it is preferable that the backup clearing process is also performed when the backup clearing process without the setting change process is performed. In the backup clear processing without setting change processing, when both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 are performed without turning on the setting key 328 in a state where the power is not turned on. (See FIG. 22). When the backup clear processing is executed, the main CPU 101 transmits an initialization command to the sub CPU 201. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 that receives the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command performs the backup clear processing without setting change processing. Has been executed, and the whole menu display processing (step S302) and the whole menu processing (step S303) can be executed.

[9. Other examples of hole menu tasks]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission process (step S17) of the power-on process (see FIG. 20). (See step S1730 in FIG. 21) For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (in the present embodiment, within the range of “0” to “5”), it is determined that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal ( (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned off (see step S1760), and the game cannot be executed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is replaced illegally, there is a high possibility that the work area check processing of the RAM 103 (step S1720) is not executed. Further, in the case where the set value that is set by the input of the illegal signal is changed, there is a possibility that the set value data is in the range of “0” to “5”. Therefore, similarly to the above-described setting determination processing executed during the execution of the game, when the work area check processing is not executed in step S1720, or when the setting value is incorrectly changed, the setting value may not be changed. Assuming that the data is in the range of “0” to “5” (for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S1730), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the set value information is appropriate (steps 317 and 317). Step S318) may be executed. FIG. 56 shows the whole menu task in this case. FIG. 56 is another example of the hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart in the case where the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination processing for determining whether the setting value information is appropriate. Hereinafter, another example of the hole menu task will be described. However, description of the processing common to FIG. 50 will be omitted, and only the setting determination processing will be described.

  First, even when the main CPU 101 transmits a power interruption return command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed, the main CPU 101 stores the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current setting value used for the progress of the game. Transmit to sub CPU201.

  On the other hand, upon receiving the power interruption recovery command, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), and proceeds to step S317. In this step S317, the sub CPU 201 executes a set value check process. This set value check processing (step S317) includes the current set value information (the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 before the power interruption and stored in the work RAM 203) and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 (the step S317). This is a process for confirming the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the power interruption. If it is determined in step S308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), the processing in steps S309 to S314 is not performed.

  After confirming the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the set value check process (step S317), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the set value is appropriate, that is, whether the set value is appropriate. (Step S318). At this time, if the current setting value information matches the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101, it is determined that the current setting value information is appropriate (YES in step S318), and the process proceeds to step S315. The processing after step S315 is as described above.

  On the other hand, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 do not match, it is determined that the set value information is inappropriate (NO in step S318), the process proceeds to step S319, and the sub CPU 201 Execute the process.

  The above-described setting value abnormality process is a process of displaying an image notifying that the setting value is abnormal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the setting value abnormality process (step S319), a sound for notifying that the set value is abnormal is output instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image for notifying that the set value is abnormal. The processing may be executed.

  As described above, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is the power interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination processing (the processing of steps 317 and S318), and When it is determined that the set value is not appropriate (NO in step S318), by executing the setting value abnormality process (step S319), it is possible to notify the gaming machine manager that the set value is not appropriate.

  Note that the above-described setting determination processing (the processing in steps S317 and S318) is performed when the setting confirmation processing ends, but without performing either the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, the setting change processing is performed. (For example, when the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328 in a state where the power is not turned on) or the power supply is simply turned off. It is also preferable to execute the process even when only is input. Unless the setting change process is performed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the setting value information received before the power failure matches the setting value information received after the power failure, thereby determining whether the setting value information is appropriate. Can be determined.

[10. Hall menu processing]
Next, the hole menu processing (step S303) in the hole menu task (see FIGS. 50 and 56) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the hole menu process executed by the sub CPU 201.

  First, the sub CPU 201 selects a hole menu item to be used for confirming various information / settings or changing various settings based on the operation of the select button 664 and / or the main button 662 by the operator. A selection process is performed (step S3001). In the hole menu selection processing in FIG. 57, the hole menu items include time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, A description will be given of the case of the accessory operation check, the liquid crystal brightness setting, and the volume adjustment setting, but the hole menu items are not limited to these as described above.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “time setting” (step S3002). If it is determined in step S3002 that the selected hole menu is “time setting” (YES in step S3002), sub CPU 201 performs time setting processing (step S3003). In this time setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time.

  When determining that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “time setting” (NO in step S3002), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “prize ball information”. (Step S3004). When determining that the selected hole menu is “prize ball information” (YES in step S3004), sub CPU 201 performs prize ball information processing (step S3005). In the prize ball information processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a prize ball information screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check the prize ball information. Prize ball information includes, for example, prize ball number information paid out today, difference information between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, the number of prize balls per day paid out in the past several days Information, difference information (every day) between the number of prize balls paid out in the past several days and the number of prize balls fired, and the like.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “prize ball information” (NO in step S3004), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “setting change / confirmation history”. It is determined (step S3006). When determining that the selected hole menu is “setting change / confirmation history” (YES in step S3006), sub CPU 201 performs a setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007). In this setting change / confirmation history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a later-described setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61 described later) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the operator confirms the setting. It is possible to check the history, change history, and browsing history.

  When the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been operated while the select button 664 has been operated and “setting change / confirmation history” has been selected, the sub CPU 201 displays the setting in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61 described later) is displayed, and the operator can change the setting (set value), check the setting (set value), check the browsing history, and check the set (set value). It is possible to confirm the changed settings (set values). The details of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “setting change / confirmation history” (NO in step S3006), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “error information history”. It is determined (step S3008). When determining that the selected hole menu is “error information history” (YES in step S3008), sub CPU 201 performs error information history processing (step S3009). In the error information history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays an error information history screen (see, for example, FIG. 58) on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check and change the error information history. I do.

  The error history displayed in the error information history processing is, for example, information stored in the work RAM 203 as the error history when the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the sub CPU 201 may determine that the backup is defective when the abnormal command is received from the main CPU 101, or without transmitting the abnormal command from the main CPU 101, and the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9). ) May start when a normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the main CPU 101 is started.

  As shown in FIG. 58, an error information history table is arranged substantially at the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time column in which the date and time when the error code was recorded is displayed, and a release date and time column in which the date and time at which the error was released is displayed. Further, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed at the lower left of the error information history screen. For example, it is shown that the cursor (not shown) can be moved up, down, left and right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and it can be determined by operating the main button 662. It indicates that it can be done.

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “error information history” (NO in step S3008), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “monitoring history” ( Step S3010). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is “monitoring history” (YES in step S3010), sub CPU 201 performs a monitoring history process (step S3011). In this monitoring history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check the monitoring history.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “monitoring history” (NO in step S3010), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “warning display setting” ( Step S3012). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is “warning display setting” (YES in step S3012), sub CPU 201 performs a warning display setting process (step S3013). In the warning display setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the warning display setting.

  When determining that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “warning display setting” (NO in step S3012), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “notification setting” (step S3001). Step S3014). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is “notification setting” (YES in step S3014), sub CPU 201 performs a notification setting process (step S3015). In this notification setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and enables the operator to confirm and change the notification settings.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “notification setting” (NO in step S3014), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is in “power saving mode” ( Step S3016). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is “power saving mode” (YES in step S3016), sub CPU 201 performs power saving mode processing (step S3017). In the power saving mode processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the setting of the power saving mode. .

  When determining that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “power saving mode” (NO in step S3016), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “maintenance” (step S3001). S3018). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “maintenance” (YES in step S3018), sub CPU 201 performs a maintenance process (step S3019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not “maintenance” (NO in step S3018), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “main character operation check” (step S3001). Step S3020). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “check of the operation of the accessory” (YES in step S3020), the sub CPU 201 performs an operation check of the accessory (step S3021). In the accessory operation confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 displays a accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the operation of the accessory.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “main character operation check” (NO in step S3020), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “liquid crystal brightness setting”. (Step S3022). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “liquid crystal brightness setting” (YES in step S3022), sub CPU 201 performs a liquid crystal brightness setting process (step S3023). In this liquid crystal luminance setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a liquid crystal luminance setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the luminance setting of the liquid crystal display device 16. And

  When determining that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “liquid crystal brightness setting” (NO in step S3022), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “volume adjustment setting”. (Step S3024). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is “volume adjustment setting” (YES in step S3024), sub CPU 201 performs volume adjustment setting processing (step S3025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the liquid crystal display device 16 and allows the operator to check and change the volume of the sound output from the speaker 24. And

  The hall menu selected in step S3003, step S3005, step S3007, step S3009, step S3011, step S3013, step S3015, step S3017, step S3019, step S3021, step S3023, step S3025, and step S3001 is "volume". If it is determined that it is not “adjustment setting” (NO in step S3024), sub CPU 201 ends the whole menu process, and returns the process to step S304 of the whole menu task (see FIG. 50).

[11. Various device aspects when changing settings and confirming settings]
The modes and the like of various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, and the performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change and setting confirmation are as described above, but are summarized below for easy understanding. explain.

  First, the setting change will be described in the order in which various operations are performed. In a power OFF state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are off. To start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

  Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the main CPU 101 controls to the setting change state and transmits a setting operation command (setting change start command). . The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has been controlled (the setting change state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 causes the display control circuit 204 to display the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and to display a character such as “Setting is being changed”. Is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a sound such as “Setting is being changed” from the speaker 24 by the sound control circuit 205, and turns on all the LEDs 25 in white by the LED control circuit 206. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a backup clear process for clearing the work area of the main RAM 103. The set value that is set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is updated. However, at this stage, the set values have not been determined yet. The performance display monitor 334 displays the updated set value. In addition, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a hole menu screen is displayed, and characters such as "Setting is being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, a sound such as "Setting is being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is continuously turned on in white. In the present embodiment, even if the set value is updated, it is stored only in the register and not stored in the main RAM 103 until it is determined. The information may be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the setting value is updated by operating another operation unit (for example, the backup clear switch 330). You may do so.

  Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and transmits an initialization command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has ended based on receiving the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting change state ends, the game can be executed. However, even if the setting change state ends, unless the execution of the game is started (for example, unless a command for generating an effect control object is received), the sub CPU 201 sets the display control circuit for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). A hole menu screen or a screen of a selected hole menu item (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 204 by the display unit 204, and characters such as "Setting has been changed" are displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the display area of the display device 16. However, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a sound such as “Setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized.” From the speaker 24 by the sound control circuit 205 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and outputs the LED. The control circuit 206 turns on all the LEDs 25 in red. Such display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, output from the speaker 24, and full lighting of the LED 25 in red continue as long as any operation is performed on the hole menu screen or the selected hole menu item screen. The process ends when the no-operation period continues for a predetermined period or when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above description, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed, but the sub CPU 201 additionally displays the message “RAM has been cleared” in addition to the message “Setting has been changed”. You may make it.

  As described above, even if the setting change state is completed, a character display such as "Setting changed", a sound output such as "Setting changed. RAM is initialized." By performing the lighting for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to suppress unauthorized actions such as browsing a setting change / confirmation history screen or the like by an unauthorized third party. Become. Further, since at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the time when the setting change state ends, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

  The above is the aspect of various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, and the performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change.

  Next, the setting confirmation will be described in the order in which various operations are performed. In a power OFF state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are off. To start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, unless the power is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

  Next, when the power switch 35 is turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned ON), the main CPU 101 controls the setting to the setting check state, and sets the setting operation command (setting check start command). Send The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting check state has been controlled (the setting check state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting check start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 causes the display control circuit 204 to display a hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and to display a message such as "Setting is being confirmed." Display characters. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a sound such as “Setting is being confirmed” from the speaker 24 by the sound control circuit 205, and turns on all the LEDs 25 in white by the LED control circuit 206. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting confirmation security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. The set value that is set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and transmits a power-off recovery command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state has been completed based on the reception of the power interruption recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game can be executed. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes a game screen return display process (step S316) based on receiving the power interruption return command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the sub CPU 201 does not display a character indicating that the setting check has been completed and does not output a sound indicating that the setting check has been completed. However, the sub CPU 201 fully lights the LED 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and ends the red lighting of the LED 25 when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

  In this way, even if the setting confirmation state has been completed, by turning on the LED 25 in red all the way for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), an unauthorized operation such as browsing a setting change / confirmation history screen or the like can be performed by the authority. Can be suppressed by a third party who does not have the above. Further, at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the time when the setting change state ends, so that it can be easily grasped from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

  Note that, as described above, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no command received from the main CPU 101 even if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after activation, the sub CPU 201 is in the game stopped state. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, the display control circuit 204 and the voice control circuit 205 output a display and a voice saying “Please determine the setting value”, and the LED control circuit 206 outputs the LED 25 (for example, FIG. 1) is set to all white blinking. This state is again controlled by the main CPU 101 to the setting change state, and continues until the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command based on the end of the setting change state.

  The above is the aspect of various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, and the performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting confirmation.

[12. Setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007) in the hall menu processing (see step S303 in FIG. 50) will be described. In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the setting change / confirmation history information (described later) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. (A generic term for “setting change history information” and “setting confirmation history information”). Before describing the setting change / confirmation history processing, setting change, setting confirmation, and browsing will be described first.

  In the present embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change processing as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328 and turning on the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting change processing is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, for example, by pressing the setting switch 332, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased in the range of “1” to “6”. When operated to be OFF, one of the plurality of set values used for the progress of the game is determined, and the setting change process ends.

  As described above, after executing the setting change process, the main CPU 101 sets an initialization command indicating that the setting change process has ended, and the set value information after the change, so that the setting change history can be displayed. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing has been completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed), the setting value information indicating the setting value after the setting change, Further, the work RAM 203 stores the date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command is received, as setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, information displayed in the columns of “No. 3” and “No. 4” in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. I do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when confirming the setting value, the setting confirmation process needs to be executed by the main CPU 101 as described above. This setting confirmation process is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting confirmation process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off, the setting confirmation processing ends. It should be noted that the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off and then the setting key switch signal is operated again to be turned on. As you did.

  In addition, as described above, the main CPU 101 executes the setting confirmation processing, and then transmits a power interruption recovery command to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended, so that the setting confirmation history can be displayed. I do. At this time, although the set value has not been changed, the set value information is also transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 201 in order to execute the above-described setting determination processing (the processing of steps S317 and S318, see FIG. 56). Preferably.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the power interruption recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed) and the date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209 are received. That is, the date and time data when the power-off recovery command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the column of “No. 1” in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. As shown in the column of “No. 1” in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61, the setting value information is associated with information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed and time information. May also be displayed together.

  The work RAM 203 according to the present embodiment constitutes a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state. Therefore, even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operator or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by a power failure or the like, the storage of the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is retained.

  In the present embodiment, browsing means that the main button 662 is pressed in a state in which “setting change / confirmation history” is highlighted on the hole menu screen (see FIGS. 52 and 53), and the work RAM 203 is displayed. This means that a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61 described later) in which the stored setting change / confirmation history information is displayed is displayed.

  The sub CPU 201 executes the following processing in order to display the browsing history (browsing history). That is, when the setting change processing is being performed or the setting confirmation processing is being performed (YES in step S301), the sub CPU 201 displays the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (step S301). Then, when “setting change / confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), sub CPU 201 highlights “setting change / confirmation history” (see FIG. 53). ). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 and displays the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61 described later) on the liquid crystal display. While being displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the operation type information indicating that the browsing has been performed (information indicating that the browsing has been performed), and the date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, when the browsing has been performed ( The date and time data (when the main button 662 is pressed) is stored in the work RAM 203 in association with the date and time data. This is the process when the browsing history is recorded in the above-described history recording process (steps S306 and S307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in the work RAM 203 when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 regardless of whether the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is being performed. When storing the browsing history in the work RAM 203, the sub CPU 201 integrates the browsing history with the setting change / confirmation history information already stored, for example, and stores it in the work RAM 203. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, information displayed in the columns of “No. 2” and “No. 5” in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG.

  Here, the history recording processing of step S306 and step S307 is summarized as follows. First, in the hall menu process (step S303), "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process. The sub CPU 201 performs both the setting change history and the browsing history. In the hall menu process (step S303), “setting change / confirmation history” is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is a power-off reset command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. At this time, the sub CPU 201 performs both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history. If “setting change / confirmation history” is not selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006), and if the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, the sub CPU 201 Of the setting change history and the browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, and only the setting change history is performed. Further, if “setting change / confirmation history” is not selected and determined in the hall menu processing (step S303) (NO in step S3006), and if the command received in step S304 is a power interruption recovery command, the sub CPU 201 Of the setting check history and the browsing history, only the setting check history is performed without performing the browsing history. Therefore, in the history recording processing in steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power-off recovery command, the “setting change / confirmation” is performed in the hole menu processing (step S303). When "History" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed.

  In addition, other than during the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above, the hole menu display processing (step S302) and the hole menu processing (step S302) are performed. In the case where step S303) is performed, by making the above-mentioned browsing record be performed, it is also possible to monitor the clerk of the game store clerk. That is, in order to perform the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, a dedicated key (a key is cut out only at a position corresponding to the setting key 328 and a key managed by a gaming machine manager) is required. For example, a general store clerk who does not have access can not browse, but for backup clear processing without setting change processing, general store clerks or unauthorized players who do not have a dedicated key perform browsing by performing backup processing It is possible to do. Therefore, when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed, the browsing record is also performed by the sub CPU 201, so that the security camera corresponding to the time (the security camera normally installed in the store) It is possible to identify the person who browsed by collating with the video such as.

  In the history record processing of steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change processing or a power interruption reset command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing. If "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the browsing record is performed as described above, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sub CPU 201 selects and determines “setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu processing (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and when the command received in step S304 is a power interruption recovery command, Both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are performed, but “setting change / confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hole menu processing (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is initialized. When the command is a command, only the setting change history of the setting change history and the browsing history may be recorded, and the browsing history may not be recorded. As a result, the number of times the browsing history is recorded can be minimized, and it is possible to prevent the browsing history from unnecessarily increasing and making it difficult to detect fraud. To explain this, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud with a setting change history that is not stored in the gaming machine manager's memory. Regarding the accompanying fraud, it is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the setting. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether or not the browsing is performed. When the setting is confirmed, the browsing history is displayed if the browsing is performed (at least the setting value information is browsed). It is intended to be recorded. This is because it is considered that the person who performs the injustice mainly views after confirming the setting, rather than browses after changing the setting. That is, in the same time period, if there is no browsing history and there is only a setting check history, the possibility of fraud is low, but if both the setting check history and the browsing history have a large number of histories, there is a possibility of fraud. . Regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power-off recovery command, if “setting change / confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hole menu processing (step S303) (step S303). (YES in S3006), the setting change history or both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are recorded, and when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the setting confirmation process is performed. If the operation type information indicates that the setting has been executed, the browsing history may be displayed together, and if the operation type information indicates that the setting change process has been executed, the browsing history may not be displayed.

  In the history record processing of steps S306 and S307, browsing was performed a plurality of times from the start of the hall menu display processing of step S302 to the execution of the game screen return display processing of step S315. However, the browsing record is executed only once in step S306 or step S307, which is executed when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing ends. For example, if "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 53) (YES in step S3046), a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61) is displayed. However, if "return" is selected and determined on the setting change / confirmation history screen, the screen returns to the hole menu screen again. Then, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on this hole menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed again. As described above, even if the setting change / confirmation history screen is browsed a plurality of times during steps S302 to S315, the browsing record is made once.

  The reason why it is preferable to limit the number of browsing records performed from step S302 to step S315 to one is as follows. That is, for example, a person who has performed setting change, setting confirmation, or browsing for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase the number of browsing records, increase the number of histories, and perform an action that makes it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an action is performed, even if the setting change, the setting confirmation, or the browsing is performed a plurality of times during steps S301 to S312, the history is recorded only once, Is turned off once so that the history is not recorded unless it is turned on again, it is possible to prevent these histories from increasing unnecessarily.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the setting change processing is completed, the hole menu redisplay processing (step S310) is executed, and after the setting confirmation processing, the hole menu redisplay processing is not executed and the game is not executed. The screen return process (step S315) is executed. For example, even after the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed by turning off the setting key 328, if the setting key 328 is turned on again, the hole menu is displayed. In the case where the screen is displayed, the whole menu screen can be displayed again after returning to the game screen. In this case, each time the user selects and determines “setting change / confirmation history” on the redisplayed hole menu screen or repeatedly performs the ON / OFF operation of the setting key 328, the user browses the page. Even if there is, it is preferable to make the browsing record only once.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has operation means such as a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, and a backup clear switch 330, in addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664. ing. Among them, the main button 662, the select button 664, and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player. The power switch 35, the volume switch 108, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, and the backup clear switch 330 Is an operation unit that cannot be operated by a player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a gaming machine manager.

  In this embodiment, the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61) in which the setting value can be confirmed is stored as the browsing history, but the setting change in which the setting value is not displayed is stored. A configuration in which the confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 66 described later) is displayed may be stored as the browsing history.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 59 and 60 and FIGS. 61 to 65, the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by sub CPU 201 and the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed. A description will be given in comparison with a setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 60 is an example of a setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of an initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen (a screen when the screen is shifted to the setting change / confirmation history screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example when “Page” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an example when “clear” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared on the setting change / confirmation history screen.

  When “setting change / confirmation history” is selected in the hole menu process (see FIG. 57) (YES in step S3006 in FIG. 57), the sub CPU 201 performs a setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S3051). At this time, an initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, "Return" is highlighted.

  The setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 includes a setting change / confirmation history display area 1640, an operation explanation area 1650, a first selection area 1660a, And a second selection area 1660b. FIG. 61 shows an example in which “Page” is displayed in the first selection area 1660a, and “Clear” and “Return” are displayed in the second selection area 1660b.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 61, in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640, time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list in association with each other. The date and time column displays the date and time when setting change, setting confirmation, and browsing were performed. The operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed in the operation type column. In the setting value column, when the setting is changed, the changed setting value is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the setting value at that time is displayed. In the column of the operation type, "change" is simply displayed when the setting is changed, and "confirmation" is simply displayed when the setting is confirmed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the time information and the operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. . Further, when the operation type is the setting change, the set value after the setting is displayed, and when the operation is the setting confirmation, the set value at that time is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type, respectively.

  After executing the setting change / confirmation history screen display processing (step S3051), the sub CPU 201 executes a timekeeping process (step S3052). This timekeeping process is a process of starting timekeeping of a timer built in the sub CPU 201. Here, the counting of the timer is started after the setting change / confirmation history screen display processing (step S3051) is executed (the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (FIG. 61). This is for the purpose of displaying the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 52) when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the display (see).

  The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3053 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3053), the process proceeds to step S3071 to be described later, and it is determined whether or not “return” is determined on the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, "Return" is highlighted (selected) as described above, so if the main button 662 is pressed without operating the select button 664, "Return" is determined. Is done.

  When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3053), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3054). For example, when the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which “return” is highlighted, the highlight display moves from “return” to “Page” ( See FIG. 62).

  After highlighting the selected item (step S3054), the sub CPU 201 executes a timing process (step S3055). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3052, and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timer is that no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3054). This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 52) is displayed when not performed.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “Page” is determined in step S3056. When the operator presses the main button 662 while “Page” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 sets “ Page "is determined.

  When determining that “Page” has been determined (YES in step S3056), sub CPU 201 executes a page update screen display process (step S3057). When the page update screen display processing is executed, a page update screen (see FIG. 63) in the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the page update screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, images imitating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, and “next page” and “previous page” are displayed on the left and right of the notation “Page”. Thus, the operator understands that the operation of the left select button 664c updates the setting change / confirmation history screen to the previous page, and the operation of the lower select button 664d updates the setting change / confirmation history screen to the next page. can do. When the left select button 664c is operated when the first page of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, the last page is displayed. When the right select button 664d is operated when the last page is displayed, one page is displayed. If the display is cyclically displayed so that the eyes are displayed, convenience can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined to be “Page” (NO in step S3056), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3065 to be described later, and determines whether or not “clear” is determined in the setting change / confirmation history screen.

  After executing the page update screen display process (step 3057), the sub CPU 201 executes a time counting process (step S3058). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3055, and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The timing of the timer is cleared and the timing is started again after the page update screen display processing (step S3057) is executed (after the page update screen (see FIG. 63) in the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed). This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

  The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3059 whether a page update operation has been performed. If the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3059), the process moves to step S3062 described later.

  When determining that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3059), sub CPU 201 executes a page update process (step S3060). When the left / right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 63) in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 determines that the page update processing has been performed. Then, the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is updated and displayed on the next page or the previous page. The setting change / confirmation history screen when updated to the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is omitted.

  In this embodiment, when the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 63) in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 sets the page. Although the updating process is performed, the operation for performing the page updating process is not limited to this. For example, by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b, any one of “No. 1” to “No. 5” on the setting change / confirmation history screen can be selected, and the lower select button 664b is operated. In addition, the page updating process may be performed when it is determined that the current line is the last line. The same applies to a page update process in a modification of the setting change / confirmation history process described later.

  After executing the page update process (Step 3060), the sub CPU 201 executes a time counting process (Step S3061). This timekeeping process is a process for clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3058 and again starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. The timing of the timer is cleared and the timing is started again after the page update processing (step S3060) is executed (after the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is displayed), and then the predetermined time ( This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within 30 seconds.

  After executing the time counting process in step S3061, the sub CPU 201 returns to step S3059 and determines whether a page update operation has been performed.

  The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3062 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 has not been operated (NO in step S3062), the flow shifts to step S3072 to be described later. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3072 instead of step S3071 because “Return” is highlighted (selected) on the page update screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, as in the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. It is not.

  When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3062), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 63), the highlight display moves from “Page” to “clear” (see FIG. 64).

  After highlighting the selected item (step S3063), the sub CPU 201 executes a timing process (step S3064). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3061, and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timer is that no processing was performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item was highlighted on the setting change / confirmation history screen. Sometimes, a hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 52) is displayed.

  After executing the time counting process in step S3064, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3065 and determines whether or not “clear” has been determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 while “clear” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 sets “ It is determined that "clear" has been determined.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” has been determined (YES in step S3065), the sub CPU 201 executes a setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066). This setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process for erasing all data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is erased (see FIG. 65). When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process of step S3065 is executed, the item of “return” is highlighted.

  In the above-described setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203 are deleted. The present invention is not limited to erasing data, and only some data may be erased. As an aspect of erasing a part of the data, for example, as shown in FIG. 1 to No. 5, time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific No. 5, a setting change / confirmation history screen is deleted for each page, a plurality of operation types (setting change , Setting confirmation, and browsing), a mode in which date and time (time) information, operation type information, and set value information corresponding to a specific operation type are erased, and time (date and time) information, operation type information, and set value information A mode in which only specific information (for example, setting value information) is deleted can be considered.

  Further, it is preferable that the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066) be executed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition. For example, in a state where “clear” is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen, for example, input of a password may be used as a condition for enabling pressing of the main button 662. In this case, if the operator presses the main button 662 without inputting the password, a screen requesting the password is displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing is executed only when the correct password is input. You can do so. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history from being accidentally cleared. Further, for example, it is considered that a person who has performed setting change processing or browsing for the purpose of fraud may erase the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history in order to hide his / her own fraud. Therefore, for example, by allowing only a specific person such as a person who knows the password to execute the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process, it is possible to suppress the setting change process and the browsing for unauthorized use. It becomes possible.

  After executing the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), the sub CPU 201 executes a time counting process (step S3067). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3064, and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timer is that the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640 is not changed after the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066) is executed. This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all the data is erased.

  The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3068 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 has not been operated (NO in step S3068), the flow shifts to step S3072 to be described later. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3071 instead of step S3072 because "return" is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen where each history data is cleared unless the select button 664 is operated. . Therefore, if “return” is not highlighted on the data clear screen where each history data is cleared, the process proceeds to step S3072.

  When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3068), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3069).

  After highlighting the selected item (step S3069), the sub CPU 201 executes a timing process (step S3070). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3067, and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The reason for clearing the timer and restarting the timer is that no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3069). This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 52) is displayed when not performed.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “return” has been determined in step S3071. When the operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “return” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 sets “ It is determined that "return" has been determined.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” has been determined (YES in step S3071), it executes a hole menu screen display process (step S3073), and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. This hole menu screen display processing is processing for displaying an initial screen (see FIG. 52) of the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of the setting change / confirmation history screen.

  If “return” is not determined in step S3071 (NO in step S3071), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3072).

  When the sub CPU 201 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed in step S3072 (YES in step S3072), the sub CPU 201 shifts to step S3073, ends the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and exits the hole menu. An initial screen (see FIG. 52) is displayed. In other words, even if the “return” item is not selected and determined by the operator, if the no-operation period continues for a predetermined period, the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen ends, and the initial screen of the hole menu screen is displayed. The Rukoto.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (NO in step S3072), sub CPU 201 returns to step S3053 and continues the processing in step S3053 and subsequent steps.

  As described above, in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting change / confirmation history screen ends when a predetermined time elapses without performing any operation. Then, a hole menu screen is displayed. However, on the hole menu screen, even if there is no operation, the sub CPU 201 controls the display of the hole menu screen to be continued without ending the hole menu screen as long as the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. In this case, the item of the end of the hole menu is not displayed on the hole menu screen.

  When it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072), the process that proceeds to step S3073 is performed by the hole menu process (ie, during setting change or step S303) described above in step S303 (see FIGS. 50 and 56). In the hole menu process of step S311 (see FIGS. 50 and 56) (that is, after the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed), a different process is executed (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation in the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007) in the hole menu processing in step S311 (the predetermined time has elapsed in step S3072 in the hole menu processing in step S311 (step S3072) Is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S315 (see FIGS. 50 and 56), ends the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen, and returns to the game screen return display processing (step S315) and the hall. A menu display prohibition process (step S316) is executed. That is, in the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, only the screen returns to the hole menu screen (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the re-displayed hole menu screen after the setting change processing is completed, if the inactivity time continues for a predetermined time, the setting change / confirmation history screen is viewed again You can't do that.

  Also, when it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S3072), the process returns to step S3053 also includes the hole menu process (that is, the setting in step S303 (see FIGS. 50 and 56)). During the change or during the setting confirmation), a different process is executed (not shown) in the hole menu processing (that is, after the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed) in step S311 (see FIGS. 50 and 56). Specifically, even if the no-operation period has not reached the predetermined period in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process of step S311 (NO in step S3072), for example, an effect control object is generated. Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition such as when it is determined that a command has been received, a game screen return process (step S315) and a hole menu display prohibition process (step S316) are executed. That is, in the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, only the screen returns to the hole menu screen (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed via the re-displayed hole menu screen after the setting change processing is completed, the setting change / confirmation history is displayed again even if the inactivity time has not reached the predetermined time. You will not be able to browse the screen. In other words, in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed via the hole menu screen redisplayed after the setting change processing is completed, the no-operation period is not continued for a predetermined period, and the predetermined end condition Unless is established, the processing of steps S3053 to S3072 is repeatedly executed.

  As described above, when the setting change processing is executed, even if the setting change processing is completed, the operator has a certain time for browsing the confidential information such as the history of the setting change and the setting confirmation, and has a certain time ( If no operation is performed for, for example, 30 seconds, the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen ends, and the game screen return processing (step S315) and the hole menu prohibition processing (step S316) are executed. (For example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) cannot easily view confidential information such as a setting change history, a setting confirmation history, and a browsing history, so that security can be ensured.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 61, regardless of the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing), time information, operation type information, and setting value A list screen showing all the information is displayed. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 61) in which the time information and the set value information when the setting is changed is displayed, and the time information and the set value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed. 61 (for example, No. 3 and No. 4 in FIG. 61), and third information in which time information and set value information at the time of browsing are displayed (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 61). 2, No. 5) are displayed in a list. However, an operator (for example, a gaming machine administrator) may want to narrow down a target to specific operation type information and display it. Therefore, a screen (for example, see FIG. 61) in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list, the first information, the second information, and the third information Among them, it is preferable that the narrowed-down screen narrowed down to only specific information can be selectively displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the operator's intention. This makes it possible to enhance the convenience for the operator. In particular, the first information is not only fraud-detected, but also information such as how many days the business has been operated based on the set value. Since the above-described narrowing-down screen only needs to be able to display a target by narrowing down the target to specific operation type information, information irrelevant to the operation type (for example, current time information or the like) may be displayed.

[13. Another example of the display screen displayed in the setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. However, since the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, in this other example, the screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described. A description of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the CPU 201 will be omitted.

  FIG. 66 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen. FIG. 67 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, showing an example when “setting display” is selected. FIG. 68 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when a new set value is displayed. FIG. 69 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 70 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which a page can be updated.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 66, the setting change / confirmation history screen has a setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, an operation explanation area 1680, a first selection area 1690a, and a second selection area 1690b.

  In the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 66, although the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the confirmation setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, the setting value information is not displayed. That is, the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 66 is a screen on which only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed. Note that the date and time when the time information is displayed displays the date and time when the setting change / setting confirmation / browsing is performed, and the operation type column where the operation type information is displayed includes the operation type (setting change, Settings confirmation and browsing) are displayed.

  In addition, in the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, “setting display” is displayed in the second selection area 1690b in addition to “clear” and “return”. In addition, on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history, “return” is selectively displayed (highlighted). In this other example, the item to be highlighted can be selected by operating the select button 664.

  When the user operates the select button 664 to select “setting display”, “setting display” is highlighted (see FIG. 67). When the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been pressed while “setting display” is selected (highlighted), the time information and the operation type information are displayed, but the setting value information is not displayed. Instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen that is not displayed, a setting change / confirmation history screen (list screen) in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list is displayed (see FIG. 68). ). As described above, in this other example, although the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, by selecting and determining “setting display”, the setting value is associated with the date and time and the operation type. The newly set values are displayed in a list. When a setting change / confirmation history screen displaying time information, operation type information, and set value information is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. "Back" is highlighted.

  On the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 68) in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed, by operating the select button 664 and selecting “Page”, “Page” is highlighted. (See FIG. 69). When the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been pressed while “Page” is selected (highlighted), the sub CPU 201 executes a page update process. When this page update process is executed, a page update screen (see FIG. 70) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. By operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d on the page update screen, the page can be updated to the next page or the previous page.

  In addition, when “Page” is selected and the main button 662 is pressed on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 66) in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the set value information is not displayed. Also, the page update process is executed by the sub CPU 201. However, when this page update process is executed, the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the set value information is not displayed. Is displayed. By operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d on the page update screen, the page can be updated to the next page or the previous page of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the set value is not displayed. However, the page update process may not be executed on the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the set value information is not displayed.

  In this other example, for example, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. 66, and the time information and the operation type information are displayed as shown in FIG. And a screen on which set value information is displayed in a list can be selectively displayed. However, the screen of FIG. 66 shows one or two of time information, operation type information, and set value information. Any screen may be used as long as only information is displayed.

  Further, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed in a list can be viewed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition (for example, a person who has input an appropriate password). This may be done, but this will be described later.

  FIG. 71 shows a setting change / confirmation history screen on which a set value can be confirmed on the hole menu screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation procedure until it is displayed. As shown in FIG. 71, as a first procedure for browsing the setting change / confirmation history information, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs a hole menu when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key switch 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and turned in the opposite direction (return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It can be configured.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation that is performed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is performed, but is not limited thereto. The operation may be performed when at least one of the change processing and the setting confirmation processing is performed. The same applies to any of the modifications described below.

  As a second procedure, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects and determines “setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu on the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53), the pachinko gaming machine 1 obtains “setting change / confirmation history”. Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history screen preview including the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 53) is displayed (the set values are not displayed).

  As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 operates the main button 662 in a state where “setting change / confirmation history” is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIG. 53) displayed in the second procedure. When pressed, a setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this setting change / confirmation history screen, date and time data, operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, and browsing) and set value are associated with each other.

  Therefore, a person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (an authorized person) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) displayed through the first to third procedures. By looking at the confirmation history, it is possible to confirm at a glance each setting change of the set value that regulates the payout rate, confirmation of the setting change, and history of each of the setting change and the viewing of the confirmation and the corresponding set value. . The person having the authority is a person who has been given authority for setting change, confirmation of setting change, and the like, and means a store manager of the hall. Hereinafter, "authorized person" may be referred to as "administrative authority".

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention includes the liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, the operation buttons 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the gaming. And a sub CPU 201 as a display control unit for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit changes or confirms a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes: a setting switch 332 that is a setting unit that enables various types of data; and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit includes: a reception unit that receives various data from the data transmission unit; A work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory capable of storing and holding written information even in a state, an RTC 209 for clocking date and time, The main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the set value to the sub CPU 201 by the data transmitting unit, and the sub CPU 201 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation when the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation. The setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203, and the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data stored in the main RAM 203 are stored in the liquid crystal display device 16. A configuration display function is provided for displaying the setting values stored in the work RAM 203 when the main button 662 is operated in a state where the setting change or the setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. .

  With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203. Therefore, the main button is displayed while the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. When 662 is operated, the set values stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hall menu is selected, it is possible to check each history related to the setting value, and determine whether an improper setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Become like

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may be configured to acquire the date and time data at which the set value is received from the RTC 209, and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

  With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person specifies the date and time when the setting value was changed. When a fraud such as changing a set value has been performed, the fraud can be specified.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires from the RTC 209 the date and time at which the information indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. Is also good.

  According to this configuration, the date and time data at which the setting value was confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person can specify the date and time at which the setting value was confirmed, and If a fraud such as checking the value has been performed, the fraud can be specified.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data in the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time are displayed. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  With this configuration, when a setting change or setting confirmation, a setting value, and date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing is performed. History can be displayed. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu where the set value is not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display, Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for the purpose of fraudulent acts such as goto.

  With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are associated with each other can be stored and displayed. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can confirm whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, operation units such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for performing control related to the game. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a certain main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the control unit sets or changes setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 serving as a unit, and a data transmitting unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201, and the display control unit includes a receiving unit that receives various data from the data transmitting unit, The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that can store and hold the written information and an RTC 209 that counts the date and time. The setting change or setting confirmation and the set value are transmitted to the sub CPU 201. When the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting in the work RAM 203. It has a setting display function of storing the value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change / confirmation history information, and displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16. When the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Can be. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper operation.

  Further, the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment acquires from the RTC 209 the date and time data when the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history in association with each other. It is good also as a structure which performs.

  According to this configuration, the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information on the setting value was browsed can be specified, and illegality such as changing the setting value can be prevented. If so, the fraud can be identified.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data in the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time are displayed. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  With this configuration, when a setting change or setting confirmation, a set value, and date and time data of the setting change and confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu where the set value is not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display, Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for the purpose of fraudulent acts such as goto.

  With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can determine whether or not the pachinko machine has been acted upon, as well as determine whether or not it is a chance to investigate an illegal act.

[14. Maintenance processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, a maintenance process (step S3019) executed by sub CPU 201 and a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of liquid crystal display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed will be described. This will be described in comparison. FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the maintenance process performed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 74 is an example of a maintenance screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  In the maintenance processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this maintenance process, devices connected to the sub CPU 201 (for example, various sensors, various operating materials, and the like), such as effect buttons such as the effect button switch 621 and the upper item 1000, are subjected to the maintenance process. The operator can confirm whether or not these devices operate normally.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the sub CPU 201 displays operation state display tables of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, and the like) at substantially the center of the maintenance screen (refer to FIGS. 73 and 74). The operation state display table includes, for example, a name column in which names of 28 various devices are displayed, and a number column in which serial numbers (1 to 28) assigned to the various devices displayed in the name column are displayed. And an operation state column indicating the operation states of the various devices. The “OFF” display in the operation state column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is an input from various devices, the display of the operation state column is changed from “OFF” display to “ON” display. For example, when the production button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is displayed, the sub CPU 201 changes the display of the operation state column of the production button 1 from “OFF” display to “ON” display. The “ON” display is displayed in red. The above “input from each device” is based on detection of an input port or the like by the sub CPU 201. In addition, each of the attraction objects has a sensor for detecting at least a normal position (standby position). When the sensor for detecting the normal position is ON, the display is turned OFF, and the sensor for detecting the normal position is provided. In the case of OFF, that is, the display is turned ON when the stage combination moves.

  The sub CPU 201 displays an operation method on the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously pressed, the display returns to the initial screen (see FIG. 52) of the hole menu screen (redisplayed). Further below, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 74, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white, which indicates that the images are valid.

  In the maintenance process (see FIG. 72), the sub CPU 201 first obtains sub device input information (step S3081). The sub-device input information is a detection result of the operation states of the various devices indicated by the serial numbers 21 to 28 in the operation state display table shown in FIG. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices are in an on state where there is an input or an off state where there is no input.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub input state information editing process of reading out the sub input state information in the obtained sub device input information (step S3082).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a maintenance screen display process of displaying a maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the sub input state information read in step S3082 (step S3083). ). In this process, display of the maintenance screen and update of the display (for example, change from “OFF” display to “ON” display) are performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously operated (step S3084). If it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b have been operated simultaneously (YES in step S3084), the sub CPU 201 ends the maintenance processing and the hole menu processing (see FIG. 57), and ends the processing. The process returns to step S304 of the hole menu task (see FIG. 50).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b have not been operated at the same time (NO in step S3084), the sub CPU 201 returns the process to step S3081.

  By the way, some recent pachinko machines and pachislot machines have a plurality of functions in one device. For example, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is a case where the effect button 62 has a function as an operation button and a function as an effect button. The function of the effect button corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding and moving upward based on the result of the special symbol lottery. Then, when the “effect button 1” of the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance on the operation function of the effect button 62. When the “effect button 2” of the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 executes the maintenance of the effect function by moving the effect button 62 upward and protruding. If the result of the maintenance operation is normal, the sub CPU 201 executes a maintenance screen display process (step S3083) and executes a maintenance screen display process (changes from “OFF” display to “ON” display). The effect button 62 protruding upward due to the selection and determination of the “main button 2” may be operated, for example, by operating the select button 664 to select another serial number item shown in FIG. In this case, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously pressed to end the maintenance mode, the sub CPU 201 is controlled to return to a normal state (a state before projecting upward). You.

  Also, in recent years, some pachinko gaming machines and pachislots are provided with a plurality of effect components having different driving means, and in such a gaming machine, a plurality of effect components having different driving means are simultaneously operated. The maintenance may be executed, the driving means may operate each of the plurality of different stage productions at different timings to execute the maintenance, or may be operated independently to execute the maintenance. For example, in a gaming machine in which the driving means is provided with different renderings 1 to 3, if, for example, “Radio 1 + 2” of the serial number 14 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 The object 1 and the stage combination 2 are simultaneously operated to perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “directing effect 1 → 2” of the serial number 17 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 activates the directing effect 1 first, and then activates the directing effect 2. Perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “directing effect 1” of the serial number 11 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 operates the directing effect 1 alone to perform the maintenance. For example, in the case where the effects 1 and 3 simultaneously operate and interfere with each other and become inoperable, for example, it is not possible to select “director 1 + 3” of the serial number 15 in FIG. (The operation of the main button 662 is not validated.) In FIG. 74, “directing attraction 1 + 3” of serial number 15 is shaded as an unselectable item. However, for example, when the production 1 and the production 3 are simultaneously operated, they interfere with each other and become inoperable. However, when they are operated at different timings (for example, the production 1 is first operated, and then the production 1 is operated. If it does not interfere with the production of the character combination 3), for example, it is preferable that “production character 1 → 3” of the serial number 18 shown in FIG. 74 can be selected and determined. In this way, it is possible to operate a plurality of directing objects in a plurality, to operate at different timings, or to operate independently, and to simultaneously operate when simultaneous operation interferes. By making it inoperable, it is possible to improve the maintainability while avoiding the occurrence of trouble.

  Although not shown in FIG. 74, a payout sensor for a game ball or a medal, a payout security ball sensor, a lending button (also referred to as a ball lending button), a return button for a CR card, a settlement button for a pachislot, and a sealed box are enclosed. In a pachinko game machine that enables a game by circulating the game balls, it is preferable that the detection detection sensor and the like of the game balls are also subject to maintenance. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the sub CPU 201 have been described as targets of the maintenance processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the devices connected to the main CPU 101 are not limited thereto. (For example, the power switch 35, the first starting port switch 421, the second starting port switch 441, and the like) may be the target of the maintenance processing. Furthermore, in the CR machine, a pseudo operation is performed between the ball rental machine and the pachinko game machine (in the case of a CR pachislot, between the ball rental machine and the pachislot machine) based on the operation of the lending button or the return button of the CR card. A typical signal communication may be performed to detect a normal state of the signal communication, and if the signal communication is normal, a maintenance screen display process may be executed (change from “OFF” display to “ON” display).

[15. Mobile terminal cooperation function]
Next, the portable terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The portable terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a function of associating the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the portable terminal. By using the portable terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to record detailed information on a game performed by a player or customize a function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by satisfying a predetermined condition. Or you can.

  Examples of the predetermined condition include, for example, that the result of the special symbol big hit determination is determined to be a small hit that does not involve the operation of the condition device, or that a specific effect is executed. In order to customize a function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, music output during a jackpot game or a high-probability game state is changed to a special song, or a liquid crystal display device is used. For example, changing the costume of the character displayed at 16 is performed.

  When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, a guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. When, for example, a pressing operation on the main button 662 is performed in a state where the decorative design displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is not being changed, an initial guide image is displayed in the display region of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The guide initial image includes characters “Unimemo (registered trademark)”, characters “Please select a favorite menu”, and a guide menu.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the items of the guide menu include “Start Unimemo”, “Big hit symbol / round number”, “Model site”, and “Return to game”. In the guide initial image, “Start Unimemo” is highlighted. Then, among the plurality of guide menu items, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b. When the main button 662 is operated, the item that is highlighted is determined. In FIG. 75, a plurality of items are surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted “Start Unimemo” is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

  When "Start Unimemo" is selected from the guide menu, the initial Unimemo image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. When "Big hit symbol / round number" is selected, the big hit symbol / round number is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown). When "model site" is selected, a model site registration code is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown).

  When "return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). Then, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an effect image displayed when playing a game, the firing handle 32 is not operated for a predetermined period, or any of the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. Also, a demonstration image displayed when no prize is won for a predetermined period is displayed. Further, even when a predetermined time has elapsed without selecting any of the items of the guide menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays an effect image displayed at the time of playing a game or the demonstration image described above. Is displayed.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating an example when a unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The unimemo initial image displays characters “unimemo”, characters “customize favorite character”, and a unimemo menu. The items of the uni memo menu include “input password”, “record”, “record and end”, “member registration”, “return to game”, and “return”. In the initial Unimemo image, “Password input” is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of unimemo menus can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. When the main button 662 is operated, the item that is highlighted is determined. In FIG. 76, a plurality of items are surrounded by a solid-line frame, and the highlighted “password input” is surrounded by a thicker solid-line frame.

  Then, when “password input” is selected and determined, a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 77).

  FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an example when a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The password display image includes characters “Please enter a password” and a password input menu.

  The password input menu displays a plurality of items of the password input menu. The items in the password input menu are “enter”, “delete”, numbers “0” to “9”, alphabets “A” to “F”, “return to game”, and “return”. including. In the password display image, an item to be highlighted among “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and when the main button 662 is operated. , The highlighted number or alphabet is determined. The determined number or alphabet is displayed on the password display image. When "OK" in the password input menu is selected and determined, a plurality of characters displayed on the password display image are determined as a password to be input. Then, when "delete" is selected in the password input menu, characters are deleted from the password display image one by one from the last input character.

  When "return to game" in the password input menu is selected, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays an effect image to be displayed at the time of playing a game, the firing handle 32 has not been operated for a predetermined period, or the A demonstration image is displayed when neither the first opening 420 nor the second opening 440 wins a prize for a predetermined period. When “return” is selected from the password input menu, a unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

[16. Modification of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Hereinafter, modified examples 1 to 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described.
[16-1. Modification 1 of setting change / confirmation history processing]
First, a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83.

  The setting change / confirmation history processing in Modification 1 is substantially the same as the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, except that it has an authentication function for browsing the set values. . Hereinafter, points different from the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60 will be described in detail. In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, if no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 52) Has been described to perform the timing process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 59) so that is displayed. In the first modification as well, the timekeeping processing is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, and no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although a hole menu screen may be displayed at a time, description of the timing processing is omitted in the following description.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. This setting change / confirmation history processing is a state in which “setting change / confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) from the hole menu screen (see FIGS. 52 and 53) being displayed in step S3006 in FIG. Is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed.

  When the setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication processing for authenticating the administrator authority (step S3100). This authentication processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an authentication process in a first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201.

  As shown in FIG. 79, in the authentication process, the sub CPU 201 first requests a password from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 where the hole menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, for example. Further, a password request screen is displayed (step S3101). FIG. 80 shows a modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed, a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a figure showing an example. FIG. 81 is an example of a password request screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201.

  In the first modification, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (when the “setting change / confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the hole menu screen), the main button 662 is pressed. And, for example, as shown in FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the password request screen is displayed while the hole menu screen is displayed, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed (the setting values are not displayed). May be displayed, and the password request screen may be displayed while the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request screen may be displayed without displaying any of the hole menu and the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

  When a password is input, sub CPU 201 executes a password input process (step S3102), and proceeds to step S3103.

  The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3103 whether or not the input password is appropriate, and if the input password is appropriate (YES in step S3103), ends the authentication processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the input password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), sub CPU 201 executes an authentication NG display process (step S3104). When the authentication NG display process is executed, a screen shown in FIG. 82 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, for example. Here, FIG. 82 shows an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the input password is inappropriate in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG.

  When executing the authentication processing in step S3100, sub-CPU 201 determines that the authentication is OK (YES in step S3103) if it determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is appropriate (YES in step S3110). It moves to S3120. On the other hand, if it is determined that the password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is not OK (NO in step S3110), and ends the setting change / confirmation history processing.

  After the password is input on the password request screen, for example, when the main button 662 is pressed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the input password is appropriate. If the entered password is inappropriate or the main button 662 is pressed without entering the password, the above-described authentication NG process in step S3103 is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and the main button 662 is pressed, for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed. Can be. This makes it possible to prevent the history information of the set value from being browsed for the purpose of fraud.

  The sub CPU 201 performs a setting change / confirmation history screen display process in step S3120. At this time, a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61) in which the date and time data, the operation type, and the setting value are shown in association with each other is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  After the setting change / confirmation history screen display processing in step S3120, sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a page update operation has been performed (step S3130). If it is determined that a page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3130), a page update process is executed (step S3140), and thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3130), the process moves to step S3150.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “clear” has been determined in step S3150. The operator presses the main button 662 while “clear” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 64) displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” has been determined.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” has been determined (YES in step S3150), it executes a setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3160), and proceeds to step S3180. The above-described setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process for deleting the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is deleted (for example, see FIG. 65). On the other hand, if “clear” has not been determined (NO in step S3150), the process moves to step S3170.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “return” is determined in step S3170. The operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “return” is selected (highlighted) in the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” has been determined.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" has been determined (YES in step S3170), it executes a hole menu screen display process (step S3180), and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if “return” is not determined (NO in step S3170), the process proceeds to step S3130, and the process of step S3130 is continued.

  FIG. 83 shows a setting change / confirmation in which a set value can be confirmed on a hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation procedure until a history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 83, as a first procedure for browsing the setting change / confirmation history information, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs a hole menu when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key switch 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and turned in the opposite direction (return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It can be configured.

  As a second procedure, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects and determines “setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu on the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53), the pachinko gaming machine 1 obtains “setting change / confirmation history”. Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history screen preview including the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 53) is displayed (the set values are not displayed).

  As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests input of a password (see FIGS. 80 and 81), and determines whether the input password is appropriate.

  As a fourth procedure, if the password input in the third procedure is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the setting value information, more specifically, the date and time data and the operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). A setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 68) in which the setting value is associated with the corresponding operation type is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  Therefore, a person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (an authorized person) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) displayed through the first to fourth procedures. By viewing the confirmation history, it is possible to confirm at a glance the setting change of the set value that regulates the payout rate, the confirmation of the setting change, the history of the setting change and the viewing of the confirmation, and the corresponding set value at a glance. . The person having the authority is a person who has been given authority for setting change, confirmation of setting change, and the like, and means a store manager of the hall. Hereinafter, "authorized person" may be referred to as "administrative authority".

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention includes the liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, the operation buttons 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the gaming. And a sub CPU 201 as a display control unit for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit changes or confirms a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes: a setting switch 332 that is a setting unit that enables various types of data; and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit includes: a reception unit that receives various data from the data transmission unit; A work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory capable of storing and holding written information even in a state, an RTC 209 for clocking date and time, The main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the set value to the sub CPU 201 by the data transmitting unit, and the sub CPU 201 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation when the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation. The setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203, and the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data stored in the main RAM 203 are stored in the liquid crystal display device 16. A configuration display function is provided for displaying the setting values stored in the work RAM 203 when the main button 662 is operated in a state where the setting change or the setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. .

  With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203. Therefore, the main button is displayed while the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. When 662 is operated, the set values stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hall menu is selected, it is possible to check each history related to the setting value, and determine whether an improper setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Become like

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may be configured to acquire the date and time data at which the set value is received from the RTC 209, and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

  With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person specifies the date and time when the setting value was changed. When a fraud such as changing a set value has been performed, the fraud can be specified.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires from the RTC 209 the date and time at which the information indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. Is also good.

  According to this configuration, the date and time data at which the setting value was confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person can specify the date and time at which the setting value was confirmed, and If a fraud such as checking the value has been performed, the fraud can be specified.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data in the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time are displayed. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  With this configuration, when a setting change or setting confirmation, a setting value, and date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing is performed. History can be displayed. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu where the set value is not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display, Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for the purpose of fraudulent acts such as goto.

  With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are associated with each other can be stored and displayed. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can confirm whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, operation units such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit for performing control related to the game. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a certain main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the control unit sets or changes setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 serving as a unit, and a data transmitting unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201, and the display control unit includes a receiving unit that receives various data from the data transmitting unit, The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that can store and hold the written information and an RTC 209 that counts the date and time. The setting change or setting confirmation and the set value are transmitted to the sub CPU 201. When the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting in the work RAM 203. It has a setting display function of storing the value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change / confirmation history information, and displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16. When the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Can be. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper operation.

  Further, the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment acquires from the RTC 209 the date and time data when the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history in association with each other. It is good also as a structure which performs.

  According to this configuration, the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information on the setting value was browsed can be specified, and illegality such as changing the setting value can be prevented. If so, the fraud can be identified.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data in the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the displayed date and time are displayed. The data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  With this configuration, when a setting change or setting confirmation, a set value, and date and time data of the setting change and confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, when “Setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu where the set value is not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display, Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for the purpose of fraudulent acts such as goto.

  With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can determine whether or not the pachinko machine has been acted upon, as well as determine whether or not it is a chance to investigate an illegal act.

[16-2. Modification 2 of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88.

  The basic configuration of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing is substantially the same as that of the first modification except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, in particular, differences from the first modification will be described in detail.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing is provided with, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and is provided with a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, volume "high". , "Medium", and "small" are switched to one of the three volume positions, and are switched to a plurality of volume positions in a predetermined operation order, and the switching operation order is set in advance. When the order matches, the user is authenticated as a user having administrator authority. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to a slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by turning a jog dial, and the volume may be determined by pressing the jog dial.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing has the authentication processing function of performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the volume position change order. In the second modification, for example, a control program having the above-described authentication processing function added to the voice control circuit 204 is stored, and the sub CPU 201 executes an authentication process based on the volume password according to the control program.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a volume switch 108 that generates a volume password applied to an authentication process (see FIG. 85) in a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. The volume switch 108 is disposed, for example, in a circuit board of the sub-control circuit 200, and allows a slide operation for setting an initial set value. For example, the volume switch 108 is set to one of three volume positions 603a, 603b, and 603c (hereinafter, also referred to as volume positions 1, 2, and 3) corresponding to the volume levels of "low", "medium", and "high". In addition to the switching operation, the operation is sequentially switched to a plurality of volume positions 1, 2, and 3 in a predetermined operation order. Specifically, when the initial setting value is set, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 108 in the order of “large” → “medium” → “small” → “medium”. That is, the sub CPU 201 configures a position detection unit that detects the volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

  On the other hand, when a user having an administrator authority (administrative authority) is set, a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions is performed in a different order from that at the time of initial setting according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. The operation is performed in a pattern, and the plurality of volume positions and the operation order are stored in a memory. When the administrator authority is required to view the set value change history, the volume switch 108 is operated in a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable the set value change history to be viewed.

  As the authentication operation pattern, for example, an operation pattern indicating a position change from volume position 2 (volume “medium”) to volume position 1 (volume “low”) in FIG. 84 or volume position 3 to volume position 3 ( An operation pattern or the like representing a position change to a volume “loud” can be stored in advance.

  Thereby, the sub CPU 201 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each volume position of the volume switch 108, and determines whether or not the operation pattern matches a preset authentication operation pattern. Can be determined.

  As described above, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting a volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. The volume switch 108 in Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player, like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, and the like are operation units that can be operated by the player.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an authentication process in a second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this authentication processing, “setting change / confirmation history” is selected from the hole menu (see FIG. 52) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 57 (YES in step S3006), and “setting change / confirmation” is selected on the hole menu screen. The process is started when the main button 662 is pressed while “History” is highlighted (see FIG. 53).

  When the authentication process is started, the sub CPU 201 executes a volume password request display process (step S3201) for displaying a screen prompting the input of a volume password in a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 where the hole menu screen is displayed. Execute.

  FIG. 86 shows a password request screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure showing an example. FIG. 87 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, in the volume password request display process of step S3201 in FIG. 85, the sub CPU 201 displays, for example, “* operates a volume switch to input a password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The setting value will be displayed after entering the password. "And the setting change / confirmation history information.

  In the second modification, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while “setting change / confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the hole menu screen). And, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the volume password request screen is displayed while the whole menu screen is displayed, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed (the setting values are not displayed). May be displayed and the volume password request screen may be displayed while the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the volume may be displayed without displaying any of the hole menu and the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

  After the display of the volume password request display screen, the sub CPU 201 continuously executes the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern acquisition process of monitoring the operation pattern (step S3202).

  When the volume position information is input during the monitoring of the input of the volume position information, the sub CPU 201 extracts an operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and checks it against an authentication operation pattern set in advance. Then, it is determined whether or not the correct operation has been performed based on whether or not they match (step S3203). Here, if it is determined that a correct operation has been performed (YES in step S3203), sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S3120 and subsequent steps in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S3203), the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication NG display process of displaying that the authentication is NG in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Performed (step S3204). As a result, the sub CPU 201 ends the authentication processing and moves to the processing of step S3110 in FIG. In the above-described authentication NG display process, a message such as “Volume password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning.” Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  Note that FIG. 84 shows an example in which the volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least three or more arbitrary operation switches are provided. A switch capable of taking a position may be used. In this case, the sub CPU 201 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, and the position information detected by this position detection function (volume position information is acquired, and the acquired order and the acquired order are stored in the work RAM 203 in advance. The configuration change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be displayed on the condition that it matches the stored predetermined operation order.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information in Modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIG. 88, in the modified example 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing, as a first procedure of confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information, the hole is set when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is executed. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key switch 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and turned in the opposite direction (return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It can be configured.

  As a second procedure, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects and determines “setting change / confirmation history” in the hole menu on the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53), the pachinko gaming machine 1 obtains “setting change / confirmation history”. Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history screen preview including the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 53) is displayed (the set values are not displayed).

  As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests input of a volume password (see FIGS. 86 and 87), captures the input volume password, and determines whether the captured volume password is appropriate. The determination as to whether the volume password is appropriate is made by comparing the captured volume password with an authentication operation pattern (authentication password). If the two match and the authentication is successful, the volume password is determined to be appropriate. to decide.

  As a fourth procedure, if the volume password input in the third procedure is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the setting value information, more specifically, the date and time data and the operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). A setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 68) in which the setting value is associated with the operation type corresponding to the operation type is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention includes the liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, and the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are operation units that receive at least the operation of the player. A non-game operation unit that is not operated by a player, a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs control related to the game, and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit includes: a setting switch 332 that enables a change or confirmation of a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6); and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the display control unit. Receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state, and clocking a date and time The main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the sub CPU 201 by a data transmitting unit to the sub CPU 201, and the sub CPU 201 transmits the setting change or setting confirmation to the data received by the data receiving unit. In the work RAM 203, the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information, and the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. And a configuration display function for displaying setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on condition that the non-game operation unit is operated in a predetermined order.

  With this configuration, the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed on condition that the non-game operation unit is operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation order can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Or, it is possible to judge whether or not it is the opportunity to investigate the misconduct.

  Further, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores the displayed date and time data in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and displays the data on the liquid crystal display device 16. It is good also as a structure which displays a browsing history.

  With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper operation.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the non-game operation section may be an operation switch for adjusting a volume, for example, a volume switch 108.

  According to this configuration, authentication can be performed in the operation sequence known only to the authorized person, so that an operation switch for identifying an authorized person is not added, and the cost can be reduced. Note that this operation sequence is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is delivered to a hall, and is used only by a person having authority to change a setting or confirm a setting.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation switch is a switch that can take at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the sub CPU 201 can detect each volume position of the operation switch. The setting display function obtains the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and sets a condition that the order of the obtained volume position information matches a predetermined operation order stored in advance. Alternatively, the configuration change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be displayed.

  With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the operation order is notified to an authorized person in advance, thereby identifying an authorized one. Authentication can be performed in an operation sequence known only to authorized persons without adding an operation switch.

  With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can determine whether or not it is a chance to investigate a fraudulent activity.

  As described above, when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment authenticates by operating the volume switch 108 so that only a person who has the authority regarding the setting value in the hall can display the information. Although the configuration has been described, like the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing described below, when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information, the input unit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 The authentication using the input password may be configured.

[16-3. Modification 3 of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, a third modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 96.

  FIG. 89 is a view illustrating a configuration example of a gaming system 210 according to Modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. The gaming system 210 includes a pachinko gaming machine 1A, a portable wireless communication terminal 220, and a server device 240 arranged on a network 230. In the gaming system 210, as described later, the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the portable wireless communication terminal 220, and the server device 240 cooperate to perform an authentication process for confirming the setting change / confirmation history information.

  In the gaming system 210, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change / confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to the functions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. A function is provided for displaying the code in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A (see FIG. 92). The setting change / confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is, for example, information content displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 61 and includes a set value. The sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constitutes a generation unit that generates a two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

  The portable wireless communication terminal 220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 221, a display operation unit 222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display operation unit 222 has functions of a display unit and an operation unit, and is configured by a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a functional unit that reads (images) the two-dimensional code 161a (registered trademark) or the like (see FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The display operation unit 222 and the camera unit constitute an operation display unit and an imaging unit in the present invention, respectively.

  The control unit 221 includes a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, and the like. The CPU controls various operations according to a control program stored in the storage device or the RAM, for example. Do. In the present embodiment, the control unit 221 analyzes a captured two-dimensional code and extracts setting change / confirmation history information and a URL, and a password input screen for inputting a password to the operation display unit 222 (see FIG. 95), an authentication result obtaining unit that transmits an input password input on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the URL, and obtains an authentication result notified from the server device 240. And a history information display control unit that displays the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 in a mode including the set value when the acquired authentication result is correct. The extraction unit, the display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by a CPU that operates according to a dedicated application previously installed in the storage device or the like. An extraction unit, an input screen display control unit, an authentication result acquisition unit, and a history information display control unit, which are components of the control unit 221 according to the present embodiment, are an extraction unit, an input screen display control unit, an authentication result An acquisition unit and a history information display control unit are configured.

  The server device 240 is realized by a computer and functions to manage a dedicated site for an authentication service identified by the URL, receives an input password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 accessing the URL, and sets a password set in advance. And an authentication service function for notifying the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result by judging whether the password is correct or not. The server device 240 forms an authentication unit in the present invention.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process in the pachinko gaming machine 1A included in the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. This setting change / confirmation history processing is performed by selecting “change setting” from a plurality of hole menu items displayed on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 51) displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. "Confirmation history" is selected and determined, and the process is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed while "Change setting / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 53).

  In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, if no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 52) Has been described to perform the timing process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 59) so that is displayed. Also in the third modification, the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hole menu screen may be displayed at the same time, the description of the modification 3 omits the description of the timing processing.

  When the setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change / confirmation history information from the work RAM, and the two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. 161a (see FIG. 92) is performed (step S3301). Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a two-dimensional code display process of displaying the setting change / confirmation history information read in step S3301 and the generated two-dimensional code 161a on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A, for example, in a manner shown in FIG. Execute (step S3302).

  After the execution of the two-dimensional code display process in step S3302, the sub CPU 201 accepts a data clear request, a cursor movement (page break) request, and a process return request based on the operation of the main button 662 and the select button 664. Move to The main button 662 is a button for performing a process return request. The select button 664 is a button for performing a cursor movement (page break) request. By operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be instructed.

  After shifting to the above-mentioned receivable state, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of steps S3303 to S3305. Note that FIG. 90 omits steps S3056 to S3064 shown in FIG. 59. However, in order to perform these processes, the process shown in FIG. Are added to the processing of steps S3056 to S3064.

  In FIG. 90, after the two-dimensional code display processing in step S3302, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “clear” has been determined in step S3303. When the operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “clear” is selected (highlighted) in the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. , The sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” has been determined.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” has been determined (YES in step S3303), it executes a setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3304), and proceeds to step S3306. The above-described setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process for deleting the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is erased (see FIG. 65). If “clear” has not been determined (NO in step S3303), the process moves to step S3305.

  The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “return” is determined in step S3305. The operator presses the main button 662 in a state where “return” is selected (highlighted) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” has been determined.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" has been determined (YES in step S3305), it executes a hole menu screen display process (step S3306) and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be “return” (NO in step S3305), the process moves to step S3303 to continue the processing from step S3303.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” has been determined (YES in step S3303), the sub CPU 201 updates the setting change / confirmation history information displayed together with the two-dimensional code 161a (see FIG. 92). You may make it clear. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the two-dimensional code 161a, but has not obtained the authentication result. Therefore, regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG, the setting change / confirmation history information can be cleared. I can do it.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history process in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 and the server device 240 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. This process is started on the condition that the two-dimensional code 161a displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 220.

  When the two-dimensional code 161a is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 reads the image data obtained by the photographing, and transmits the image data to the display operation unit 222 based on the image data in a manner shown in FIG. 94, for example. A two-dimensional code reading display process for displaying the two-dimensional code 222a is performed (step S3401).

  Subsequently, in the portable wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code, and temporarily stores the URL in, for example, a predetermined storage area in the RAM. A two-dimensional code acquisition process to be held is executed (step S3402). Next, the control unit 221 accesses a dedicated site for the authentication service based on the URL, displays a password input screen (see FIG. 95), and executes a password input display process for receiving a password (step S3403).

  After executing the password input display processing in step S3403, the control unit 221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220 performs the password authentication processing through the following steps S3404 and S3405 in cooperation with the server device 240.

  In the password authentication process, the control unit 221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220 first monitors whether or not a password has been entered in the password display field 222c (see FIG. 95) (step S3404), and then transmits the password from the numeric keypad 222b. A process for accepting the input of the password of the user is performed. Here, when the password is input (YES in step S3404), control unit 221 transmits the input password to server device 240.

  The server device 240 checks the password transmitted from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 with a registered password registered in advance, and determines whether the authentication is OK or NG based on whether or not the two match. The server device 240 notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the above determination result. As described above, in the present embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 240. That is, the server device 240 returns only the authentication result to the portable wireless communication terminal 220.

  In response to this, after transmitting the input password accepted in step S3404, control unit 221 of portable wireless communication terminal 220 waits for notification of the authentication result from server device 240, and determines that the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. Then, it is determined whether the password is correct (step S3405).

  If it is determined that the password is incorrect (NO in step S3405), control unit 221 performs an authentication NG display process of displaying a message indicating that the password is authentication NG on display operation unit 222 ( Step S3410) Then, the process ends. In the authentication NG display process, for example, a message such as “The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning.” Is displayed in the message field 222d.

  On the other hand, if the password is determined to be correct (YES in step S3405), control unit 221 sets the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily stored in step S3402 to be displayed on display operation unit 222. A change / confirmation history display process is performed (step S3406). In the setting change / confirmation history display processing, the control unit 221 displays the display information in which the setting change / confirmation history information held in step S3402 is embedded (arranged) according to a preset display format. Then, based on this information for display, processing for displaying the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 (see FIG. 96) is performed.

  FIG. 92 is a view illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine 1A of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, in the two-dimensional code display process (step S3302) in FIG. 90, the sub CPU 201 sets the setting change / confirmation history information in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. And a setting change / confirmation history screen including the two-dimensional code 161a. As described above, the two-dimensional code 161a displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen 116g includes the setting change / confirmation history information displayed in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. Contains.

  Note that when displaying the two-dimensional code 161a in the two-dimensional code display process (see FIG. 90) in step S3302, the sub CPU 201 displays, for example, “* Please read and access the authentication service. "May be displayed.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. This setting value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of the present embodiment for convenience.

  FIG. 94 is a view illustrating an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 displays a two-dimensional code 222a as shown in FIG. 94 on the display operation unit 222 in the two-dimensional code reading and displaying process in S1101.

  FIG. 95 is a view illustrating an example of a password input screen in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. In the password input display processing of step S3403 (see FIG. 91), the portable wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 95, on the password input screen, a numeric keypad 222b having keys of “0” to “9”, “*”, and “#”, and a password display field 222c for displaying a password input by the numeric keypad 222b Is displayed in the message field 222d. In the message field 222d, for example, a message prompting the user to enter a password is displayed, such as "* Please enter a password. The set value is displayed after the password is entered." In the portable wireless communication terminal 220, on the password word input screen shown in FIG. 95, the password converted into the hidden character “*” can be displayed in the password display field 222c in which the password has been input by operating the numeric keypad 222b.

  FIG. 96 is a view illustrating an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen 222g in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. As shown in FIG. 96, in the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g, the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily stored in S1102 is a display equivalent to the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 96, the setting change / confirmation history information displays the set values corresponding to the setting change / confirmation date and time.

  In the portable wireless communication terminal 220, the dedicated application installed in advance includes the display format described above, the display format of the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. 96, the scrolling of the setting change / confirmation history information, and the processing function of batch deletion. Supported. As a result, during the setting change / confirmation history processing in FIG. 91, the control unit 221 performs the setting change / confirmation history display processing in S1107, and then displays the determination button displayed on the display operation unit 222 together with the setting change / confirmation history information. The state shifts to a receivable state in which a page update request based on the operation of the select button 222e and the select button 222f can be received.

  After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220 determines whether a page update operation has been performed (step S3407). When it is determined that the select button 222f has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3407). An update process is performed (step S3408). Here, as long as it is determined that the page update operation has been performed by operating the select button 222f (that is, as long as it is determined that the select button 222f has been operated and the last line has been reached), scrolling of the page continues. A page update process is performed (step S3408).

  If the control unit 222 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S3407), that is, if it determines that the operation of the select button 222f has been stopped and the enter button 222e has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S3409. If it is determined in step S3409 that "return" has been determined (YES in step S3071), control unit 222 executes a hole menu screen display process (step S3410) and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is determined that “return” has not been determined (NO in step S3409), control unit 222 returns to step S340.

  In the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1A converts the setting change / confirmation history information into so-called raw data as a two-dimensional code and displays it in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A ( 90, the portable wireless communication terminal 220 captures the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A to generate the setting change / confirmation history information. A process of returning to data is performed (see steps S3401 and S3402 in FIG. 91).

  On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years have a function of reading and analyzing a two-dimensional code as standard equipment.

  In this regard, in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, a dedicated application is installed in the portable wireless communication terminal 220, and it is possible to display in a display format equivalent to that of the pachinko gaming machine 1A by the dedicated application.

  In other words, on a mobile communication terminal on which the dedicated application is not installed, even if the setting change / confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, the mobile terminal is displayed in a display format equivalent to that of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. And it is difficult to recognize the setting change / confirmation history information.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application on the portable wireless communication terminal 220, sufficient confidentiality that only authorized persons can see the setting change / confirmation history information with the setting value is provided. Can be secured.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained by the two-dimensional code is captured by the portable wireless communication terminal 220. However, the data is read as shown in FIG. 96 according to the display format of the dedicated application. Will be displayed. Therefore, without having a dedicated application having the display format, even if it is read with a general-purpose barcode reader, it is not possible to make the user understand what kind of display the character string obtained by reading the two-dimensional code is. A certain level of confidentiality can be secured. The application is distributed when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered, and can be obtained only by authorized persons.

  In the present embodiment, the password authentication is notified of the authentication result from the server device 240, and whether or not the password is correct is determined based on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG, but is not limited thereto. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 may receive a password from the server device 240, determine whether the input password matches the password received from the server device 240, and determine whether the input password is correct. In order to further secure confidentiality, the pachinko gaming machine 1A encrypts the setting change / confirmation history information, generates and displays a two-dimensional code, and uses a dedicated application to be installed in the portable wireless communication terminal 220. A configuration may be added in which a function of decrypting the setting change / confirmation history information corresponding to the encryption is added.

  Next, a setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 93, as a first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1A executes a setting change process or a setting confirmation process. Display the hole menu screen when it is done. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key switch 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and turned in the opposite direction (return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It can be configured.

  As a second procedure, when the pachinko gaming machine 1A selects and determines “setting change / confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53), the pachinko gaming machine 1A performs “setting change / confirmation history”. Is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history screen preview including the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 53) is displayed (the set values are not displayed).

  As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A operates in a state where “setting change / confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen (see FIG. 53) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL held in the work RAM 203 is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information (see FIG. 92). ).

  As a fourth procedure, the portable wireless communication terminal 220 photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1A (see FIG. 94). After capturing the two-dimensional code, the portable wireless communication terminal 220 extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code.

  As a fifth procedure, the portable wireless communication terminal 220 accesses a dedicated site for the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third procedure, and enters a password from a password input screen (see FIG. 95) provided by the dedicated site. Make the input.

  This password is, for example, a password disclosed by a manufacturer of the gaming system 210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the gaming system 210 or the individual pachinko gaming machine 1A or the like. In the dedicated site, the server device 240 receives the input password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220, and performs password authentication by comparing it with the registered password. Here, when the authentication is OK, server device 240 notifies portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the fact.

  As a sixth procedure, when the authentication OK is obtained in the fifth procedure, the portable wireless communication terminal 220 displays the setting change / confirmation history information extracted in the fourth procedure in a screen of a predetermined display format (FIG. 96). (See Reference) on the display operation unit 222 with the content including the set value. Thus, the administrative authority who has input the password can check the setting change / confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display / operation unit 222 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment controls the liquid crystal display device 16A that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are the operation units that receive various operations, and controls the game. The control device includes a main CPU 101 serving as a control unit and a sub CPU 201 serving as a display control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 16A. The control unit can change or confirm set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332, and a data transmitting unit for transmitting various data to the display control unit. The display control unit includes a receiving unit for receiving various data from the data transmitting unit, and a writing unit for writing data even in a non-energized state. A work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the acquired information, and an RTC 209 for clocking the date and time. Thus, the setting change or the setting confirmation and the set value are transmitted to the sub CPU 201. When the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change or the setting confirmation in the work RAM 203. , The setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change / confirmation history information, and the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. When the main button 662 serving as the operation unit is operated in a state where the setting change or the setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed by the display function, the configuration change / confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code. .

  With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data from the date and time unit are stored as setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. When the main button 662 is operated, the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed by a two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the display is permitted after reading the two-dimensional code in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 and authenticating the password, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper act.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed by the setting display function, the sub CPU 201 uses the displayed date and time data as a browsing history in the work RAM 203. It is good also as a structure which memorize | stores and displays a browsing history in the display area of 16 A of liquid crystal display devices.

  With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. Can be. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also it can be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an improper operation.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the portable wireless communication terminal 220, triggers portable wireless communication based on information from a predetermined server device 240. The configuration change / confirmation history information may be displayed on the terminal 220.

  With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the portable wireless communication terminal 220, information from a predetermined server device 240, for example, a predetermined password, The setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed on the portable wireless communication terminal 220 on condition that the entered password matches. Therefore, since authentication can be performed with a password known only to the authorized person, the cost can be reduced without adding an input means for identifying the authorized person to the pachinko gaming machine 1A. Note that this password is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered to the hall, and is used only by a person having authority to change settings or confirm settings.

  The gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment includes the above-described pachinko gaming machine 1A and a server device 240 connected to the network 230 and managing a site for authentication. The server device 240 further has a generation function of generating the two-dimensional code of the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL of the site stored in the RAM 203, and the server device 240 compares the password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 with a preset password. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 has an authentication service unit that notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 includes a display operation unit 222 having display and operation functions, and a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. A camera unit that captures the displayed two-dimensional code, analyzes the captured two-dimensional code, and changes setting / confirmation history information An extraction unit for extracting a password and a URL, an input screen display control unit for displaying a password input screen for inputting a password, and a password input on the password input screen transmitted to the server device 240 based on the URL, and notified from the server device 240. An authentication result obtaining unit that obtains the authentication result to be performed, and a history information display control unit that displays the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 when the obtained authentication result is correct.

  With this configuration, the gaming system according to the present embodiment reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine 1A with the portable wireless communication terminal 220, and sends the two-dimensional code to the portable wireless communication terminal 220 through authentication by the server device 240. The setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, but also an unauthorized operation can be performed. It will be possible to determine whether it is a time to investigate an action.

  With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1A and a gaming system 210 that can determine whether or not it is a time to investigate a fraudulent activity.

  As above, the gaming machine according to each embodiment of the present invention has been described including its operation and effect. However, it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described herein, and includes various embodiments without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[17. Example of application to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to a pachislot. When the invention according to the present embodiment is applied to a pachi-slot, a procedure for executing a setting change process and a setting confirmation process is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the pachi-slot, the processing shifts to the setting change process on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is OFF, and the setting value can be changed. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or when the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is determined.

  In order to be able to display the history of the setting change, the main CPU of the pachi-slot inputs the signal generated from the setting switch by the operation of the setting key after the setting change described above has been performed, and then confirms that the start lever has been operated. When receiving the signal indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU transmits data indicating that the setting has been changed and a command indicating the current setting value. In addition, the main CPU of the pachislot configures a control unit that performs control related to the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

  On the other hand, if the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that a setting change has been made, the sub CPU sets operation type information (information indicating the setting change) indicating that the setting change has been made, and RTC Then, the date and time data which is currently being counted, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command is received are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change confirmation history information. The sub CPU of the pachislot constitutes a display control unit that controls display on the display unit. The sub CPU constitutes a receiving unit that receives various data from the data transmitting unit.

  In the pachislot, the confirmation of the set value means that the set key is operated (turned to the right) and the current set value is displayed on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. . As described above, the pachislot 1 shifts to the setting confirmation processing on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON in the power ON state, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The setting switch of the pachi-slot constitutes a setting unit which enables the setting value to be changed or confirmed together with the main CPU.

  In order to be able to display the set value check history, the main CPU checks the set value by the above-described operation, and confirms the set value by inputting a signal generated from the setting switch by operating the set key. And a setting confirmation command, which is the current setting value, are transmitted to the sub CPU.

  On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value has been confirmed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information representing setting confirmation) indicating that the setting value has been confirmed, The date and time data currently measured by the RTC, that is, the date and time data when a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received are stored as setting change confirmation history information in the work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory. The work RAM 203 can store and hold the written information even in a non-energized state.

  The sub CPU that has received the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command determines that the setting key has been turned from OFF to ON. When the sub CPU determines that the setting key has been turned from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs a hole menu display process for displaying a hole menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device provided in the pachislot. The hole menu screen displayed in the pachislot is replaced with “prize ball information” displayed on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 52) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. Although there are some differences in details such as “total medal information” being displayed, the screen is basically the same as the hole menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment.

  In pachislot, browsing refers to operating the setting key (turning to the right) and selecting (highlighting) "setting change / confirmation history" in the hole menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device. The setting change confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed, for example, as a setting change / confirmation history screen, on condition that the main button is pressed in a state where the main button is pressed.

  In addition, the sub CPU of the pachislot executes the same processing as the processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, such as a hall menu process, a setting change / confirmation history process, a maintenance process, and an authentication process. Can be. When the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is applied to a pachislot machine, the hole menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen, the error information history screen, the guide menu screen, and the password request screen described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. A screen similar to the screen displayed when the input password is inappropriate, the screen displayed on the portable wireless communication terminal, or the like is displayed on the main screen of the pachislot liquid crystal display device or the portable wireless communication terminal.

  In the pachislot, when “bonus win” is determined by the bonus lottery, any one of “SBB”, “BB”, and “RB” is determined by the bonus allocation lottery. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, one of "SBB or BB" and "RB" is determined by the bonus sorting lottery, and one of "SBB" and "BB" is determined at the end of the precursor game. You may.

  In the pachislot, the “BB precursor flag” is on when the “SBB” or “BB” precursor game is being played. That is, the precursor games of “SBB” and “BB” are managed by the “BB precursor flag”. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may have a configuration in which a precursor flag for “SBB” and a precursor flag for “BB” are provided. In this case, the effect of the precursor game corresponding to “SBB” may be different from the effect of the precursor game corresponding to “BB”.

  In the pachislot, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART end on condition that each of the games of the staying game number is consumed, but the first ART The second ART may be configured to end on the condition that a predetermined number of navigations (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed.

  Further, in the pachislot, the number of staying games of “SBB” in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, “100”, and similarly to “BB”, the number of games added to the number of staying games during “SBB” may be increased. A configuration in which addition (addition) is performed may be employed.

  Further, in the pachislot, the number of games in which the effects of additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in the BR may be fixed to, for example, “2”. That is, when the effects of the additional games A, B, and C are determined, “2” may be set in the additional game game counter. However, the number of games in which the additional A, B, and C effects are produced may be variable. For example, the value to be set in the additional game counter may be made different depending on the type of the additional game effect (addition game A, B, C).

  In the pachislot, the number of staying games in the second ART may be determined to be a fixed number of games such as "50", for example, or a predetermined number of games may be set as one set (for example, , One set of “50 games”), and the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of stay games of the second ART may be set to two sets of one set of “50” games, that is, a total of “100” games. In this case, a predetermined period may be provided between sets without notifying the stop order and not decrementing the value of the ART game counter for each game. Further, an additional game number lottery may be performed for each game in the predetermined period. Then, before the predetermined period ends (when the predetermined period is ended when the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop sequence other than the forward pushing is performed. When the stop operation (irregular push) is performed, the predetermined period is forcibly terminated, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted from the next game after the irregular push is performed by "1" for each game. May be.

  Also, in the pachislot, as the accessory provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rotating accessory unit 122 having the rotating accessory 123 rotated by driving the stepping motor has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-back direction by driving a stepping motor, a solenoid, or the like.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
The pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention includes the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment, and further includes a variable time determination table shown in FIG.

  The fluctuation time determination table in the first embodiment described above has been described with reference to FIG. 13. This fluctuation time determination table is used after the special symbol that is currently fluctuating is stopped when the number of holdings is three or less. Is used to determine the fluctuation time of the next special symbol. In the first embodiment, although not described above, when the number of reserves is four as shown in FIG. 97, after the special symbol currently changing is stopped, the change time of the next special symbol is determined. A variable time determination table used for

  In other words, the second embodiment of the present invention provides a fluctuating time determination table used to determine the fluctuating time of the next special symbol after the special symbol that is currently fluctuating is stopped when the number of hold is four. 97, a fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 98 is provided in addition to the fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG.

  In the fluctuation time determination tables shown in FIGS. 13 and 97, the fluctuation times of the fluctuation patterns “03H” and “04H” are different from each other. That is, while the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “03H” in the fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is 10,000 ms and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “04H” is 5000 ms, the fluctuation pattern “ The fluctuation time of “03H” and “04H” is set to a short time of 2000 ms.

  As shown in FIG. 13, as the variation pattern in the case where the hit determination is a loss, one of the variation patterns “03H” and “04H” is most often selected. In, after the special symbol that is currently fluctuating stops, 2000 ms is most likely selected as the fluctuation time of the next special symbol. Therefore, when the hit determination is a loss, the determination result is immediately displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5), and the liquid crystal display device 16 (for example, see FIG. 5) shifts to the next variable display.

  Also in the fluctuation time determination tables shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the fluctuation times of the fluctuation patterns “03H” and “04H” are different from each other. That is, while the fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns “03H” and “04H” in the fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 97 is 2000 ms, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns “03H” and “04H” in the fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. The fluctuation time is set to a shorter time of 500 ms.

  Although the details will be described later, if the time required for the number of retained balls to change from three to four in the normal game state (probable change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is 1000 seconds or more, the fluctuation time determination shown in FIG. The table is referred to. If the time is less than 1000 seconds, the fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 98 is referred. For convenience of explanation, the variation time determination table shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15) is a variation pattern determination table for three or less reserved balls, and the variation time determination table shown in FIG. 97 is a first variation pattern determination for four reserved balls. The fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 98 will be referred to as a second fluctuation pattern determination table for four reserved balls.

[Processing by main control circuit]
The processing by the main control circuit in the second embodiment is partially different from the start winning detection processing in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 31, but is otherwise the same.

[Start winning prize detection processing]
FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the start-up winning detection processing by the main CPU 101 in the second embodiment. In the processing shown in FIG. 99, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 31 is denoted by the same step number, and detailed description is omitted.

  In FIG. 99, the processing of steps S71 to S75 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. When the processing in step S75 is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S751.

  Step S751 is a timer counting process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of measuring the time required for the number of held items to change from three to four. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S76.

  In FIG. 99, the processing in steps S76 and S77 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 31, and thus detailed description is omitted. When the processing in step S77 ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S781.

  Step S781 is a variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15), FIG. 97, or FIG. 98, and determines the big hit determination result, the reach determination random number value, and the effect selection A process of selecting and determining a fluctuation pattern based on a random number value is performed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S79.

  In the starting opening winning detection processing in the second embodiment, the processing after step S781, that is, the processing of steps S79 to S89 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 31, and therefore detailed description is omitted.

[Timer processing]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the timer counting process by the main CPU 101, which is executed in step S751 shown in FIG. The timer counting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the winning opening winning detection process.

  As shown in FIG. 100, in step S752, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the suspended number added by 1 in step S75 is 3. If it is determined that the number to be held is three, the process proceeds to step S753. If it is not determined that the number to be held is three, the process proceeds to step S755.

  In step S753, the main CPU 101 performs a process of starting time counting by a hold time timer that measures the time from when the number of hold times becomes three to four. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S754.

  In step S754, a process of turning off the reserved ball 4 flag is performed. The reserved ball 4 flag is a flag that is turned on when the number of reserved balls is four. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of turning off the pending ball 4 flag when the flag is on. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In step S755, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the suspended number added by 1 in step S75 is 4. If it is determined that the number of reservations is 4, the process proceeds to step S756, and if it is not determined that the number of reservations is 4, the process proceeds to step S762.

  In step S756, a process of turning on the reserved ball 4 flag is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of turning on the reserved ball 4 flag when the flag is off. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S757.

  In step S757, a process of stopping the counting of the hold time timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 stops the counting of the hold time timer and performs a process of maintaining the current time value. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S758.

  In step S758, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the count value of the hold time timer is 1000 ms or more. If it is determined that the count value of the hold time timer is 1000 ms or more, the process proceeds to step S759. If it is not determined that the count value of the timer is 1000 ms or more, the process proceeds to step S760.

  In step S759, the main CPU 101 performs a process of turning off the table change flag. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S761.

  In step S760, the main CPU 101 performs a process of turning on the table change flag. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S761. That is, if the count value of the hold time timer is 1000 ms or more, the table change flag is turned off, and if the count value of the hold time timer is less than 1000 ms, the table change flag is turned on.

  In step S761, a process of resetting the hold time timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the hold time timer to “0”. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In step S762, a process of stopping the counting of the hold time timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 stops the counting of the hold time timer and performs a process of maintaining the current time value. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S763.

  In step S763, a process of resetting the hold time timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the hold time timer to “0”. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S754.

  That is, according to the timer counting process, when the number of holdings changes from three to four, the holding time timer stops, the table change flag is set, and the holding time timer is reset. In addition, for example, when the number of held items is reduced from three to two, the held time timer is stopped and the held time timer is reset. The hold time timer is maintained in a reset state until the process of step S753 is executed next.

[Variation pattern determination processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern determination processing by the main CPU 101, which is executed in step S781 shown in FIG. The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start-up winning detection process.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in step S782, a process of determining a fluctuation pattern based on data stored in the start storage area of the main RAM 103 corresponding to a new holding ball is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table for three or less reserved balls and selects and determines the fluctuation pattern based on the hit determination result, the reach determination random number value, and the effect selection random number value. Perform processing. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S783.

  In step S783, a process is performed to determine whether the pending ball 4 flag is on. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the pending ball 4 flag is on, the process proceeds to step S784, and when it is not determined that the pending ball 4 flag is on, the process is terminated. Then, the subroutine ends.

  In step S784, a process is performed to determine whether the table change flag is on. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S785 when determining that the table change flag is on, and shifts the processing to step S786 when determining that the table change flag is not on.

  In step S785, a process of selecting the second variation pattern determination table for four reserved balls is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting the second variation pattern determination table for four reserved balls shown in FIG. 98 as a table to be referred to when determining a variation pattern. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S787.

  In step S786, a process of selecting the first variation pattern determination table for four reserved balls is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting the first variation pattern determination table for four reserved balls shown in FIG. 97 as a table to be referred to when determining a variation pattern. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S787.

  In step S787, processing for re-determining the fluctuation pattern of the hold (1) is performed. Here, the hold (1) indicates a hold ball corresponding to the information of the special symbol game stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1). Similarly, the holding (2) to holding (4) indicate a holding ball corresponding to the information of the special symbol game stored in the first special symbol starting storage areas (2) to (4). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to one of the fluctuation time determination tables in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15), FIG. 97, and FIG. 98 selected by the processes in steps S783 to S786, and responds to the suspension (1). Based on the result of the big hit determination, a variation pattern is newly selected based on the reach determination random number and the effect selection random number, and a process of redetermining the variation pattern is performed. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S788.

  In step S788, a process of selecting a variation pattern determination table for three or less reserved balls is performed. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting the variation pattern determination table for three or less reserved balls shown in FIG. 13 or 15 as a table to be referred to when determining a variation pattern. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  That is, according to the second embodiment, at the time when there is a start winning prize, a change pattern corresponding to a new reserved ball is determined. At this time, when the reserved ball 4 flag is turned on, that is, when the number of reserved balls becomes four, the fluctuation pattern of the reservation (1) to be subjected to the next special symbol fluctuation is reset. Thus, according to the second embodiment, when the first starting port 420 is won during the change of the special symbol and the number of reserved first special symbols becomes four, the first special symbol is held. There is a higher possibility that the fluctuation time of the next first special symbol will be shorter than when the number is three or less. Further, if the time required for the number of held items to change from three to four is less than the specified time (1000 ms), the fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 98 is referred to, so that the fluctuation time of the next first special symbol is changed. Is more likely to be shorter.

  Note that, in step S782, if a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than the predetermined time is determined, the processing of steps S782 to S788 may not be performed. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent the effect from being easily ended even when a highly reliable advance notice is given in the reserved ball announcement effect by the prefetching of the suspension.

  By the way, as a case where the time required for the number of held balls to change from three to four becomes shorter than the specified time (1000 ms), two balls are continuously won in the first starting port 420 in a state where there are already two held balls. It is possible to do.

  For example, when the player stops the firing operation at the time of winning two balls in a row with two reserved balls, several game balls have already been fired in the game area at that time. In this case, in the second embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 500 ms, the number of the reserved balls is reduced by one at the start of the fluctuation, and the number of the reserved balls is further reduced by one after 500 ms, so that the number of the reserved balls is reduced by two. Time is reduced. For this reason, when two balls out of several game balls that have already been fired win the first starting port 420, there is a high possibility that both balls will be reserved balls. The game balls are fired at intervals of about 1.2 seconds, so two balls are fired in about 1.2 seconds. Therefore, the specified time must be 1.2 seconds or less.

  As described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the time during which a game ball is unnecessarily fired as much as possible, and for a player, the merit of performing the so-called three-stop hitting is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of players who perform the batting, and it is possible to prevent the firing suspension time from being lengthened.

  In the second embodiment, the difference between the fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 97 and the fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 98 is only the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuations A and B, but is not limited thereto. For example, the variable time determination table applied when the time required for the number of held items to change from three to four becomes less than the specified time (1000 ms) is applied when the time becomes longer than the specified time (1000 ms). As long as the average fluctuation time is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time determination table, the contents of the fluctuation time determination table do not matter.

  Further, in the above-described second embodiment, the time required for the number of balls retained by the second starting opening winning balls to change from 3 to 4 is not measured. The time until the number becomes 3 to 4 is measured, and according to the measured value, the average fluctuation time in the next fluctuation when the second special symbol that is currently fluctuating is stopped when the number of pending is 4 is stopped. You may change it. In other words, the second embodiment is also applicable to a case where the vehicle is driven right and the second starting port 440 is aimed.

  Further, in the above-described second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination processing is executed in the starting opening winning detection processing. However, the present invention is also applicable to a model that executes the fluctuation pattern determination processing in the special symbol check processing.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 102 is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. 102, members having the same configurations as those of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the clune device 630 is disposed behind the transparent panel 172 and near the special winning opening 540 so as to be visually recognized by a player.

[Structure of the cleaning device]
FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the clune device 630, where (a) shows the top surface of the clune device 630 and (b) shows the side surface of the clune device 630. The clean device 630 includes a disk plate 631, a tongue-shaped member 632, a V region passage gate 633, a receiving portion 634, a V solenoid 635, and a V passage gate switch 636.

  The disk plate 631 has a shallow concave surface, and has a first hole 631a and a second hole 631b, which are large enough to allow a game ball to pass therethrough, formed in the center. In addition, a guide portion 631c through which a game ball that has passed through the special winning opening 540 and the count switch 541 passes is formed at a part of the outer peripheral portion of the disk plate 631.

  The game ball that has passed through the guide portion 631c is discharged into the disk plate 631 along the inner wall surface, and goes around in the disk plate 631, to whichever one of the first hole portion 631a and the second hole portion 631b. Enter the crab. The inclination, radius, and the like of the surface of the disk plate 631 are set so that all game balls on the disk plate 631 pass through one of the first hole portion 631a and the second hole portion 631b in the interval between round games. Designed for

  Below the disc 631, a receiving portion 634 that receives game balls that have passed through the first hole 631a and the second hole 631b is arranged. Further, in the receiving portion 634, the tongue-shaped member 632 is disposed immediately below the first hole 631a, and the V-region passing gate 633 is disposed immediately below the tongue-shaped member 632.

  The game ball riding on the receiving portion 634 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine without returning to the game area 20 again. The tongue-shaped member 632 is connected to the V solenoid 635 (see FIG. 105), and slides in the front-rear direction on the V region passage gate 633 in conjunction with the operation of the V solenoid 635. By operating the tongue-shaped member 632, the V-region passing gate 633 is switched between an open state in which game balls can pass and a closed state in which game balls cannot pass. The V-region passing gate 633 includes a V-pass gate switch 636, and a game ball passing through the V-region passing gate 633 is detected by the V-pass gate switch 636.

  FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of a game ball in the cloon device 630. When the V-field passing gate 633 is in the open state when the game ball orbits inside the disk 631 and enters the first hole 631a, as shown in FIG. It passes through the passage gate 633 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine through the receiving portion 634. When the area passage gate 633 is in the closed state, the game ball rides on the tongue-shaped member 632 as shown in FIG. 104 (b), and the game ball moves sideways along the inclination of the surface of the tongue-shaped member 632. , And is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine through the receiving portion 634. When the game ball enters the first hole 631a, the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine through the receiving portion 634 as shown in FIG. 104 (c).

[Control Circuit of Third Embodiment]
FIG. 105 is an example of a block diagram illustrating a control circuit according to the third embodiment. The control circuit shown in FIG. 105 is different from the control circuit according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 9 in that a V solenoid 635 and a V passing gate switch 636 are further connected to the main control circuit 100. The V solenoid 635 is driven and controlled by the main control circuit 100. When the V passage gate switch 636 detects a game ball, a detection signal is transmitted from the V passage gate switch 636 to the main control circuit 100.

[Function Description of Third Embodiment]
In the third embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment is provided with a function of determining the operation and termination of the certainty changing function based on the number of game balls passing through the V-region passing gate 633. .
FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the operations of the special electric auditors 600 (large winning opening solenoid 620) and the V solenoid 635 in the big hitting game state in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the number of round games in the big hit game state is 4 or 10 rounds. FIG. 106 shows a case where the number of round games is 10 rounds. As shown in FIG. 106, the V-region passing gate 633 is opened and closed in synchronization with opening and closing of the special winning opening 540 in all rounds. That is, in all round games, there is a possibility that the game ball passes through the V passage gate switch 636. Similarly, when the number of round games is four, in all round games, there is a possibility that game balls pass through the V-pass gate switch 636.

For example, when the probability change function is operated under the condition that three or seven game balls pass through the V-region passing gate 633, the player can select the following game in the big hit game by the 10 round probability change big hit. become.
(1) At the time of three passes, the launch of the game balls is stopped, and the remaining rounds are waited for.
(2) Stop the launch of the game ball at the time of passing 7 balls, and wait for the remaining round to end.
(3) Launch game balls in all 10 rounds.
Here, when the launch of the game ball is stopped at the time when three or seven game balls pass, there is a possibility that the game ball remains in the cloon device 630, and the game ball passes through the V passage gate switch 636. If four passes occur, the probability change function may end. For this reason, the hitting method (1) is most likely to keep the probable change state, but on the other hand, the number of acquired balls is reduced. In the method of hitting (2), the risk of ending the probable change state is higher than in (1), but the number of obtained balls increases. In the method of hitting (3), it is difficult to keep the probability change state, but on the other hand, the number of obtained balls by one big hit becomes the largest. Therefore, the method of hitting (3) is effective when the game time is limited, for example, just before the store closes.

  In the third embodiment, the period during which the V-pass gate switch 636 is valid is a period from the start of the round game to the end of the interval between rounds. In particular, in the last round (10 rounds), This is the period from the start of the final round game to the end of the ending. When the V passage gate switch 636 is enabled, the V passage gate switch 636 transmits a detection signal to the main CPU 101 when a game ball passes the V region passage gate 633. When the V passage gate switch 636 is invalidated, the detection signal is not transmitted from the V passage gate switch 636 to the main CPU 101 even when the game ball passes the V region passage gate 633. The V solenoid 635 can be operated only in the round in which the V passage gate switch 636 is made valid, and the V region passage gate 633 is opened and closed. In the round in which the V passage gate switch 636 is not valid, the V solenoid 635 does not operate, so the V region passage gate 633 is closed.

[Processing by main control circuit]
The processing by the main control circuit in the third embodiment includes the switch input detection processing shown in FIG. 30 in the first embodiment, the special symbol display time management processing in the special symbol control processing shown in FIG. The processing during the opening of the winning opening, the waiting time management processing before reopening of the winning opening, the big hit end interval processing, and the special symbol game end processing are different.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch input detection process performed by the main CPU 101 according to the third embodiment. In the processing shown in FIG. 107, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 107, the switch input detection processing of the third embodiment is the same processing from Steps S61 to S64 in the first embodiment, and when the processing of Step S64 ends, the V region passage detection processing (Step S65) is executed.

  In step S65, when the main CPU 101 receives the detection signal from the V passing gate switch 636, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the count value stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 used as a V counter and updates the storage value. Perform the following processing. That is, the V counter counts the number of times that the V passing gate switch 636 detects a game ball in the big hit game state. When the processing in step S65 ends, the switch input detection processing ends.

[Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 101 in the third embodiment. In the processing shown in FIG. 108, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 36 is denoted by the same step number, and detailed description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 108, in the special symbol display time management process of the third embodiment, all the processes of steps S131 to S141 in the first embodiment can be executed, and when the process of step S139 ends, the V pass A process of setting information for setting a round in which the gate switch 636 is enabled in the main RAM 103 (step S800).

  In step S800, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit. If the big hit is determined, the main CPU 101 performs a setting to enable the V passing gate switch 636 in all rounds including the interval between rounds. If it is not determined that the jackpot is a probability change jackpot, a setting is made to enable the V passing gate switch 636 in all rounds. When the processing in step S800 ends, the special symbol display time management processing ends.

[Big hit start interval management processing]
The big hit start interval management process of the third embodiment is different from the big hit start interval management process of the first embodiment in that when the V pass gate switch 636 is valid, the V region pass gate 633 is opened simultaneously with the big win port 540. This is the processing for causing the processing to be performed.

[Processing while opening the big winning opening]
The processing during the opening of the special winning opening of the third embodiment is different from the processing during the opening of the special winning opening according to the first embodiment, when the V passing gate switch 636 is effective. Is added to the process for closing the.

[Management processing of waiting time before reopening of the winning opening]
The waiting time management process before reopening of the special winning opening according to the third embodiment is different from the processing of managing the waiting time before reopening of the special winning opening according to the first embodiment, when the V passing gate switch 636 is effective. A process for re-opening the V region passage gate 633 at the same time as 540 is added. That is, in the round game in the case of the probability change big hit in the third embodiment, since the special winning opening 540 and the V region passing gate 633 are simultaneously opened and closed, the V region passing gate 633 is also closed when the special winning opening 540 is closed. Closed. Therefore, even if the game ball remains in the disk plate 631 of the cloon device 630 at the time when the special winning opening 540 is closed, the game ball does not pass through the V region passing gate 633.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end interval process by the main CPU 101 in the third embodiment. In the processing shown in FIG. 109, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 38 is denoted by the same step number, and detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the special symbol display time management processing of the third embodiment is different from the processing of steps S161 to S175 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 38 in that step S801 is performed between steps S165 and S166. Is added.

  In step S801, the main RAM 103 performs a process of turning on a big hit end flag. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S166.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game end processing by the main CPU 101 in the third embodiment.
First, as shown in FIG. 110, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value “08” indicating the end of the special symbol game (step S802). If it is determined that the value indicates the special symbol game, the process proceeds to step S803. If the control state flag is not determined to be the value indicating the end of the special symbol game, the present subroutine is terminated.

  In step S803, the main CPU 101 determines whether the big hit end flag is on. If it is determined that the big hit end flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S804. If it is not determined that the big hit end flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S808.

  In step S804, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the probable change flag is on. If it is determined that the probable change flag is on, the process proceeds to step S805. If it is not determined that the probable change flag is on, the process proceeds to step S807.

  In step S805, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the V counter satisfies a certain change transition condition, for example, whether the value of the V counter is 3 or 7. If it is determined that the value of the V counter satisfies the transition condition, the process proceeds to step S807. If it is not determined that the value of the V counter satisfies the transition condition, the process proceeds to step S806. I do.

  In step S806, the main CPU 101 performs a process of turning off the probability change flag and the time saving flag. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S807. In other words, even if it is a probability change big hit, if the value of the V counter is not the specified number (for example, 3 or 7), the game shifts to the normal game state without the low probability time saving after the big hit game state ends.

  In step S807, the main CPU 101 performs a process of turning off the big hit end flag. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S808.

  In step S808, the main CPU 101 executes a process of setting a value “00” indicating a special symbol storage check as a control status flag. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  According to the third embodiment of the present invention configured as described above, the first special passage area (V-area passage gate 633) through which the game medium can pass only in the special game state (big hit game state); Counting means (V counter) for counting the number of game media that have passed through the first special passage area during the special game state, and counting means (V) after all unit games (round games) have been completed. Based on the count value of the counter, it is determined whether or not the game state after the special game state (big hit game state) is a high probability game state (probable change state). For this reason, by progressing the unit game (round game) while counting the number of game media that have passed through the first special passage area (V area passage gate 633), the player intentionally enters the high probability state. You can choose to keep or not. Thereby, when the count value of the counting means reaches a number that determines the maintenance of the high probability state, the privilege (the number of prize balls) decreases, but the emission of the game medium is stopped in order to maintain the high probability state. Although the possibility of the probability state increases, it is possible to make the player select to continue firing game balls to increase the privilege (the number of prize balls). By this, it is possible to select a jackpot game state according to the player's request, such as selecting the former if the player wants to enjoy the game for a long time, and selecting the latter if the player wants to end the game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with high interest.

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
A modification of the third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, all rounds are targeted for V rounds. On the other hand, in a modification of the third embodiment, a specific round is targeted for V rounds. In other words, This includes both rounds that are subject to the V round and rounds that are not the subject of the V round.

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the special electric auditors 600 (large winning opening solenoid 620) and the V solenoid 635 in the big hit gaming state in the modification of the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the number of round games in the jackpot game state is 4 rounds or 10 rounds, and 1 round and 10 rounds are V round targets. Specifically, in the process of step S800 shown in FIG. 108, one round and ten rounds are set as valid rounds of the V passing gate switch 636.

For example, when three or seven game balls pass through the V-region passing gate 633 and the probability change function is activated, the player can select the following game in the big hit game by the 10 round probability change big hit. become.
(1) The firing of the game balls is stopped at the time of three passes in the first round, and the firing of the game balls is restarted after the start of the second round. At the end of the 9th round, the launch of the game ball is stopped, and the final 10 rounds are waited for.
(2) In the first round, the emission of the game balls is stopped at the time of passing seven balls, and the emission of the game balls is restarted after the start of the second round. Then, if seven game balls have not passed through the V-pass gate switch 636 before the start of the tenth round, the game balls are fired in the tenth round and fired when the seven game balls pass. And wait for the last 10 rounds to end.
(3) Launch game balls in all 10 rounds.
In the method of hitting (1), the probable change state is most likely to continue, but the number of obtained balls is reduced because there is no large winning opening in the tenth round. The hitting method of (2) has a higher risk of ending the probable change state than that of (1), but the number of balls obtained increases in the tenth round due to the winning of the special winning opening. In the hitting method (3), the number of obtained balls is the largest, but the risk that the probable change state ends is considerably increased. The hitting method (3) is effective when the remaining game time is short, such as immediately before the store closes, or when it is desired to end the game early.

  According to the third embodiment and the modified example configured as described above, the player selects whether to continue the probability variation function or to take out the ball, and the technical intervention of the player is indispensable. Thereby, the width of the game can be expanded.

In the above-described third embodiment and its modified example, the probability change transition condition is that the value of the V counter is a predetermined number such as 3 or 7, but the present invention is not limited to this. Besides,
(1) The probability transition condition is that the value of the V counter is in a range of a preset number range, for example, the value of the V counter is in the range of 10 to 30. (2) The probability transition condition is that the value of the V counter is an odd number. Can be used as the positive change transition condition.

  In the third embodiment described above, all rounds are targeted for V rounds, and the opening time of the V region passage gate 633 is common, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the opening time of the V-region passing gate 633 may be made variable in accordance with the special symbol having a large hit. Specifically, if the odd pattern of the special symbols is the same odd number arranged in a row and the probability is a large hit, the opening time of the V-region passing gate 633 in the case of “3” or “7” is set to “1”, The opening time of the V-region passing gate 633 in the case of “5” or “9” may be shorter. Accordingly, in the case of the probability change of “3” or “7”, since the game ball cannot easily pass through the V-region passing gate 633, it is possible to increase the number of round games required to satisfy the condition for transition to the probability change. And you can expect more payout balls.

  Further, according to the above-described third embodiment and the clune device 630 according to the modified example, the two holes 631a and 631b are formed, but the number of the holes 631b may be increased. In this case, the possibility that the game ball goes to the V-region passing gate 633 is reduced, so that if the game ball simply passes through the V-region passing gate 633, it is possible to satisfy the certain change transition condition.

  In the third embodiment and its modified example described above, the clune device 630 into which the game ball that has passed through the special winning opening 540 enters is mounted, but the clune device 630 may be omitted. The third embodiment is applicable to any pachinko gaming machine having a V-region passing gate 633 in the special winning opening 540.

  In the third embodiment described above, in the process of step S800 shown in FIG. 108, only one pattern of all rounds is set as the valid round of the V-pass gate switch 636. A plurality of patterns such as a final round, an odd round, an even round, and the like may be provided, and a random number lottery may be used to select and determine the pattern. Further, when the main CPU 101 receives the detection signal from the V passing gate switch 636, the information is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and the sub control circuit 200 sends information regarding the number of game balls passing through the V area passing gate 633 to the game. Control provided to the user may be performed. For example, if the gaming state before the jackpot gaming state was the probable game state, the number of game balls is displayed, or if the number of game balls is the condition for shifting to the probable game state, a special effect is performed. It may be executed.

  Further, the third embodiment described above employs a so-called “probable variable loop machine”, which is the same as the first embodiment. However, the predetermined number of times, for example, the number of times the special symbol changes The present invention is also applicable to a so-called “ST machine” in which the high-probability gaming state ends when a period until the game time elapses.

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, even if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is not immediately controlled to the jackpot gaming state by itself. Based on this, the condition device is activated, and the game ball passes (or enters) a predetermined region (V region) on the premise that the condition device has been activated (the jackpot determination result by the special symbol lottery is a big hit). Based on the result, the accessory continuous operation device (for example, the attacker unit 510) is operated.

  FIG. 112 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. In the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 112, members having the same configuration or the same function as those of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 112, the game board unit 17 of the fourth embodiment has a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which a shot game ball can be rolled down and formed, and a substantially central portion of the game area 20. A common electric accessory 470, an attacker unit 510, a first starting port 420, two passing gates 49, 49, and general winning ports 53 to 56 are provided. In FIG. 112, the illustration of the game nails and windmills other than the game nails arranged in the first starting port 420, the two pass gates 49, 49, and the general winning ports 53 to 56 is omitted. The gaming board unit 17 of the first embodiment has the second starting port 440, but the gaming board unit 17 of the fourth embodiment does not have the second starting port 440.

  The first starting port 420 is arranged directly below the ordinary electric accessory 470, and the attacker unit 510 is arranged immediately below the ordinary electric accessory 470. Further, the general winning openings 54 and 55 are arranged on both sides of the first starting opening 420, and the general winning openings 53 and 56 are arranged beside the general winning openings 54 and 55. In addition, passing gates 49, 49 are arranged at predetermined intervals right above the general winning openings 54, 55.

  The ordinary electric accessory 470 in the fourth embodiment operates based on the result of the hit determination by the ordinary symbol lottery, like the ordinary electric accessory 460 in the first embodiment, but has a V region inside. The difference from the ordinary electric accessory 460 in the first embodiment is that a V passage port 904 is arranged.

[Composition of ordinary electric accessory 470]
The ordinary electric accessory 470 includes a case body 901, a pair of blade members 902 a and 902 b, a cruising device 903, a V passage port 904, and a losing passage port 905.
In the transparent panel 172 in the fourth embodiment, a hole for fixing the case body 901 is formed at the center, and the case body 901 is fitted and fixed to this hole. Holes 901a and 901b large enough to allow a game ball to enter are formed at the top of the left and right side surfaces at the edge of the case body 901. The case body 901 is configured such that a game ball can enter the inside of the case body 901 only from the holes 901a and 901b.

  The pair of blade members 902a and 902b are arranged so as to close the holes 901a and 901b from the outside. One end of the pair of blade members 902a and 902b is provided below the holes 901a and 901b in the case body 901. It is rotatably fixed. For this reason, the other ends of the pair of blade members 902a and 902b approach and separate from the upper portions of the holes 901a and 901b in the case body 901, so that the holes 901a and 901b are opened and closed by the pair of blade members 902a and 902b. You. A blade opening / closing solenoid 940 (see FIG. 118) is connected to the pair of blade members 902a and 902b, and the pair of blade members 902a and 902b interlock with the blade opening / closing solenoid 940.

  When the pair of blade members 902a and 902b are driven by the blade opening / closing solenoid 940, the normal electric accessory 470 transitions between an open state where game balls easily pass and a closed state where game balls hardly pass. (Drive) is possible. When the pair of blade members 902a and 902b are driven, the pair of blade members 902a and 902b are positioned below the holes 901a and 901b. Therefore, a game ball riding on the pair of blade members 902a and 902b can enter the inside of the case body 901.

  Inside the case body 901, a general winning opening switch 941 (see FIG. 118) through which a game ball that has entered the inside of the case body 901 passes, and a cloon device 903 through which a game ball that passes through the general winning opening switch 941 passes. A V passing port 904 through which a game ball passing through a specific route in the cloon device 903 can pass, and a loss passing port 905, 905 through which a game ball passing through a route other than the specific route in the cloon device 903 can pass. I have. A V-pass gate switch (see FIG. 118) 950 is arranged at the V-pass port 904.

[Configuration of the cloon device 903]
FIGS. 113A and 113B are explanatory diagrams showing a schematic configuration of the clune device 903, in which FIG. 113A is a side view, and FIGS. As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the clean device 903 includes disk plates 931, 933, and 935. They are arranged at equal intervals. Further, as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) to 113 (d), the disk plate 931, the disk plate 933, and the disk plate 935 have the same shape.

  Further, the disk plate 931 has a shallow concave surface, and as shown in FIG. 113 (b), a first hole 931a and a second hole 931a having a size large enough to allow a game ball to pass through the center. A hole 931b and a third hole 931c are formed, and are arranged at equal intervals so as to surround the center of the disc 931.

  Similarly, the disc plate 933 has a first hole portion 933a, a second hole portion 933b, and a third hole portion 933c, and the disc plate 935 similarly has a first hole portion 935a and a second hole portion 935b. And a third hole 935c. The disk plate 931, the disk plate 933, and the disk plate 935 have a first hole 931a, 933a, 935a, a second hole 931b, 933b, 935b when the disk plate 931 is viewed from above in the axial direction. The positions of the third holes 931c, 933c, 935c coincide with each other.

  Then, when the case body 901 in which the clean device 903 is disposed is installed on the transparent panel 172, the first holes 931a, 933a, 935a are on the front side, and the second holes 931b, 933b, 935b and Three holes 931c, 933c, 935c are arranged on the rear side. For this reason, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the passage of the game ball to the first holes 931a, 933a, and 935a.

  On the back side of the disc 931, there are provided guide portions 932 a, 932 b, and 932 c for guiding game balls that have passed through the first hole 931 a, the second hole 931 b, and the third hole 931 c. Since the guide portions 932a, 932b, and 932c are slightly inclined downward, the game ball moves along the guide portions 932a, 932b, and 932c.

  The guide portion 932a extends in an arc shape from the first hole portion 931a to the outer peripheral side of the disk plate 931. The outlet of the guide portion 932a is arranged on the outer peripheral portion of the disk plate 933, and the circumferential direction of the disk plate 933. Is facing. The guide portion 932b and the guide portion 932c extend in the radial direction, and the outlet of the guide portion 932a is disposed on the outer peripheral portion of the disk plate 933 and faces in the radial direction of the disk plate 933.

  Similarly, guide portions 934a, 934b, and 934c are provided on the back side of the disk plate 933. The guide portions 934a, 934b, and 934c have the same shape as the guide portions 932a, 932b, and 932c, and thus description thereof is omitted. Note that the disc 935 does not include a member for guiding the game ball that has passed through the third holes 931c, 933c, and 935c.

  In addition, the case body 901 has a bottom surface facing the game ball 903 at a lower portion of the clown device 903 with an interval that allows game balls to pass through. The bottom surface is inclined downward from the rear to the front, and a V passing port 904 and a loss passing port 905 are arranged at the front end of the bottom face. The V passing port 904 is disposed at the center, and the loss passing ports 905 are disposed on both sides thereof. The V passage port 904 is set on a path on which a game ball that has passed through the first hole 935a of the third circular plate 935 of the crooning device 903 rolls downward on the bottom surface.

FIGS. 114 to 116 are explanatory diagrams showing rolling paths of game balls in the cloon device 903. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 114 (a), when the pair of blade members 902a, 902b rotate, the holes 901a, 901b are opened, and the game ball passes through the hole 901a, and the normal electric accessory 470 is formed. When entering the inside, the game ball is guided to the first-stage disc 931, and as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the game ball goes around the outer periphery of the disc 931.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (c), when the game ball enters the second hole 931b, it is discharged to the outside of the cloon device 903 through the guide portion 932b. The released game balls pass through the loss passing port 905 and are discharged out of the pachinko game machine as shown in FIG. 114 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 115 (b), when the game ball enters the first hole 931a from the state shown in FIG. 114 (b), it is guided to the second plate 933 by the guide 932a. Are discharged to the outer peripheral side of the disk plate 933 in the circumferential direction. The released game ball orbits around the outer periphery of the disc 933, as shown in FIG. 115 (c).

  When the game ball of the disc 933 enters the third hole 933c, it is discharged to the outside of the clean device 903 through the guide portion 934c. The released game balls pass through the loss passing port 905 and are discharged out of the pachinko game machine as shown in FIG. 116 (a).

  When the game ball of the disk plate 933 enters the first hole 933a, it is guided to the third-stage disk plate 935 by the guide portion 934a, and along the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral side of the disk plate 935. Released. The released game balls orbit around the outer periphery of the disc 935.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), when the game ball enters the first hole 935a, it moves straight down on the bottom plate and passes through the V passage opening 904. When a game ball enters the second hole portion 935b and the third hole portion 935c, the game ball passes through the loss passage opening 905.

[Configuration of Attacker Unit 510]
FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic configuration of the attacker unit 510, where (a) is a front view, (b) is a plan view, (c) is a side view including a partial cross section, and (d) is FIG. It is a side view showing the state where large winning opening solenoid 620 was driven in (c).

  The attacker unit 510 includes a base member 511 having a case body 512 forming a special winning opening 540, a shutter 515 capable of moving forward and backward, opening and closing the special winning opening 540, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 driving the shutter 515. Is provided.

  The base member 511 can be attached to the lower center of the transparent panel 172, and has a hole 513 through which a game ball can pass, a case body 512 extending forward from the hole 513, and a hole formed above the hole 513. And a plurality of rib portions 514 formed.

  The case body 512 has a hollow rectangular parallelepiped in which the upper surface and the rear surface are open. The front-rear width of the inside of the case body 512 is large enough to allow game balls to enter, and the left-right width is about the length of six game balls arranged.

  The vertical width of the hole 513 is slightly larger than the vertical width of the case 512, and when the base member 511 is viewed from the front, a gap is formed between the upper end of the case 512 and the upper end of the hole 513. The shutter member 515 is arranged in this gap.

  The rib portion 514 has a length approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball, and protrudes in a semi-cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction. The shutter member 515 is a rectangular plate-shaped member disposed above the case body 512. The upper surface of the shutter member 515 is gently inclined downward in the left-right direction from the center.

  When the special winning opening solenoid 620 is not driven, the special winning opening 540 is closed as shown in FIG. 117 (c). In this case, a part of the game ball flowing down the game area 20 tries to move in the left-right direction on the shutter member 515. At this time, when the game ball collides with the plurality of ribs 514, the movement of the game ball in the shutter member 515 becomes slow, and as shown in FIG. At the same time, it may be possible to ride on the shutter member 515. In this state, if the special winning opening solenoid 620 is driven to move the shutter member 515 and the special winning opening 540 is opened as shown in FIG. 117 (d), a plurality of game balls can be simultaneously played. 540 will be won.

  The opening / closing control of the shutter member 515 by the special winning opening solenoid 620 will be described later in detail, but the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 becomes a big hit and the game machine shifts to the big hit game preparation state. The game is performed when the game ball shifts to the big hit game state by passing a game ball through the V passage opening 904 in the big hit game preparation state. It should be noted that the result of the jackpot determination performed when a game ball wins in the first starting port 420 is indicated by a special symbol stop display mode in the first special symbol display section 73 and a liquid crystal attached to the case body 901. This is indicated by the stop display mode of the decorative symbol on the display device 16.

[Specifications of pachinko gaming machine of fourth embodiment]
Next, main specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is 1/1, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery is 1/10 with a low probability, 1/1 with a high probability, and 5.5 average rounds. The number of the winning prize balls is eight. In the round game, after the special winning opening 540 is opened, if the number of winnings in the special winning opening 540 (the number counted by the count switch 541) is one, or if there is no winning in the special winning opening 540 for a predetermined time. When the time has elapsed, the special winning opening 540 is closed. In the fourth embodiment, the round game is ended by winning one large winning opening 540. However, since the game balls are easily retained on the shutter member 515, a plurality of game balls can be simultaneously won. , There is a possibility that more prize balls can be obtained.

In addition, the above-mentioned specification is an example,
M: jackpot probability N: average number of rounds at the time of big hit R: number of attackers per round S: number of payout balls at the time of winning the attacker,
M × N × R × S ≦ 10
Are set as appropriate so that is satisfied.
In the fourth embodiment,
1/10 × 5.5 × 1 × 8 = 4.4
And satisfies M × N × R × S ≦ 10.

[Control Circuit of Fourth Embodiment]
FIG. 118 is an example of a block diagram illustrating a control circuit according to the fourth embodiment. The control circuit shown in FIG. 118 is different from the control circuit according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 9 in that a blade opening / closing solenoid 940, a V passing gate switch 950, and a general winning opening switch 941 are further connected to the main control circuit 100. It is. The main control circuit 100 drives and controls the blade opening / closing solenoid 940. When the V-pass gate switch 950 detects a game ball, a detection signal is transmitted from the V-pass gate switch 950 to the main control circuit 100. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, since the second starting port 440 in the first embodiment is omitted, the second special symbol display 74, the second special symbol holding display 76, the second special symbol The starting port switch 441 is omitted.

  Next, a process executed by the main control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. Note that the same processes as those performed by the main control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description is omitted. The processing executed by the main control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is different from the processing executed by the main control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. A detection process and a special symbol display time management process of the first embodiment shown in FIG.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. In the switch input detection processing in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, steps S61 to S64 in the switch input detection processing of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 30 are performed. When step S64 ends, the process moves to step S65.
In step S65, the main CPU 101 performs the V region passage detection processing shown in FIG. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, since the second starting port 440 in the first embodiment is deleted, the second starting port 440 is involved in the starting port winning detection processing in step S61 shown in FIG. 119. The processing, that is, the processing of steps S81 and S84 to S89 in the starting opening winning detection processing in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 31 is not executed, and thus can be omitted.

[V region passage detection processing]
FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of V-region passage detection processing executed in the switch input detection processing by main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 119.

  In step S811, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the V passing gate switch 950 has detected a game ball. If it is determined that the V-pass gate switch 950 has detected a game ball, the process proceeds to step S812. If it is not determined that the V-pass gate switch has detected a game ball, this subroutine is terminated.

  In step S812, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the big hit flag is on. If it is determined that the big hit flag is on, the process proceeds to step S813. If it is not determined that the big hit flag is on, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S813, the main CPU 101 performs a process of turning on the V region passage flag. When this process ends, the subroutine ends.

[Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment partially changes the process of step S135 in the special symbol display time management process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. The processing of step S142 and the processing of step S143 are added between them.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 clears the time reduction counter and clears (turns off) the probability change flag. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S142.
That is, in the processing of step S135 in the special symbol display time management processing of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 36, the time reduction flag is cleared (off), so that the time reduction function is not executed in the big hit game state. On the other hand, in the special symbol display time management processing of the fourth embodiment, since the time reduction flag is not cleared (off), when the big hit determination by the special symbol lottery becomes a big hit in the time reduction game state, the big hit game state , The time saving function is executed.

  In step S142, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the V region passage flag is on. If it is determined that the V-region passing flag is on, the process proceeds to step S143. If it is not determined that the V-region passing flag is on, the special symbol display time management process ends.

  In step S143, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing an OFF value in a storage area of the main RAM 103 functioning as a V area passage flag. When this process ends, the process moves to a step S136. Thereafter, similarly to the first embodiment, the processing of steps S137 to S139 is executed, and the special symbol display time management processing ends.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the big hit flag is set by the main CPU 101 in step S134 shown in FIG. 121, and the main CPU 101 sets the V passing gate switch 950 in step S811 shown in FIG. The jackpot game is started on condition that the detection signal is received from the. For the sake of convenience in the following description, the state from when the main CPU 101 sets the big hit flag to when the detection signal is received from the V passing gate switch 950 will be referred to as a big hit game preparation state. In other words, when the big hit flag is set by the main CPU 101, the game shifts to the big hit game preparation state, and even if the game ball passes through the V passage opening 904 in the game state other than the big hit game preparation state, the shift to the big hit game state is made. Absent.

[Flow of Game of Pachinko Machine of Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described.
In the fourth embodiment, if the stop display mode of the special symbol is the stop display mode of the probability change big hit, the game shifts to the high-probability game state after the end of the big hit game state, and the stop display mode of the special symbol is the stop display mode of the normal big hit. If there is, the game shifts to the low probability game state after the big hit game state ends. When shifting to the high-probability gaming state, the time-saving gaming state continues until the next big hit gaming state ends. Hereinafter, this game state is referred to as a high probability / time saving game state. In the case of transition to the low-probability gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is continued until a specified number of times (for example, four times) of fluctuation and stop display are performed. Hereinafter, this gaming state is referred to as a low probability / time reduction gaming state. In addition, when the specified number of time savings is exhausted in the low-probability / time-saving game state, the game shifts to a low-probability, non-time-saving normal game state.

  In the time-saving game state, the opening time of the holes 901a and 901b when the normal symbol lottery is won is extended, and is longer than the opening time of the holes 901a and 901b in the normal game state when the normal symbol lottery is won.

  In the normal game state, the player operates the firing handle to fire a game ball, and causes the first starting port 420 to win the game ball. When a game ball is won in the first starting port 420, a big hit determination is performed by a special symbol lottery, and the special symbol display unit 73 starts to display a variation of the special symbol. Perform stop display. In synchronization with the change and stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol display section 73, the liquid crystal display device 16 starts the display of the change of the decorative symbol, and performs a stop display in a display mode showing the jackpot determination result after a predetermined period has elapsed.

  When the liquid crystal display device 16 stops and displays in the big hit display mode, the pachinko gaming machine shifts to a big hit game preparation state. At this time, an effect for notifying the player of the transition to the jackpot game preparation state is made, for example, the display of “V” displayed near the V passage opening 904 is emitted. In the big hit game preparation state, the player operates the firing handle 52 to cause the pass gate 49 to pass the game ball. When a game ball is passed through the passage gate 49, the pair of blade members 902a and 902b of the ordinary electric accessory 470 are operated, and the holes 901a and 901b are opened.

  When a game ball enters the inside of the ordinary electric accessory 470 through the holes 901a and 901b, the game ball passes through the clune device 630 and passes through one of the V passing port 904 and the loss passing port 905. Then, when the game ball passes through the V passage opening 904, the state shifts to the jackpot game state, and the attacker unit 510 operates to start the round game.

  After the big hit game state, the player operates the firing handle 52 to make the first starting port 420 win a game ball and aims at the next big hit. Here, in the case of the high-probability / time-saving game state, if the first starting port 420 is won, a big hit is achieved, and after the big hit game ends, the time-saving game state is set. In the case of the low-probability / time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is continued until a specified number of time-saving times (for example, four times) change and stop display are performed.

  In the fourth embodiment, after the final round game is completed, the time reduction function can be executed (the time reduction flag is turned on). No time saving function is performed in the state. On the other hand, when a big hit occurs in the time saving game state, the time saving function is executed in the big hit game preparation state, so that the opening time of the holes 901a and 901b is extended, and the game ball is placed inside the normal electric accessory 470. It is easier to enter. Thereby, the possibility that the game ball passes through the V passage opening 904 is increased.

  In the fourth embodiment configured as described above, the game shifts to the jackpot game preparation state by winning the special symbol lottery, and in this jackpot game preparation state, the game ball is normally passed to the passing gate 49. The pair of blade members 902a and 902b of the electric accessory 470 operate to open the holes 901a and 901b. Then, the game ball that has entered the inside of the ordinary electric accessory 470 through the holes 901a and 901b passes through the V passage opening 904, thereby shifting to the big hit game state. In this manner, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, which is referred to as a feather mono, and falls under the second category defined in the Customs Business Act, can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the player may be able to obtain many prize balls because there is a possibility of winning a probability change big hit and a possibility of continuous winning.

Further, in the high-probability game state, the first starting port 420 wins a game ball to win a jackpot, and the time saving function is executed in the jackpot game preparation state, so that the opening time of the holes 901a and 901b is extended. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time until the next big hit game is started and the number of consumed game balls (the number of balls). Therefore, in the case where the probability variation big hits are continuous, there is a possibility that many prize balls can be acquired in a short time without reducing the number of balls.
As described above, according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a novel pachinko gaming machine that is a wing-shaped thing having a probability varying function.

[Modification of Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
FIG. 122 is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a modified example of the fourth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 122, in the modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 470 is partially different. The ordinary electric accessory 470 in the modification of the fourth embodiment does not have the blade member 902a in the ordinary electric accessory 470 of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 112, and the hole 901a is closed. That is, in the ordinary electric accessory 470 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment, a game ball can enter the inside of the ordinary electric accessory 470 only from the hole 901b opened and closed by the blade member 902b.

  As shown in FIG. 122, in the modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the attacker unit 510 is arranged at the lower right side in the game area 20. That is, in the big hit gaming state, the player fires a game ball on the right side of the game area 20 (so-called right-handed), and causes the game ball to enter the big winning opening 540. An attacker unit 510 according to a modified example of the fourth embodiment is formed such that the upper surface of the shutter member 515 in the attacker unit 510 shown in FIG. 117 is inclined downward from right to left. For this reason, the game ball on the shutter member 515 moves toward the out port 57 side.

  The pass gate 49 is disposed at the center on the right side of the game area 20, and the general winning opening 56 is disposed below the pass gate 49.

  In a modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, the left passage gate 49 and the general winning opening 57 are omitted in the game board unit 17 of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 112. Further, in the game area 20, game nails are arranged on the board surface so that a right-hit game ball can easily approach the passing gate 49 but does not win the first starting port 420. For this reason, in the normal gaming state, the player fires a game ball on the left side of the game area 20 (left-handed), and aims at the first start port 420 for a winning start. When the player wins the special symbol lottery by the start winning at the first starting port 420, the player fires the game ball on the right side of the game area 20 (hits right) and passes the game ball to the pass gate 49. Will be aimed at.

[Flow of Game of Pachinko Machine in Modification of Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described.
First, the player operates the firing handle 52 to make a left-handed hit, and causes the first starting port 420 to win a game ball.
Next, when the liquid crystal display device 16 stops and displays in the big hit display mode, the game shifts to a big hit game preparation state. In the big hit game preparation state, the player operates the firing handle 52 to make a right hit, and causes the passing gate 49 to pass the game ball. When a game ball is passed through the passage gate 49, the pair of blade members 902b of the ordinary electric accessory 470 operates, and the holes 901a and 901b are opened.

When a game ball enters the inside of the ordinary electric accessory 470 through the hole 901b, the game ball passes through the clune device 630 and passes through one of the V passing port 904 and the loss passing port 905.
The big hit game starts when the game ball passes through the V passing port 904, the attacker unit 510 operates, and the big winning port 540 is opened.

  After the big hitting game state is over, the player returns the operation of the firing handle 52 to left-handed, makes the first starting port 420 win a game ball, and aims at the next big hit. Similarly, when the liquid crystal display device 16 is stopped and displayed in the big hit display mode, the player operates the firing handle 52 to perform a right-hand hit, and continues the right-hand until the big hit game state ends, thereby playing the big hit game. After the state ends, the player switches to left-handed.

  In the modified example of the fourth embodiment configured as described above, the effects of the above-described fourth embodiment are exhibited, and a right-hit game ball can easily ride on the shutter member 515, and, for example, the right end of the shutter member 515. The game ball on the side tends to stay on the shutter member 515 for a long time, so that more simultaneous winning can be expected in one round game.

The fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the fourth embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the above.
For example, according to the above-described fourth embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit in the normal game state, the time saving function is not executed in the big hit game preparation state, but the time saving function is executed. Is also good. Specifically, in step S135 shown in FIG. 121, the time saving flag is set (turned on), and the process of setting (turning on) the time saving flag in step S171 shown in FIG. 38 is deleted. The time saving function becomes executable.

  Further, in the modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, a general winning opening switch 941 through which a game ball entering the inside from the holes 901a and 901b passes is provided in the ordinary electric accessory 470. A first starting port switch 421 may be provided instead of the winning port switch 941. As a result, the reserved balls are stored during the big hit game state, and after the big hit game is completed, the variation of the decorative symbol is started in the liquid crystal display device 5 based on the reserved balls. In the case of the high-probability / time-short game state, a big hit is immediately realized. Therefore, except for the normal game state, it is possible to progress the game by right-handing, and the player can enjoy the big hit game with a relaxed feeling without considering the firing intensity of the game ball. .

[18. Appendix]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment described above, the following gaming machine can be provided.

[18-1. First to eighth gaming machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the pitching tendency of each gaming table can be set arbitrarily, a structural element that affects the ball entry rate to the entrance and the balling tendency is determined. Alternatively, it is only possible to change the state of the control element according to the set value, and it cannot be said that the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game entertainment is necessarily large.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving interest. is there.

  In order to solve the first problem, a first gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-1. First gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S73, step S83, step S118);
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing a variable display of a symbol (for example, a special symbol) in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time;
A variation pattern determination unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S78) that determines a variation pattern performed by the display unit based on a result of the lottery;
Fluctuation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a fluctuation pattern table used for determining the fluctuation pattern;
A symbol display control unit that performs the symbol variation display (for example, the special symbol variation display) over a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit, and stops and displays in a manner indicating the result of the lottery. For example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93);
With
The variation pattern table storage means,
A fluctuation pattern table (for example, FIG. 4) that is defined so that the probability that the fluctuation time is determined to be a relatively short fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation B) increases as the set value set by the setting change control unit increases. 13 (variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the higher the set value, the more the number of lotteries per unit time, and thus the more the lottery results. Expectation is raised, and it becomes possible to improve game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A lottery number counting means (for example, main CPU 101) for counting the number of executions of the lottery from a specific time is further provided.
The variation pattern table storage means,
As the setting value set by the setting change control unit increases, the probability of being determined as the short variation pattern becomes higher than the variation pattern table in another variation pattern table (for example, FIG. 15). And a special symbol change time determination table when the indicated change number is 1001 or more.
The variation pattern determination means,
When the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a jackpot lottery of 1001 or more special symbols has been performed after the big hit game state ends), It is characterized in that the variation pattern can be determined using the other variation pattern table.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the number of lotteries executed by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, a variation pattern can be determined using another variation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the set value, the more the number of lotteries per unit time increases remarkably, and when the number of times the lottery is executed is a specific number of times of execution, the degree of expectation of the player is increased, and it is possible to improve the gaming interest. Note that the “predetermined condition” corresponds to, for example, a case where a big hit lottery of a predetermined number or more (for example, 1001 times or more) is performed after the big hit gaming state ends, but is not limited thereto.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is performed. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the process of step S722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the result;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the display of the symbol is changed (for example, the display of the change of the special symbol), the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. May be done. In this case, even if the symbols are not stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery on the symbol change display, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of appropriateness or inadequacy, The game is configured not to proceed. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, a second gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-2. Second gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S73, step S83, step S118);
A display effect (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a symbol effect by a predetermined symbol (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is performed, and a result of the lottery can be indicated by a stop mode of the symbol;
A stop mode determining unit (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S205) that determines a stop mode of the symbol that can be shown on the display unit based on the result of the lottery;
A stop mode table storage unit (for example, the program ROM 202) that stores a stop mode table (for example, a decorative symbol determination table in FIG. 14) used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determining unit;
Symbol effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S207) for controlling the symbols to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determining means;
When the symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, a first mode, a second mode, or a specific mode) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit), a plurality of benefits that are advantageous to the player (For example, the main CPU 101 executing the big hit game control in FIG. 10) for giving any profit among (for example, 4R normal big hit, 4R certain big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R certain big hit),
With
The profit providing means,
The symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit). When the stop mode is a specific stop mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of profits are displayed. Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit with a relatively high degree of advantage (for example, a 10R probability variable jackpot),
The stop mode determining means includes:
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), as the set value set by the setting change control unit increases, the probability that the symbol stop mode is stopped in the specific stop mode is increased. The stop mode of the symbol can be determined so as to be raised.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, the symbol stop mode is stopped in a specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among a plurality of profits. It is possible to increase the probability that the game will be played, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The stop mode determining means includes:
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting value set by the setting change control unit is the same, regardless of the setting value, while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same. , The symbol stop mode is determined so that the probability of the symbol stop mode being stopped in the specific stop mode is increased.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting change is performed while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting. As the set value set by the control means becomes higher, the probability of stopping in the specific stop mode is increased, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit while the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. In addition, even if the stop mode of the symbol is determined to be stopped in the specific stop mode by the stop mode determination unit, a game control unit that controls so that the game cannot proceed (for example, the process of step S722 is executed) Main CPU 101),
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a decorative symbol fluctuating effect) is being performed, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. Sometimes. In this case, even if it is determined that the result of the lottery is a specific result and that the pattern stop mode is to be stopped in the specific stop mode, it is inappropriate in determining whether game information is appropriate or inappropriate. When it is determined that the game is not proceeded. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, a third gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-3. Third game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, including a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118, including both a jackpot lottery and a main symbol determination lottery);
Lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used for the lottery (for example, a table showing the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in FIG. 16 or 17 is a big hit);
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing at least a variable display of symbols,
A symbol display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) for performing a variable display of the symbol and stopping and displaying the symbol in a manner indicating the result of the lottery;
The symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, Toku-zu 1-1 to Toku-zu 1-8, Toku-zu 2-1 to Toku-zu 2-4) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit). When displayed, a profit providing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10) that provides any one of a plurality of profits (for example, 4R normal big hit, 4R certain big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R certain big hit) that are advantageous to the player. A main CPU 101 for executing a jackpot game control);
With
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of lottery tables storing different lottery probabilities for specific profits having a relatively high degree of advantage (for example, 10R probability change big hit) among the plurality of profits in accordance with a set value are stored.
The lottery means,
The lottery is configured to be able to be performed using a lottery table corresponding to a set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the lottery is performed using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits having relatively high advantages differ according to the set value, the setting change control means sets the lottery. It is possible to vary the degree of profit given to the player according to the set value thus set, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The profit providing means,
As the specific profit, at least a special game state advantageous to a player and a high-probability game state in which the game state after the end of the special game state is provided with the profit with a relatively high probability are provided. And
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of tables are stored in which the probability of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state is different depending on a set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state differs according to the set value, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The profit providing means,
As the specific profit, a specific game state in which the lottery is promoted (for example, a time reduction game state) is further provided,
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of tables are stored in which the probability of being controlled to the specific game state is different depending on a set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state is different depending on the set value, so that it is possible to improve the gaming interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
When the symbol fluctuation display is being performed, if the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit, the lottery for the symbol fluctuation display is determined. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so that it cannot proceed even if the result is that the specific profit is given;
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (4), when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the lottery relating to the variable display of the symbols is a result of giving the specific profit, the game cannot be advanced. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-4. The fourth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
A plurality of starting ports including a first starting port and a second starting port provided in the game area;
Special lottery means for performing a special lottery in different lottery modes based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of game balls into each of the plurality of starting ports (for example, a main lottery that can execute the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118) CPU 101);
Special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 for executing the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
Based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game;
With
The special lottery means,
In performing the special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port, the special lottery is performed in accordance with a set value set by the setting change control unit. Can be done differently,
The specific game execution means,
Regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, a higher frequency is obtained when a game ball enters the second start port than when a game ball enters the first start port. The specific game is configured to be executable.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the probability of a specific result can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, and the probability of the specific result can be changed regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means. The specific game is executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second start port than when the game ball enters the first start port. That is, when a game ball is won in the second starting port, it is possible to vary the execution frequency of the specific game in accordance with the set value on the assumption that the specific game is executed at a high frequency. It is possible to improve interest.

  Note that "the specific game can be executed more frequently when a game ball enters the second start port than when a game ball enters the first start port". When a game ball enters the starting port of the game ball, a hit determination (including a probability of 0) for a specific result is performed, but the probability that the specific result is obtained in the hit determination is entered for the second starting port. This includes not only a mode lower than the above but also a mode in which a hit determination situation for a specific result is not performed when a game ball enters the first starting port.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A normal starting port (for example, a pass gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal starting port (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game in FIG. 10);
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), a variable starting control means (for example, , Main CPU 101);
The first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (first starting port 420), and the game ball is moved to the second starting port (first starting port 440). Special symbol variation display control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variation display of the second special symbol based on the approach;
The first game state (for example, a normal game in which both the probable change flag and the time reduction flag are set to OFF) such that the time (for example, an average time of 1000 seconds) of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol affects the progress of the game. State), or a second game state (for example, a shorter time of the variable display (for example, average time 1 sec) of the second special symbol is shorter than a time (for example, an average time 10 sec) of the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to a favorable game state in which the probable change flag is set to ON and the time saving flag is set to OFF;
Is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), in the second gaming state, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol, so that the specific game is executed with high frequency. In addition, it is possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the ordinary lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74);
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the adequacy determination means is inappropriate before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the start port (for example, the second start port). Is determined, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result, the game cannot proceed without executing the specific game by the specific game execution means. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722),
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), even if a game ball enters a starting port (for example, a second starting port), a special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, Before the result of the second special lottery is indicated (for example, during the special symbol change display), the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port) is a specific result (for example, a small hit). Even if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness, the game cannot be advanced before the specific game (for example, the small hit game) is executed. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-5. Fifth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
A starting port provided in the game area,
Special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port,
First special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
A normal starting port (for example, a pass gate 49) provided in the game area,
A normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passing) of a game ball into the normal starting port (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game in FIG. 10);
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (for example, a normal hit), a variable starting control means (for example, , Main CPU 101);
Based on the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port being a specific result (for example, a small hit), the specific area where the specific port is provided Specific area variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so that a game ball can easily enter (for example, receive) a game ball;
A second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on a game ball being received in the specific port provided in the specific area;
With
The specific area variable control means,
The predetermined movable piece is configured to be able to be operated such that the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area may be different according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the probability of a specific result is made different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, a predetermined value is set according to the set value. The operation frequency of the movable piece is different, and the opportunity to give the privilege can be made different according to the set value, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Actuation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means,
The ease of entry (e.g., acceptance) of a game ball into the starting port is changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means (e.g., the probability of a normal hit is changed, By making the execution frequency of the special lottery different according to the set value, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is reduced by the set value. It is characterized in that it is carried out in such a way that it can differ depending on

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area will be different depending on the set value set, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Actuation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means,
By making the probability of the specific result (for example, a small hit) in the special lottery different according to the set value set by the setting change control means, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is improved. Is performed in such a manner as to be different depending on the set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the ease of entry of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) can be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege granted based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area is different depending on the set value set, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74);
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
Before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the starting port, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means, Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, game control means for controlling the specific area variable control means so that the game cannot proceed without activating the predetermined movable piece (for example, the processing of step S722 A main CPU 101 for execution);
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (4), even if a game ball enters the starting port, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is displayed (for example, a special symbol) Of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined to be appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port is a specific result, it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness of the game information Is configured such that the game cannot be advanced before the predetermined movable piece operates. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-6. Sixth game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S73, step S83, step S118);
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit), a special game state control means (for example, executing the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of controlling to a special game state (for example, a big hit game state) Main CPU 101);
A game state control means (for example, a step S169) in which a game state after the special game state is ended can be controlled to an advantageous game state (for example, a high-probability game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A main CPU 101 which proceeds with the game after setting a flag)
After being controlled to the special game state, a counting unit (for example, a main unit) that counts the number of times (for example, the number of loops) in which the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled to the normal game state. CPU 101);
With
The game state control means,
Even when the result of the lottery in the advantageous gaming state is the special result, the special gaming state is configured to be controllable,
When the number counted by the counting means reaches a specified number, the game state after the end of the special game state is controlled to the normal game state,
The prescribed number of times,
The apparatus is characterized in that it can be changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated up to the specified number of times, and the specified number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A specified number determining means for determining the specified number by lottery (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a limiter number lottery);
The prescribed number of times determining means,
The lottery for determining the specified number of times is configured to be performed so that an expected value for the specified number of times is different according to a set value set by the setting change control unit.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), the specified number of times that the special game state and the advantageous game state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for the specified number of times is set by the setting change control means. Therefore, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage unit is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination unit, the counting unit may perform the counting even if the number counted by the counting unit is less than the specified number. A game control means for controlling the number of times counted by the game so that the game cannot proceed without reaching the specified number of times (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722);
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the number of times the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled to the normal game state (that is, the number of loops) does not reach the specified number (that is, during the loop). ), The suitability or inappropriateness of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the game is in a loop, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness, the game cannot be advanced without reaching the specified number of loops. I have. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the first problem, a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-7. Seventh gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S73, step S83, and step S118) capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440). ,
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit) (for example, the big hit game control shown in FIG. 10). A main CPU 101 for execution);
Effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204)) capable of at least executing an opening effect performed at the start of the special game state and an ending effect performed at the end of the special game state;
With
The lottery means,
While performing the lottery in a mode that the higher the set value set by the setting change control means the higher the advantage,
The effect control means,
The opening effect and the ending effect are performed such that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect can be longer as the set value set by the setting change control unit becomes higher. It is characterized by being constituted.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the lottery is performed in a mode in which the higher the set value is, the higher the advantage is, while at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect is performed. Can be longer as the set value is higher. Therefore, in the high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time while improving the game entertainment.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Symbol variation display control means for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
Further comprising
The lottery means,
Regardless of whether or not the special game state is being controlled, it is possible to extract a random number based on winning of a game ball to the starting port,
The adequacy determination means,
Even when it is controlled to the special game state, it is configured to be able to determine the suitability of the game information,
The game control means,
When the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, a game progress non-permission that controls so that the game cannot proceed even if the game is controlled to the special game state. (For example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the appropriateness / inappropriate determination of the game information may be executed even when the gaming machine is controlled to the special gaming state. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed even if the game is controlled to the special game state. At the same time, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

  In order to solve the first problem, an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-1-8. Eighth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
A plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (e.g., a continuously operated left gate 1100) and a second entrance (e.g., a continuously operated right gate 1110);
An entry permitting unit (for example, a sorting device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any of the plurality of entrances;
Different profits (for example, when the number of rounds is different, or when there is a starting port below the entrance), a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the first entrance and when a game ball enters the second entrance. A profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the big hit game control in FIG. 10) capable of giving the player different execution or not);
With
The approach permitting means,
Out of the first entrance and the second entrance, the ease of entry of the game ball is configured to be different according to a set value set by the setting change control means. I do.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), there is a possibility that the profit given to the player differs when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance. Thus, the ease of entry of the game ball between the first entrance and the second entrance can be varied according to the set value set by the setting change control means. In addition, the player can aim at which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, so that the state of the game element according to the setting can be improved while improving the game entertainment. Can be suitably changed.

  Note that "a different profit can be given to a player when a game ball enters the first entrance and when a game ball enters the second entrance", for example, when a game is played at the first entrance. In addition to the case where the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs between when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is a starting port which is a lottery trigger and the other entrance is a lottery This corresponds to the case where the winning port is not a trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Starting ports (for example, a first starting port 5442, a second starting port 440) provided in the game area;
Lottery means (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S73, step S83, step S118) for performing a lottery based on the game ball being received in the starting port;
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing a variable display of the symbol based on the result of the lottery;
Game information relating to the progress of the game including information on the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result on the hold storage and the variable display, the set value) Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
An appropriateness determining unit (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) that determines whether the game information stored in the game information storage unit is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
If the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the player is notified even if a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed without giving a profit;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), during the fluctuation display of the symbol, when the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, but the profit has not been given yet, it is stored in the game information storage means. Appropriate / inappropriate game information is determined in some cases. In this case, when it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability / inappropriateness of the game information even though a profit may be provided to the player, the game proceeds without providing the player with a profit. It is configured so that it cannot be done. As a result, security can be ensured.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery is a special result, at least the first entry port and the second entry port are provided with entry validating means for validating the entry of a game ball (for example, a main device for operating a condition device) CPU 101).
The profit providing means,
When a game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, an 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player,
When a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, a 16R big hit game state) having a profit degree higher than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the player plays the game aiming at the second entrance where a specific profit with a higher profit is likely to be given, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game. Becomes

  According to the first to eighth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest.

[18-2. 9th gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Second task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, for example, anomalies may occur in game setting values and the like, and security is ensured. Is hard to say.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting while improving security.

  In order to solve the second problem, a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S73, S83, and S118) for performing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, reception of a game ball into the first starting port 440);
Symbol variation display control means for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93);
An appropriateness determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) that determines whether or not the game information is appropriate at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of receiving a game ball into the first starting port 440). ,
If the symbol information is determined to be inappropriate when the game information stored in the game information is inappropriate by the appropriateness determination unit while the symbol variation display is being performed, the symbol variation display is performed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so that the game cannot proceed;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the appropriateness / inappropriate determination of the game information may be performed when the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the progress of the game is not permitted even if the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. It is possible to improve.

  According to the ninth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving security.

[18-3. Tenth game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Third subject)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming machine, changing the payout tendency according to the set value does not necessarily imply a light design load. Hard to say.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting while reducing a design load. It is in.

  In order to solve the third problem, a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Random number generating means for generating a random number with a predetermined width (for example, a main CPU 101 for generating a random number value by executing a program);
Random number extracting means for extracting a random number based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S73);
Table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) for storing a lottery table (for example, big hit random number determination table) for defining a total random number (for example, a range of big hit determination random numbers) and a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data); ,
A lottery is performed using the random number extracted by the random number extracting means (for example, the process of step S118), and when the extracted random number is a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data), the game is controlled to a special game state. Possible special game state control means;
With
The table storage means,
A lottery table in which at least the number of the total random numbers is different according to a setting value set by the setting change control means is stored,
The random number generation means,
The apparatus is characterized in that a total number of random numbers specified in the lottery table is generated in accordance with a set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the probability of being controlled to the special gaming state is changed by changing the denominator (the range of the random number for jackpot determination) having a larger number of digits than the numerator (the number of jackpot determination value data). Jackpot probability), it is possible to set the jackpot probability finer for each set value compared to a method in which the range of the jackpot determination random number is fixed and the number of jackpot determination value data is changed according to the set value. It becomes possible.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Symbol variation display control means for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
When a random number is extracted based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the suitability determining means (step S1) determines whether or not the total random number generated by the random number generating means is suitable or not until the symbol variation display is started. S72, the main CPU 101 which performs the processing of step S82);
A game control means (for example, a main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game to be unable to proceed when the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the total random number generated by the random number generating means is determined to be inappropriate, the game is not allowed to proceed. It is possible to finely set the big hit probability for each.

  According to the tenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while reducing the design load.

[18-4. Eleventh and twelfth gaming machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Fourth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, while it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, a player can be arbitrarily set by setting the payout tendency arbitrarily. , There is a possibility that interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately suppressing a decrease in interest while changing the state of a gaming element according to a setting. It is in.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-4-1. Eleventh gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
A plurality of winning ports (for example, a first starting port 5442, a second starting port 440, and general winning ports 53 to 56) provided in the game area and including a starting port;
A privilege granting means (for example, a payout device 350) for granting a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on that a game ball is received in any of the plurality of winning ports;
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing steps S73, S83, and S118) capable of executing a lottery based on a game ball being received in the starting port;
A display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which at least a symbol fluctuation effect performed based on the result of the lottery is performed;
When a fluctuation effect of the symbol is being performed in a specific mode (for example, a reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific winning opening of the plurality of winning openings Setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting setting value information on the setting value set by the setting change control means based on the acceptance of the game ball at
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the setting change control is performed based on the fact that the gaming ball is received in the specific winning opening when the symbol variation effect is performed in the specific mode (for example, the reach effect). Since the setting value information about the setting value set by the means may be suggested, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player becomes suspicious. In addition, when the symbol fluctuating effect is performed in a specific mode, the player may stop firing the game ball, but such a situation can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A specified number determining means for determining the specified number by lottery (for example, a main CPU 101 for performing a limiter number lottery);
A specific mode determination unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S78) that determines whether to perform the symbol fluctuating effect in the specific mode (for example, the reach effect);
A specific winning opening determining means for randomly determining any of the plurality of winning openings as the specific winning opening when it is determined by the specific embodiment determining means that the symbol variation effect is to be performed in the specific mode; (For example, the main CPU 101);
Is further provided.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the specific winning opening is determined not at a fixed winning opening but randomly at any of the plurality of winning openings, so that it is possible to enhance amusement of gaming. It is preferable that the randomly determined specific winning opening be kept secret without being disclosed. As a result, it is interesting for the player to determine which winning opening should be aimed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the setting change control means sets the game information even if a game ball is received in the specific winning opening. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S722) for controlling the game so as not to proceed without suggesting the set value information on the set value;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the fluctuation effect of the symbol is performed, or when the game ball is received in a specific winning opening but the set value information is not suggested yet, the game information storage is performed. Suitability or inadequacy of the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the setting value information may be suggested, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in the determination of suitability or inappropriateness, the setting value set by the setting change control unit is determined. The game cannot be advanced without suggesting the set value information. As a result, security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-4-2. 12th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Starting ports (for example, a first starting port 5442, a second starting port 440) provided in the game area;
Lottery means (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S73, step S83, step S118) for performing a lottery based on the game ball being received in the starting port;
Display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) for performing a variable display of the symbol based on the result of the lottery;
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit) (for example, the big hit game control shown in FIG. 10). A main CPU 101 for execution);
Setting of the set value set by the setting change control means based on satisfying a predetermined condition relating to acceptance of a game ball to the starting port (for example, that an overflow point has reached a predetermined point, etc.) Setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting value information;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the current set value (the set value set by the setting change control means) is determined based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port. Since the setting value information can be suggested, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player becomes suspicious. Further, the execution of the game is promoted so that the game ball is received in the starting port. In addition, `` the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting port are satisfied '' means, for example, that although the game ball was received at the starting port and the upper limit of the holding was reached, It is assumed that there were no points, or points were accumulated when the game ball was accepted at the starting port and it was not suspended because it was at the upper limit of retention but the point reached the predetermined point, etc. But not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and the set value). Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy determining means (main CPU 101 performing steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is suitable or not at a predetermined timing;
Further comprising
The game control means,
When the appropriateness determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball is received in the starting port ( For example, even if the overflow point has reached a predetermined point, etc., a game progress non-permission means (e.g., a game progress non-permission means (e.g., , And a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that a predetermined condition may be satisfied when a game ball is received at the starting port, in the determination of suitability or inappropriateness of the game information performed by the game ball being received by the starting port. When it is determined that the game is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the setting value information on the setting value set by the setting change control means. As a result, security can be ensured.

  According to the eleventh and twelfth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in interest while changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting.

[18-5. 13th gaming machine]

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probability change big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As a gaming machine of this type, the state of a game element (structural element or control element) that affects the rate of ball entry into the entrance and the tendency to pay a ball is determined by a game setting value previously input by predetermined setting input means. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain a game board configuration such as a game nail or an accessory. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity in payout tendency for each game store or each game console.

(Fifth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, payout management may not be easy.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily managing payouts.

  In order to solve the fifth problem, a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 when the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is changed. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different set values (for example, six levels of settings 1 to 6);
Game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means;
Payout means (for example, a payout device 350) for paying out game media based on winnings as a result of the game;
Based on the result of the lottery performed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition being a specific result (for example, a big hit), a special game execution means (for example, A main CPU 101 for executing the jackpot game control in FIG. 10);
Data totaling means (for example, a payout / launch control circuit 300) capable of totalizing data relating to the game medium paid out by the payout means;
A data display control unit (main CPU 101) for displaying data aggregated by the data aggregation unit in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334);
With
The data aggregation means includes:
All history totaling means for totalizing the data based on all game histories,
A set value-based history tally unit that totals the data based on the game history for each set value,
The data display control means,
A gaming machine configured to display data totalized by the all history totaling means and / or data totalized by the set value-specific history totaling means.
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), either one or both of the data totaled by the total history totaling means and the data totaled by the set value-specific history totaling means can be displayed. Ball management can be performed easily.

  According to a thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can easily manage payouts.

[18-6. 14th gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. If the above-mentioned big hit is a probable big hit, after the big hit game ends, it is controlled to the high probability game state.

  As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed is disclosed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, and thus the exchange of storage means for storing effect data necessary for executing the effect is performed. Is unnecessary, and waste can be eliminated.

(Sixth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a possibility that simply changing the specifications may lack interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem, a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 and an operation of turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game performance is determined in accordance with the set value. Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6)
A game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game with the game property based on the set value set by the setting change control means;
With
The game control means,
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, processing of step S73, step S83, step S118) based on a game property according to the set value set by the setting change control means;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, big hit game control in FIG. 10) in which a privilege corresponding to the set value set by the setting change control means is provided based on the result of the lottery;
At least.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to execute a game with a different game property based on the set value set by the setting change control means on one gaming machine. It is possible to give a variety of ways to utilize the gaming machine.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The game control means,
When the lottery is set to the first set value among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, if the lottery is not won within a predetermined period, the high probability state is set. A first game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a game under a game property (for example, ST specification) for ending the game,
When the plurality of set values are set to the second set value, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. A second game controller (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a game under continuous game characteristics (for example, a probable loop specification);
At least.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), although both the game property by the first game control means and the game property by the second game control means are controlled to the high-probability game state, the first game control means The high-probability gaming state may end prematurely without continuing to the next big-hit gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state is controlled to the next special gaming state by the second gaming control means. It is greatly different in that it is continuously executed until In this way, it is possible to switch between two seemingly similar but substantially different game characteristics so that the manager of the gaming machine can use the pachinko gaming machine with a wider range. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving entertainment.

  According to the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[18-7. 15th to 26th gaming machines]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There is known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Seventh task)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change the set value or confirm the set value, or set the set value due to noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as changes in

  Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by a person having authority, and the management requires convenience.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a fifteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-1. 15th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and an information screen for restricting the display of the information screen during the execution of the game even if the predetermined operation is performed It is characterized by having limiting means (for example, a sub CPU 201 for ending the hole menu task when NO is determined in step S301, and a sub CPU 201 for executing the process in step S315 when determining YES in step S314).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, if the power is not turned on while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a sixteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-2. Sixteenth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed, and at least one set value (For example, the command output port 106 and the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, the work RAM 203) capable of storing the set value information as history information;
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
The display control means,
A first screen display control means for displaying a first screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 66) in which history information not including the setting value information among the history information is displayed based on the predetermined operation; (For example, the sub CPU 201 displaying the setting change / confirmation history screen of FIG. 66);
Second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 68) showing history information including at least the set value information on condition that the first screen is displayed. (For example, a sub CPU 201 that displays a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 68).

  According to the gaming machine of (1), by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information, the time information related to the setting operation information, and the setting value information are displayed as history information. Therefore, it is possible to cope with various problems related to the set value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  In addition, when a predetermined operation is performed, first, a first screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 66) in which history information not including setting value information among history information is displayed, is displayed. On the condition that the screen is displayed, a second screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 68) showing history information including setting value information is displayed.

  The transmitting means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately. The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the information has been updated. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The second screen display control means includes:
The second screen is configured to be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the second screen showing the history information including the set value information is displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the set value information can be easily browsed. It is not possible to prevent the setting value information from being browsed for the purpose of fraud. The specific condition is, for example, a case where an appropriate password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and information for restricting the display of the information screen even when the predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game It has a screen limiting means.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, if the power is not turned on while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a seventeenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-3. 17th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
Display control means capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed, based on a predetermined operation;
After the information screen is displayed, the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a command for generating an effect control object is received), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information is displayed. And information screen display restricting means (for example, the sub CPU 201 executing the hole menu display prohibiting process in step S316) for restricting the display of the screen.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  In addition, the displayed information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, but the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. For this reason, once the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information screen cannot be browsed, and even if an unauthorized person attempts to browse illegally, it cannot be easily browsed and security can be secured. Becomes

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, an eighteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-4. 18th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
A normal screen (e.g., a guide initial image) that can be viewed by an unspecified person (e.g., a player) and a specific screen (e.g., a gaming machine administrator) that can be viewed only by A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying any one of a plurality of screens including an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which history information is displayed on the display means; , And
The display control means,
The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is turned on when at least the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is turned on). Characterized in that it is configured to be displayed on the display.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the predetermined display means includes a normal screen that can be browsed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a gaming machine manager) And an information screen that can be viewed only by the user. The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is not displayed only when the power is turned on, and is turned on at least in a state where the setting operation means is operated. It is configured not to be displayed unless there is. Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by an unspecified person who does not have the authority, and it is possible to suppress unauthorized viewing.

  By the way, the above normal screen may not be interpreted as being viewable by an unspecified person, for example, when only the player who has registered as a member can view it, Since anyone can browse (if there is only a desire to browse), it can be said that the screen is a normal screen that can be browsed by an unspecified person. On the other hand, the information screen cannot be viewed even if the user wants to view the information screen. For example, the information screen is a screen that can be viewed only by an authorized person such as a gaming machine administrator.

  Furthermore, in the information screen that can be browsed only by a specific person, the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information, so that it is possible to deal with various problems related to the setting value. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen restriction means for restricting the display of the information screen during execution of the game (for example, NO in step S301) The sub-CPU 201 terminates the hole menu task when determined, and the sub-CPU 201 executes the process of step S315 when determined to be YES in step S314).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, if the power is not turned on while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a nineteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-5. 19th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed, based on a predetermined operation;
An information erasing unit (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes processes such as step S3066 and step S3160) for erasing the history information from the second storage unit when a specific operation is received,
The information erasing means,
It is configured to receive the specific operation only when a specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Moreover, when a specific operation (for example, an operation of pressing the main button 662 after selecting the item of “clear”) is received, the history information is erased. Only when the condition is satisfied (for example, when the input password is appropriate), it can be accepted. For this reason, for example, even if an unauthorized person attempts to delete the history of the change of the set value, the confirmation of the set value, or the browsing of the set value for the purpose of fraud, the erase cannot be performed unless a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraud history from being intentionally erased. Further, for those who have the authority, the history information can be deleted, so that the convenience can be improved.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The transmitting means,
It is possible to further transmit setting value information about the one setting value,
The second storage means,
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means,
It is possible to display an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen in FIG. 68) in which the history information includes the setting value information,
The information erasing means,
The history information including the set value information is deleted from the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as setting value information. In addition, since such a useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, convenience can be improved.

  The transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The information erasing means,
When the history information is deleted from the second storage means, only a part of the history information stored in the second storage means as the history information can be deleted.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the history information to be deleted from the history information stored in the second storage means can be selected by an authorized person, so that the convenience is improved. For example, the history information is displayed by associating one set operation information, one date and time information, and one set value information (for example, see FIG. 68). The information erasing means may erase the associated history information (for example, for each No shown in FIG. 68), or may erase the information for each of a plurality of items of information included in the history information ( For example, all of the items of the date and time, the operation type, and the set value shown in FIG. 68 may be deleted.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-6. 20th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
The setting operation information includes:
It is information that can distinguish the operation type of the information indicating that the one set value has been changed or the information indicating that the one set value has been confirmed. ,
The display control means,
Regardless of the type of the setting operation information, a list information screen (for example, a list screen) in which the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are all shown as history information;
A specific information screen (for example, a narrowing screen) in which the setting operation information, the time information, and the set value information corresponding to a specific type of the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be selectively displayed. It is characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Moreover, regardless of the type of the setting operation information, the setting operation information, the time information and the setting value information all correspond to a specific type of the setting operation information, and an information screen of a list shown as history information. Since the setting operation information, the time information, and the set value information can be selectively displayed on a specific information screen displayed as history information, the convenience of an operator (for example, a gaming machine administrator) is improved. Can be.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The display control means,
Only when a specific condition is satisfied, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the list information screen and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the history information is browsed for the purpose of fraud. Can be suppressed. The specific condition is, for example, a case where an appropriate password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The transmitting means,
It is possible to further transmit setting value information about the one setting value,
The second storage means,
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means,
An information screen in which the setting information is included in the history information can be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as setting value information. In addition, since such a useful information can be deleted by an authorized person, convenience can be improved.

  The transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-first gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-7. 21st gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
Based on a predetermined operation, a normal screen (for example, a hole menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (in which the history information is displayed) A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen);
The information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until YES is determined in step S312, step S313 or step S314), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display of the information screen is restricted. Information screen display restricting means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S315 when YES is determined in step S312, step S313, or step S314),
The second storage means,
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, a browsing history indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information,
Until the display of the information screen is restricted, even if the number of times the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen is a plurality of times, as one browsing history. It is configured to be stored.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  Further, the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied, but the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  The information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen. At this time, the browsing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the information screen is displayed multiple times by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen until the display of the information screen is restricted, it is recorded as one set history information. Is done. This makes it difficult for a person who has changed settings, confirmed settings, browsed an information screen, or the like for the purpose of fraud to intentionally create a large number of browsing histories. In particular, in the case of the browsing history, unlike the change or confirmation of the set value, the browsing is performed a plurality of times without going through the process of turning on the power while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). The effect is great because it is possible to create a large number of histories intentionally.

  Note that the setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-second gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-8. 22nd gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example, which can distinguish whether the one set value has been changed or the one set value has been confirmed) Transmission means (for example, the command output port 106 and the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55) capable of transmitting the setting operation command).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off recovery command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing setting change history information or setting confirmation history information as history information;
Based on a predetermined operation, a normal screen (for example, a hole menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (in which the history information is displayed) Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change / confirmation history screen),
The second storage means,
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, browsing history information indicating that the information screen has been browsed, can be stored as one of the history information,
Further, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated,
When the confirmation of the one set value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, while both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed,
When the one set value is changed and the information screen is viewed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  By the way, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud with a setting change history that is not stored in the gaming machine manager's memory. It is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the setting confirmation history. In addition, it is considered that a person who conducts fraud mainly views after confirming the setting, rather than viewing after changing the setting. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation unit is operated, when one set value is confirmed and the information screen is browsed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browse history information are displayed. Is displayed, and when one set value is changed and the information screen is viewed, only the viewing history information of the setting change history information and the viewing history information is displayed. This makes it possible to minimize the amount of history information displayed on the display unit, and to prevent the total number of histories from increasing unnecessarily and making it difficult to detect fraud.

  Note that "when the one set value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information among the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed." By storing only the browsing history information out of the setting change history information and the browsing history information in the second storage means, only the browsing history information is displayed, and both the setting change history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Although the information may be stored in the second storage means, only the browsing history information among these pieces of information may be displayed under the control of the display control means. The former is more preferable.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-third gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-9. 23rd gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a setting means (e.g., a setting operation command) capable of transmitting setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. , A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed, based on a predetermined operation;
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage unit exceeds a predetermined amount, a history deletion unit that executes control for deleting at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage unit (for example, , A sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S306).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  By the way, the above-mentioned history information is stored in the second storage means (for example, the work RAM 203), but since the amount of history information that can be stored in the second storage means has an upper limit, it is stored in the second storage means. When the amount of history information increases, there is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the history information cannot be recorded when it is desired to be recorded in the second storage means. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is deleted to record new history information. It prevents the situation that you cannot do it.

  Note that "when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is deleted". The history information may be erased by overwriting the history information already stored in the storage unit with the new history information, or the new history information may be stored in the second storage unit. At this time, when there is a possibility that the history information exceeds the predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means may be deleted before storing the history information. Also, even when new history information is not stored in the second storage unit, if the history information exceeding the upper limit may exceed the upper limit when stored in the second storage unit, the history information may be stored in the second storage unit. At least a part of the history information may be deleted.

  The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the operation has been performed. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and information for restricting the display of the information screen even when the predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game It has a screen restricting means (for example, a sub CPU 201 for ending the hole menu task when NO is determined in step S301, and a sub CPU 201 for executing the process in step S315 when determining YES in step S314). .

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, if the power is not turned on while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-fourth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-10. 24th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
When the power is turned on at least while the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed or the one set value is confirmed. Setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26) for controlling to a setting confirmation state in which the setting can be performed;
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control unit, and at least a setting unit that can transmit setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that a change or confirmation of the one set value is performed (for example, A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
An information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is displayed in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display unit, and the setting change state and / or the setting screen can be displayed. Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of restricting the display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the confirmation state ends.
The display control means,
At least when the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without restricting the display of the information screen until a predetermined time has elapsed even if the setting change state ends (for example, step S310, step S311). Can be executed) and
Even if the setting change state ends, control can be performed so that the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as a predetermined operation on the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends ( Steps S311 to S314 can be repeated).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be viewed on the information screen shown as the history information, various problems relating to the setting value can be viewed. Can be handled. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  In addition, since the information screen is displayed in the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, security such that an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen is ensured. In addition, at least when the setting change state is controlled, the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as a predetermined operation on the information screen is performed until a predetermined time elapses after the end of the setting change state. In addition, the convenience for the operator can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The transmitting means,
When at least the one set value is changed, it is also possible to transmit set value information about the one set value,
The display control means,
In the setting change state and / or the setting confirmation state, an information screen in which the set value information on the one set value is included in the history information can be displayed on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the history screen is displayed, the set value information for one set value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can browse more detailed history information. . In particular, since the set value information for one set value is useful information for sales, it can be used for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The display control means,
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends, when the reception unit receives specific information related to the progress of the game, the information screen is displayed. (For example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when YES is determined in step S314).

  According to the gaming machine of (3), even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, the display of the information screen is forcibly performed when the receiving unit receives specific information related to the progress of the game. , The execution of the game is not hindered. For this reason, it is possible to ensure the convenience of operation by an authorized person and to suppress unauthorized use by an unauthorized third party while ensuring a state in which a game can be executed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
On the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends, it is configured to be able to grasp that the game is executable without obstructing the predetermined operation on the information screen (for example, During the setting change or the setting confirmation, the LED 25 is fully lit in white, whereas when the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed, the LED 25 is fully lit in red.)

  According to the gaming machine of (4) above, in the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends, a state in which a game can be executed without hindering a predetermined operation on the information screen from being performed. Since the game can be executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game cannot be executed without being able to grasp the fact that the game can be executed.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-fifth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-11. 25th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
A setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26);
A first storage unit (for example, a main RAM 103) capable of storing set value information on at least the one set value;
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control unit, and at least a setting unit that can transmit setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that a change or confirmation of the one set value is performed (for example, A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a hole menu screen, a screen for a hole menu item) on which various information can be displayed in the setting state on the display means; And
The information screen includes:
A history screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) in which the history information is shown, and a non-history screen (for example, a hall) in which the history information is shown by performing a predetermined operation although the history information is not shown. Menu screen) and at least a plurality of information screens,
The display control means,
A screen updating unit (for example, a step updating unit) that controls to display another information screen when a predetermined operation is performed while any one of the plurality of information screens is displayed on the display unit. The sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of S3051, step S3057, step S3073, and the like;
In the setting state, when the non-history screen is displayed, the non-history screen is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed (for example, when the hole menu display process of step S302 is performed). (If no item is selected in the process of step S303, the hole menu screen is continuously displayed.) On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or more. For example, a specific display control unit that controls the display of the history screen to be terminated (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when YES is determined in step S3072).

  According to the gaming machine of (1), at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information can be viewed on the history screen in which the history information is displayed as the history information. Can be handled. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed the setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the history screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  In addition, a non-history screen in which history information is not displayed is continuously displayed without performing a predetermined operation, but a history screen in which history information is displayed is terminated if a predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or more. I do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history information from being continuously displayed and viewed by an unauthorized third party. Note that “continuous display” also includes terminating the display once and displaying again. That is, it is important whether the display is performed or the display is not performed even when the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or more.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The transmitting means,
When at least the one set value is changed, it is also possible to transmit set value information about the one set value,
The display control means,
When displaying the history screen on the display means in the setting state, the history screen is also configured to display setting value information on the one setting value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the history screen is displayed, the set value information for one set value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can browse more detailed history information. . In particular, since the set value information for one set value is useful information for sales, it can be used for hall management.

  In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-sixth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-7-12. 26th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
The control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and the information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value can be stored. First control means having one storage means (for example, main control circuit 100);
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the first storage unit;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
When the specific operation unit is operated and the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is operated (for example, the setting key is in an ON state), the one set value can be changed to a setting change state. A setting change state control unit to be controlled (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24);
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, at least setting change information (for example, a setting change start command) indicating that the one set value is changed, and a set value for the one set value The information (for example, the changed set value information when the set value is changed) and the erasing process for erasing the information stored in the first storage unit are executed. Transmission means (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55) capable of transmitting information (for example, an initialization command) indicating that
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting change information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting change information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting change information (for example, time information at which the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received) A second storage unit (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing
Information display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying on the display means an information screen on which the history information is displayed in at least the setting change state;
Erasure execution information notifying means capable of notifying that the erasing process has been executed (for example, the display control circuit 104, the audio control circuit 205 for controlling the audio output of the speaker 24, and the LED control circuit 206 for controlling the lighting mode of the LED 25). And having
The erasure execution information notifying means,
When the erasing process (for example, the backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, a first mode (for example, a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) in which the erasing process is executed can be grasped. A first notification means (sub CPU 201) for notifying by a character display such as "RAM is cleared", an audio output such as "RAM is cleared", and all the red lights of the LED 25.
When the erasing process is executed in accordance with the control of the setting change state, it is more difficult to grasp that the erasing process is executed than in the first mode so that the visual recognition of the information screen is not hindered. Second notification means (for example, not displaying on the liquid crystal display device 16 but only outputting a voice such as “Setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized” and turning on all the red lights of the LED 25). And a sub CPU 201).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), at least the setting change information and the time information related to the setting change information can be viewed on the information screen in which the history information is displayed. Can be handled. In particular, if there is a possibility that a third party who has no authority has changed the setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is possible to track whether or not the fraud was performed. It is possible to do. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  The erasing process for erasing the information stored in the first storage means (for example, the backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, and also when the setting is changed to the setting change state. May be executed. When the erasing process is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, the erasing process is notified in the first mode in which the erasing process is executed, so that the erasing process is executed by a third party without authority, for example. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to the control of the setting change state, the main purpose is to change one set value, and the erasing process is only executed accordingly. Therefore, the notification is made in the second mode, which is more difficult to grasp than in the first mode. Further, when the erasing process is executed in accordance with the control of the setting change state, an information screen showing the history information is displayed. In the second embodiment, the information screen is displayed so that the visibility of the information screen is not hindered. Since the execution of the erasing process is notified, convenience can be ensured.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
In addition to audio output means (for example, speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined audio,
The second control means includes:
The apparatus further includes a sound control unit (for example, a sound control circuit 206) capable of controlling a sound output from the sound output unit,
The first notifying means,
Notifying that the erasing process has been performed using both the display unit and the audio output unit,
The second notifying means,
It is characterized in that the execution of the erasing process is notified using only the audio output unit among the display unit and the audio output unit.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the erasing process (for example, the backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, the notification is made by using both the display means and the sound output means. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp that the erasing process has been performed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to the control of the setting change state, the notification is performed using only the audio output unit of the display unit and the audio output unit, so that the visibility of the information screen is hindered. It is possible to grasp the execution of the erasure processing while preventing the erasure processing from being performed, and to suppress the execution of the erasure processing by a third party who does not have authority, for example, while improving the convenience.

  According to the fifteenth to twenty-sixth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

[18-8. 27th gaming machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There is known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Eighth task)
However, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change the set value or confirm the set value, or set the value by noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as a change of the control board or an unauthorized replacement of the control board.

  Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by authorized persons.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

  In order to solve the eighth problem, a twenty-seventh gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
With
The first control means includes:
At least when the setting operation means is operated, the setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26) for controlling the one set value to a setting state capable of changing or confirming the one set value )When,
Storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information on at least the one setting value;
Transmission means capable of transmitting various information to the second control means and capable of transmitting at least the set value information of the one set value (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55) And having
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the setting value information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
Based on the reception of the setting value information by the receiving means, using the received setting value information and the setting value information received prior to the setting value information, determine whether the one setting value is appropriate. Setting determination means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that determines whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match);
An abnormal time process executing means (for example, a sub CPU 201 for executing a set value abnormal time process) for executing an abnormal time process when the one set value is judged to be inappropriate by the setting judging means. Features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the second control means determines the suitability of the one set value by using the set value information about the one set value transmitted plural times from the first control means. It becomes possible. In other words, even if the first control means can determine the suitability of one set value, the one set value is normal, for example, when the first control means is exchanged improperly. Regardless of whether the set value is abnormal or not, the first control means determines that one set value is normal. Therefore, by enabling the second control means to determine the suitability of the one set value, even if the first control means is exchanged improperly, etc., for example, Compliance can be found immediately.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The transmitting means,
It is also possible to transmit setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed,
The second control means includes:
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information are stored separately from the storage unit capable of storing as history information. Means (for example, work RAM 203);
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed on a predetermined display means based on a predetermined operation. It is characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), by performing a predetermined operation, the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as the history information can be browsed. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales.

  When transmitting both the setting operation information and the setting value information, the transmitting unit capable of transmitting various types of information to the second control unit may transmit these pieces of information together or separately. The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value is changed, and the set value is checked when the set value is checked. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the information has been updated. When the setting operation information is set value change information, the set value information is set value information for one set value after the change. When the setting operation information is the set value confirmation information, the set value information on the one set value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one set value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

  Further, the “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, or when the second operation unit receives the setting operation information. It may be time.

  According to the twenty-seventh gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

[18-9. 28th gaming machine]

  Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game advantageous to a player is executed based on the result of the lottery.

  As this kind of gaming machine, a gaming machine having a plurality of functions in one device has been proposed. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505 discloses that in order to be pressed by a player and to give an impact to the player, the player jumps out of a main body of the gaming machine to a position largely protruding regardless of the operation of the player. A disclosed push button is disclosed.

(Ninth problem)

  By the way, in the case of checking the operation of the accessory, various sensors, etc., for example, a device having a plurality of functions in one device, such as a push button described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505, has poor maintainability. There is a fear of concern.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving maintainability of a device having a plurality of functions. is there.

  In order to solve the ninth problem, a twenty-eighth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine that can perform a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and can execute a game advantageous to the player based on a result of the lottery,
An accessory (eg, accessory 1000) operable based on the result of the lottery;
A composite means having a plurality of functions in one (for example, a production button 62);
Various sensors (for example, a first starting port switch 421, etc.) provided for the progress of the game,
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
At least a maintenance item determining unit that determines a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including an operation check of the accessory, a function check of the composite unit, and a detection check of the various sensors (for example, the process of step S3084 is performed). An executable sub CPU 201);
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (see FIG. 74, for example) shown in FIG. A maintenance screen display control unit for displaying at least a maintenance screen (for example, the sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of step S3083);
With
The maintenance item determining means includes:
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means,
The maintenance screen display control means,
The composite means having a single function but having a plurality of functions is configured to be displayed on the selection screen so that an item can be selected for each function (for example, the item “effect button 1” in FIG. It is displayed so that you can select one of the items of “staging button 2”)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as for the composite means having one but a plurality of functions, an item can be selected for each function on a selection screen on which any one of a plurality of maintenance items can be selected. Since the information is displayed, it is possible to improve the maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The composite means,
At least, having an operation function and a directing function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery,
The maintenance item determining means includes:
When the item of the operation function (for example, the effect button 1) is selected on the selection screen, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and the item of the effect function (for example, the effect button 2) is selected. In such a case, it is characterized in that it can be determined as a maintenance item related to the effect function.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the item of the operation function is selected, the maintenance item relating to the operation function is determined, and when the item of the effect function is selected, the maintenance item relating to the effect function is determined. Since it is configured to be able to be determined, it is possible to appropriately perform maintenance for both the operation function and the effect function.

  According to the twenty-eighth gaming machine of the present invention having the above structure, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of a device having a plurality of functions. [18-10. 29th gaming machine]

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine that executes a game advantageous to a player based on a result of a lottery performed based on establishment of a predetermined condition, a gaming machine having a movable role that operates based on a result of the lottery is known. I have.

  As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine provided with a first movable role and a second movable role, each of which has a different driving source, as a movable role that operates based on a result of a lottery (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2018-15273).

(Tenth task)
By the way, in the gaming machine described in, for example, JP-A-2018-15273 having a plurality of movable objects having different driving sources, maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is particularly noticeable when there is a possibility that a plurality of movable objects having different driving sources may interfere with each other.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to reduce the burden of maintenance work even when the driving source includes a plurality of different movable roles. It is to provide a gaming machine.

  In order to solve the tenth problem, a twenty-ninth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine that can perform a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and can execute a game advantageous to the player based on a result of the lottery,
A first character and a second character that are operable based on the result of the lottery and have different driving sources,
Various sensors (for example, a first starting port switch 421, etc.) provided for the progress of the game,
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
At least a maintenance item determination unit (for example, a step) that determines a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including an operation check of the first accessory, an operation check of the second accessory, and a detection check of the various sensors. A sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of S3084);
In deciding the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, selectable from among a plurality of maintenance items including an operation check of the first accessory, an operation check of the second accessory, and a detection check of the various sensors) , A maintenance screen display control means for displaying at least the maintenance screen of FIG. 74 (for example, the sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of step S3083),
With
The maintenance item determining means includes:
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means,
The maintenance screen display control means,
On the selection screen, not only the first character and the second character but also the operation confirmation when both the first character and the second character are operated are selected on the selection screen. It is configured to be displayed so that it can be displayed (for example, an item of “director 1 + 2” in FIG. 74 is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), not only the operation check of each of the first character and the second character but also the operation check when both the first character and the second character are operated. Can also be selected on the selection screen, so that the burden of maintenance work can be reduced.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The maintenance screen display control means,
It is configured such that an operation check when the second character is operated after the first character is operated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, “directing character 1 → 2” in FIG. 74). Items etc. are displayed)
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), even when the operation start timing of the first accessory and the operation start timing of the second accessory can be different, the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated. Since the operation check at the time of operation of can be selected on the selection screen, it is possible to reduce the trouble of the maintenance work and further improve the maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
A third character that is operable based on a result of the lottery and has a driving source different from any of the first character and the second character;
The maintenance screen display control means,
When there is a possibility that the first and / or the second character and the third and the third character may interfere with each other when they operate, the first and / or the second character 74, the selection screen can be displayed in such a manner that neither the nor the third character can be operated (for example, it is displayed so that the item of “directing character 1 + 3” in FIG. 74 cannot be selected). )
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when there is a possibility that the first and / or the second character and the third character may interfere with each other when they are operated, the first screen is displayed on the selection screen. Since it is not possible to select the mode of operating either the first and / or the second and third accessories, it is possible to improve the maintainability.

  According to the twenty-ninth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described structure, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of a device having a plurality of functions.

[18-11. 30th and 31st gaming machines]

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays a symbol based on a result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There is known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Eleventh problem)

  By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it relates to payout. However, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to, for example, occurrence of power interruption or the like.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a set value can be appropriately maintained.

  In order to solve the eleventh problem, a thirtieth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-11-1. 30th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
A storage that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and that can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. Control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means (for example, main RAM 103);
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the storage unit;
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on;
With
The control means includes:
When the specific operation unit is turned on and the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is turned on, a state control unit that controls the one set value to a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed (for example, , A main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S24.
The state control means includes:
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and / or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is changed to the setting change state. The power can be restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped or when the supply of power is stopped (for example, the process of step S24 is performed when NO is determined in step S21).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if, for example, a power interruption or the like occurs during the control of the setting change state, when the power is turned on thereafter, the control of the setting change state or the power supply Since the power is restored in the setting change state when the supply was stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is appropriately maintained. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent a situation where a set value is not set due to an unintended power interruption or the like in a setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The control means includes:
When the setting operation unit is turned off after the one set value is changed in the setting change state, the set value determination unit that fixes the one set value to the changed set value (for example, , And a main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S2480.
The setting value determination means,
When the setting operation unit is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when power is restored in the setting change state when power supply is stopped, the setting operation unit is turned ON. And when the further OFF operation is performed, the one set value is set to the changed set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation is performed. Although it is necessary to once turn on the operation unit, by performing an operation that is not different from the normal operation such as turning off the setting operation unit, it is possible to determine one set value. Thus, even when the setting operation unit is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, a complicated operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent a situation in which a set value is not set.

  In order to solve the eleventh problem, a thirty-first game machine having the following configuration is provided.

[18-11-2. 31st gaming machine]

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
A storage that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and that can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. Control means having means (for example, main control circuit 100);
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the storage unit;
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on;
With
The control means includes:
According to the operation state of the setting operation unit and the operation state of the specific operation unit, the state after power is turned on, the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed, and the one setting There is a state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24, step S26, step S28, etc.) that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state capable of confirming a value. And
The state control means includes:
When the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state and the power supply is thereafter turned on, control is performed to any one of the plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation unit and the operation state of the specific operation unit. (For example, executing the processing of steps S22 to S28),
The power supply was stopped in the setting change state, and when the power was turned on thereafter, the control could be performed in the setting change state or the power supply was stopped regardless of the operation state of the setting operation unit and the specific operation unit. The power can be restored in the setting change state at this time (for example, the process of step S24 is performed when NO is determined in step S21).
It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to prevent the situation that the set value is not set due to the occurrence of power interruption or the like while securing the convenience for the operator. That is, the setting check state is a state in which one set value can only be checked and one set value cannot be changed. For example, even if an unintended power interruption or the like occurs, one set value can be checked. It is unlikely to affect. On the other hand, the setting change state is a state in which one set value can be changed. For example, when an unintended power interruption or the like occurs, the one set value may be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power supply is thereafter turned on, the power supply is switched to one of a plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation unit and the operation state of the specific operation unit. Control, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, when the power is subsequently turned on, it is controlled to the setting change state or in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. By restoring the power, the convenience of the operator is secured, and the occurrence of a situation where the set value is not set due to the occurrence of an unintended power interruption or the like is prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The state control means includes:
When the specific operation unit is turned on and the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation unit is turned on, the control unit switches to the setting change state,
The control means includes:
When the setting operation unit is turned off after the one set value is changed in the setting change state, the set value determination unit that fixes the one set value to the changed set value is further provided. Have
The setting value determination means,
When the setting operation unit is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when power is restored in the setting change state when power supply is stopped, the setting operation unit is turned ON. And when the further OFF operation is performed, the one set value is set to the changed set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation is performed. Although it is necessary to once turn on the operation unit, by performing an operation that is not different from the normal operation such as turning off the setting operation unit, it is possible to determine one set value. Thus, even when the setting operation unit is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, a complicated operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent a situation in which a set value is not set.

  According to the thirtieth and thirty-first gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

[18-12. 32nd gaming machine]

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays a symbol based on a result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There is known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Twelfth problem)
By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because the game is related to payout. However, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to, for example, generation of noise or fraud.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a set value can be appropriately maintained.

  In order to solve the twelfth problem, a thirty-second gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
A storage that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and that can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information for the one set value. Control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means (for example, main RAM 103);
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the storage unit;
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on;
With
The control means includes:
A setting change state control means for controlling the setting operation means to a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed when the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on in a state where the setting operation means is turned on; (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24);
An appropriateness determining unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S721) for determining whether or not the information stored in the storage unit is appropriate;
If it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit is inappropriate, the control unit switches to an abnormal state (for example, a state where the processing of steps S722 to S727 is executed) (the processing of steps S722 to S727). A main CPU 101), and
In the case where the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state, if the setting is not controlled to the changed state after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if an operation for deleting information stored in the storage unit is performed. Control is performed so that the game cannot be performed (for example, the process of step S1790 is not performed when NO is determined in step S1770), and control is performed so that the game can be performed when the setting is changed to the setting change state after power-on (for example, A game execution unit (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the process of step S17) that executes a process of step S1790 when YES is determined in S1770 and YES is determined in step S1780.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when an abnormal state occurs due to, for example, generation of noise or misconduct, and the power supply is stopped in such an abnormal state, the gaming machine is not controlled to the setting change state after the power is turned on. When the game is executed, the game cannot be executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed, and the game can be executed when the game is controlled to the setting change state after the power is turned on. . When an abnormal state occurs, there is a high possibility that one set value information stored in the storage means is abnormal, so only when the set value is controlled to be changed so that one set value is always changed, The game can be executed, and the set value is appropriately maintained.

  According to the thirty-second gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining a set value.

[18-13. 33rd gaming machine]

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays a symbol based on a result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

  In this type of gaming machine, one of a plurality of setting values indicating a probability relating to a player's advantage or disadvantage in a game, such as a probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, is set. There is known a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (for example, see paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager of a hall, for example.

(Thirteenth task)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change the set value or confirm the set value, or set the set value due to noise or the like. There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as changes in

  Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by authorized persons.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

  In order to solve the thirteenth problem, a thirty-third gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values;
Predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
A second control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display unit,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation relating to the one set value;
When power is turned on, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means,
With
The first control means includes:
State control means for controlling to a setting state in which the one set value can be changed or confirmed when the power is turned on at least while the setting operation means is turned on (for example, the setting key is turned on). (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24, step S26, step S28, etc.);
Although the game cannot be executed in the setting state, the game execution means can be controlled to execute the game when the setting state ends (for example, the game is executed in the setting processing in step S20 in which the game return processing in step S30 has not been executed yet). Although not possible, when the setting process in step S20 is completed, the game return process in step S30 is executed to execute a power-on process enabling the game to be executed, and a main CPU 101).
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control unit, and at least setting operation information (for example, operation type information) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed is transmitted. A command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55).
The second control means includes:
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed has been set, and a setting operation effect execution unit (eg, , A sub-CPU 201 for executing control for fully turning on the LED 25 in red via the LED control circuit 206).
The setting operation effect execution means,
Even if the setting state ends and the game can be executed, until the predetermined period elapses, it is configured to be able to execute an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed. It is characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed in a setting state in which a game cannot be executed. Further, even if the setting state ends and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed until a predetermined period elapses. For this reason, it is possible to easily find such a fraud in the case where the setting value is illegally changed or the setting value is confirmed, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The setting operation effect execution means,
After the setting state is completed and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be visually recognized as a state in which the game can be executed. It is characterized by being configured to be executable.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed has been executed in such a manner that the user can visually recognize that the game can be executed. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered while the effect indicating that the set value has been changed or confirmed has been executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The state control means includes:
A setting change state control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) for controlling the one set value to a setting change state capable of changing the set value;
The second control means includes:
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information for receiving an initialization command or a power-off reset command). Storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing history information,
In the setting state, an information screen (for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen) showing the history information can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is not displayed when the setting state ends. Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of restricting display,
The display control means,
When receiving the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended by the receiving means, even if the setting change state ends, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time elapses. It is characterized in that an information screen can be displayed (for example, the processing of steps S310 to S314 can be executed).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), in the setting state, the information screen showing the history information can be displayed on the display means, and when the setting state ends, the display of the information screen is restricted. Therefore, in the setting state, it is possible to cope with various problems related to the setting value by browsing the information screen showing the history information. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that an unauthorized third party has changed or confirmed a setting value for the purpose of fraud, by browsing the information screen, it is determined whether or not the fraud was performed. Can be tracked. Also, by browsing past history information, convenience can be enhanced, for example, it can be utilized for hall sales. Further, while the setting screen is restricted when the setting screen ends, when the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has been completed is received, even if the setting change state is completed, a predetermined time is not elapsed even if the setting change state is completed. Can display an information screen. Therefore, even if the fraud is performed, the fraud can be easily found, and the fraud itself can be suppressed.

  According to the thirty-third gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with a problem relating to a set value.

[18-14. 34th gaming machine]

  In a pachinko machine, a player operates a firing handle to fire a game ball and hits the game ball into a game area of a game board, so that the game ball flows down while rolling in the game area. When a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board, a lottery for shifting to a game state advantageous to the player is performed, and a plurality of pieces displayed on display means such as a liquid crystal display device are displayed. When the symbols fluctuate and the winning lottery is won, a transition is made to an advantageous gaming state (a so-called big hit gaming state) triggered by stopping a plurality of symbols in a predetermined combination. When a game ball enters the starting winning opening while a plurality of symbols are changing, the change of the symbol is suspended.

  In a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port while a plurality of symbols are changing, a reserved symbol is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device. In the case where the number of pending symbols is a maximum of four, a maximum of four symbols are displayed on the liquid crystal display device. The ball symbol is not displayed. Conventionally, in the case of a pachinko machine, when the maximum number of pending symbols reaches the maximum number (for example, four) during the change of the symbols, after the plurality of symbols during the variation are stopped, the number of the pending symbols is reduced. The number of symbols is reduced to one and the symbol starts to change. In this case, the variation time is generally shorter than the variation time when the number of reserved symbols is 2 or less. As this kind of pachinko machine, a pachinko machine described in JP-A-2002-210107 has been proposed.

(14th issue)
By the way, firing a game ball in a state where the maximum number (for example, four) of the holding symbols is displayed on the liquid crystal display device means that the holding number does not increase even if the game ball is put into the starting port. Therefore, a game ball (a so-called possession ball) owned by the player is wasted. Therefore, in the case of a player, there is a person who strikes, such as interrupting the launch of a game ball when four reserved symbols are displayed, and restarting the launch of the game ball after the number of the reserved symbols is reduced to three or less. Many. In particular, when the plurality of symbols corresponding to the second held symbol in the four held symbols starts to change, in other words, when the number of held symbols changes from four to two, firing is restarted. Some players have a style of hitting that is referred to as "stop hitting." For example, when launching starts when the number of pending symbols is reduced by one from the maximum number (when the number of pending symbols becomes three), if a game ball already flowing down on the game board enters the starting opening, If the ball is thrown, the newly launched game ball will be wasted, but such a waste can be prevented by “keeping 3 hits”.

  However, when the player performs the above-mentioned hitting method, the firing stop time becomes long, which is not preferable for the game store. In addition, since the player needs to operate the firing handle and the firing stop button, it is difficult for the player to calmly play the game.

  The thirty-fourth gaming machine has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to make it possible to reduce the time in which launching of a gaming ball is wasted as much as possible.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention has the following configuration.

(1) a game board (for example, a game board unit 17) having a game area in which game balls roll,
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 420, a second starting port 440) provided in a game area of the game board and through which a game ball can pass;
A game state determination unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S118) that determines whether or not to shift to a game state advantageous to the player upon the passage of the game ball through the start area; ,
Identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74, and the liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying identification information for enabling a player to identify the determination result of the game state determination section; ,
Identification information display control means for controlling the display of the identification information in a variably displayed manner and stopping and displaying the result of the determination by the game state determination means on the identification information display means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S103 to S104) , Sub CPU 201),
Fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the identification information (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing in step S781, a fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 13, 97 and 98));
Hold information storage means (e.g., main memory) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information necessary for the determination as hold information when a game ball passes through the starting area while the identification information display means performs the variable display. RAM 103),
Measuring means for measuring the time from when the storage number of the hold information in the hold information storage means becomes one before the maximum storage number to the maximum number (for example, the processing of steps S753, S762, and S757 can be executed) Main CPU 101 (see FIG. 100)),
Determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 (see FIG. 100) capable of executing the processing of step S758) for determining whether or not the time measured by the measuring means exceeds a specified time;
With
The fluctuation time determination means determines a fluctuation time in the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold information stored first in the hold information stored in the maximum number in the hold information storage means, based on a determination result by the determination means. (For example, the main CPU 101 (see FIG. 101) capable of executing the process of step S787),
The average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display when the determination means determines that the predetermined time is not exceeded is shorter than the average fluctuation time when the determination means determines that the predetermined time is exceeded (for example, the fluctuation pattern). A gaming machine characterized by a decision table (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

  According to (1), there is provided a measuring means for measuring the time from the time when the number of storage of the hold information becomes one before the maximum number of storage to the maximum number, and the measuring time by this measuring means is defined. It is determined whether or not the time is exceeded, and if it is determined that the time is not exceeded, the variation time of the identification information corresponding to the number of held items, which is one less than the maximum number (for example, four), is shortened. ing. For this reason, for example, when launching is started at the point in time when the number of held pieces is reduced by one from the maximum number (when the number of held symbols becomes three), before the already launched game ball enters the starting port In addition, since the possibility that the number of holdings is further reduced by one (the number of holding symbols is two) increases, the number of holdings increases when the already launched game ball enters the starting port. become. As described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the time during which a game ball is unnecessarily fired as much as possible, and for a player, the merit of performing the so-called three-stop hitting is reduced. In this way, it is possible to reduce the number of players who perform the hitting.

  (2) The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the prescribed time is 1.2 seconds or less.

  According to (2), since the game balls are fired at intervals of about 1.2 seconds, by setting the specified time to 1.2 seconds or less, for example, the number of holdings is reduced by one from the maximum number (holding). Immediately after the number of symbols becomes three), if two game balls remaining on the board enter the starting port in succession, the number of pending balls becomes the maximum number by entering the first starting port. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the number of items to be retained is reduced by one before the second ball enters the starting port. Therefore, the possibility that the second ball at the start opening becomes a reserved ball is increased, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the time during which a game ball is unnecessarily fired as much as possible.

  According to the thirty-fourth gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of minimizing the time in which the firing of gaming balls is wasted.

[18-15. 35th gaming machine]

In a pachinko machine, a player operates a firing handle to fire a game ball and drives the game ball into a game area of a game board, so that the game ball flows down while rolling in the game area. When a game ball enters a start port provided on a game board, a lottery for shifting to a big hit game state advantageous to a player is performed, and a plurality of pieces displayed on display means such as a liquid crystal display device are displayed. When the symbol fluctuates and a winning lottery is won, that is, in the case of a big hit, a transition to the big hit gaming state is triggered by stopping a plurality of symbols in a predetermined combination. In the big hit game state, a plurality of round games for giving a privilege to a player are executed.
In recent years, in the above-described pachinko machines, after the big hit gaming state is completed, the winning probability of the winning lottery is high (a so-called probable changing gaming state), or the winning probability of the winning lottery is low. A model that shifts to one of a gaming state (a so-called normal gaming state) is generally used. In recent years, in the case where a winning lottery is won, after the advantageous game state ends, the number of models in which the winning probability of the winning lottery becomes high until the predetermined number of changes ends is increasing.

  In recent years, pachinko machines that allow a player to select the number of round games in a jackpot game state have appeared. For example, a game board is provided with a left gate and a right gate that can be divided by a player, and when a winning lottery is won and a big hit is made, when a game ball is passed through the left gate, 15 rounds or There is a pachinko machine in which one of the three rounds has a jackpot game state, and when a game ball is passed through the right gate, a nine-round jackpot game state is established (see, for example, JP-A-2018-011986). According to such a model, the player selects which of the high-risk high-return left gate and the safe right gate should pass the game ball, and the player operates the firing handle to move the game ball. After passing through either the first area or the second area, the big hit game is started.

(Fifteenth task)
By the way, when a player plays a game with the above-mentioned pachinko machine and enters a certain-variable game state, the player wants the certain-variable game state to continue for a long time. However, when the store closing time is approaching, it is hoped that a jackpot will be obtained sooner than the probability change game state continues and that as many benefits as possible will be obtained.

  The thirty-fifth gaming machine has been made in view of such a point, and its purpose is to make it possible to select whether to give priority to continuing the probable game state or to gain many benefits. It is in.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention has the following configuration.

(1) a game board (for example, a game board unit 17) having a game area in which game media can roll,
Special game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a predetermined privilege can be given to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, the processing of step S118 can be executed) Main CPU 101),
A special game state transition unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S133 and S136) for transitioning to the special game state when the special game state transition determination unit determines affirmative;
A unit game execution control means for executing a plurality of unit games in the special game state (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing steps S106 and S108);
A game state transition determination unit that determines whether or not the probability that the special game state transition determination unit determines that the game state after the end of the special game state is affirmative is set to a high probability (for example, the processing of step S168 is executed). A possible main CPU 101);
After the end of the special game state, a game state transition unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S169) for transitioning to a game state based on a result of the determination by the game state transition determination unit;
A first special passage area (for example, a special winning opening 540) which is arranged in the game area and through which the game medium can pass only in the special game state, and where the passage of the game medium is a trigger for giving a predetermined privilege to the player. )When,
A second special passage area (for example, a V area passage gate 633) through which the game medium that has passed through the first special passage area can pass;
Counting means for counting the number of game media that have passed through the second special passage area during the special game state (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S65);
Displacement means capable of being displaced between a first state that facilitates the passage of the game medium to the first special passage area and a second state that makes it difficult for the game medium to pass to the second special passage area ( For example, tongue 632 and V solenoid 635),
Displacement control means (for example, a main CPU 101 (see FIG. 106)) for displacing the displacement means to the first state for a predetermined period while each of the plurality of unit games is being executed;
The game state transition determination means,
After the unit games have been completed a plurality of times, it is determined whether or not the probability that the special game state transition determination means determines affirmative is set to a high probability based on the count value of the counting means (for example, step A gaming machine characterized by a main CPU 101 (see FIG. 110) capable of executing the processing of S805.

  According to (1), the game medium can pass only in the special game state, and the first special passage area in which the passage of the game medium triggers giving a predetermined privilege to the player, and the game only in the special game state A second special passage area through which the medium can pass, and a counting means for counting the number of game media that have passed through the second special passage area during the special game state, and a plurality of unit games in the special game state. Is executed, and in each unit game, an opportunity is provided to allow the game medium to pass through the second special passage area. Then, it is determined whether or not the game state after the special game state is set to the high probability state (probable change state) based on the count value of the counting means after all the unit games are completed. Thereby, the player counts the number of game media that have passed through the second special passage area, and stops the game when the number of game media satisfies the condition for maintaining the high probability state. And giving priority to obtaining all benefits by digesting all unit games. Therefore, it is possible to select a jackpot game state according to the player's request, such as selecting the former if the player wants to enjoy the game for a long time, or the latter if the player wants to end the game. Game machine with high performance.

  (2) The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the gaming state transition determining means determines that the probability is high when the count value of the counting means is equal to a predetermined value.

  (3) In (1), the gaming state transition determining means determines that the high probability is set when the count value of the counting means is included in a range of a predetermined value. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  (4) In the gaming machine described in (1), the gaming state transition determining means determines that the probability is high when the count value of the counting means is an odd number or an even number.

(5) In (1), further comprising: a rendering member having a plurality of passing areas, and allowing the game balls passing through the first special passing area to pass through any of the plurality of passing areas.
A gaming machine wherein a game ball that has passed through a specific one of the plurality of passing areas passes through the second special passing area.

  According to the thirty-fifth gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of selecting whether to give priority to the continuation of the probable game state or to obtain many benefits.

[18-16. 36th gaming machine]

In a pachinko machine, a player operates a firing handle to fire a game ball and drives the game ball into a game area of a game board, so that the game ball flows down while rolling in the game area. When a game ball enters a start port provided on a game board, a lottery for shifting to a big hit game state advantageous to a player is performed, and a plurality of pieces displayed on display means such as a liquid crystal display device are displayed. When the symbol fluctuates and a winning lottery is won, that is, in the case of a big hit, a transition to the big hit gaming state is triggered by stopping a plurality of symbols in a predetermined combination. In the big hit game state, a plurality of round games for giving a privilege to a player are executed.
In recent years, in the above-described pachinko machines, after the big hit gaming state is completed, the winning probability of the winning lottery is high (a so-called probable changing gaming state), or the winning probability of the winning lottery is low. A model that shifts to one of a gaming state (a so-called normal gaming state) is generally used. In recent years, in the case where a winning lottery is won, after the advantageous game state ends, the number of models in which the winning probability of the winning lottery becomes high until the predetermined number of changes ends is increasing.

  In recent years, pachinko machines that allow a player to select the number of round games in a jackpot game state have appeared. For example, a game board is provided with a left gate and a right gate that can be divided by a player, and when a winning lottery is won and a big hit is made, when a game ball is passed through the left gate, 15 rounds or There is a pachinko machine in which one of the three rounds has a jackpot game state, and when a game ball is passed through the right gate, a nine-round jackpot game state is established (see, for example, JP-A-2018-011986). According to such a model, the player selects which of the high-risk high-return left gate and the safe right gate should pass the game ball, and the player operates the firing handle to move the game ball. After passing through either the first area or the second area, the big hit game is started.

(Sixteenth task)
By the way, when a player plays a game with the above-mentioned pachinko machine and enters a certain-variable game state, the player wants the certain-variable game state to continue for a long time. However, when the store closing time is approaching, it is hoped that a jackpot will be obtained sooner than the probability change game state continues and that as many benefits as possible will be obtained.

  The thirty-sixth gaming machine has been made in view of such a point, and a purpose thereof is to provide a gaming machine in which a user can select whether to give priority to the continuation of a probable game state or to get many benefits. To provide machines.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention has the following configuration.

(1) a game board (for example, a game board unit 17) having a game area in which game media can roll,
Special game state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a predetermined privilege can be given to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (for example, the processing of step S118 can be executed) Main CPU 101),
A special game state transition unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S133 and S136) for transitioning to the special game state when the special game state transition determination unit determines affirmative;
A unit game execution control means for executing a plurality of unit games in the special game state (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing steps S106 and S108);
A game state transition determination unit that determines whether or not the probability that the special game state transition determination unit determines that the game state after the end of the special game state is affirmative is set to a high probability (for example, the processing of step S168 is executed). A possible main CPU 101);
After the end of the special game state, a game state transition unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S169) for transitioning to a game state based on a result of the determination by the game state transition determination unit;
A first special passage area (for example, a special winning opening 540) which is arranged in the game area and through which the game medium can pass only in the special game state, and where the passage of the game medium is a trigger for giving a predetermined privilege to the player. )When,
A second special passage area (for example, a V area passage gate 633) through which the game medium that has passed through the first special passage area can pass;
Counting means for counting the number of game media that have passed through the second special passage area during the special game state (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S65);
Displacement means capable of being displaced between a first state that facilitates the passage of the game medium to the first special passage area and a second state that makes it difficult for the game medium to pass to the second special passage area ( For example, tongue 632 and V solenoid 635),
A displacement control unit (for example, a main CPU 101) for displacing the displacement unit to the first state for a predetermined period while executing a predetermined unit game of a plurality of unit games.
The displacement control unit includes a case where the displacement unit is not displaced to the first state in a plurality of unit games (for example, the main CPU 101 (see FIG. 111)),
The game state transition determination means,
After all the unit games are completed, it is determined whether or not the probability that the special game state transition determination means determines affirmative is set to the high probability based on the count value of the counting means (for example, step A gaming machine characterized by a main CPU 101 (see FIG. 110) capable of executing the processing of S805.

  According to (1), the game medium can pass only in the special game state, and the first special passage area in which the passage of the game medium triggers giving a predetermined privilege to the player, and the game only in the special game state A second special passage area through which the medium can pass, and a counting means for counting the number of game media that have passed through the second special passage area during the special game state, and a plurality of unit games in the special game state. Is executed, and in some unit games of the plurality of unit games, an opportunity is provided to allow the game medium to pass through the second special passage area. Then, it is determined whether or not the game state after the special game state is set to the high probability state (probable change state) based on the count value of the counting means after all the unit games are completed. Thereby, the player counts the number of game media that have passed through the second special passage area, stops the game when the number of game media satisfies the condition for maintaining the high probability state, and then moves to the second special passage area. Stop the game in a unit game that can pass the game media, play the game in other unit games, give priority to maintaining a high probability state, and digest all unit games, and gain many benefits You can choose to prioritize things. Therefore, it is possible to select a jackpot game state according to the player's request, such as selecting the former if the player wants to enjoy the game for a long time, or the latter if the player wants to end the game. Game machine with high performance.

  (2) The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the gaming state transition determining means determines that the probability is high when the count value of the counting means is equal to a predetermined value.

  (3) In (1), the gaming state transition determining means determines that the high probability is set when the count value of the counting means is included in a range of a predetermined value. Machine.

  (4) In the gaming machine described in (1), the gaming state transition determining means determines that the probability is high when the count value of the counting means is an odd number or an even number.

(5) In (1), a second special passage area that is arranged in the game area and through which a game medium can pass only in the special game state;
A rendering member having a plurality of passing areas and passing the game ball passing through the second special passing area to any of the plurality of passing areas;
A gaming machine, wherein the second special passage area is arranged on a path of a game ball that has passed a specific one of the plurality of passage areas.

  According to the thirty-sixth gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of selecting whether to give priority to the continuation of the probable game state or to obtain many benefits.

[18-17. 37th gaming machine]

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are pachinko gaming machines of a type referred to as a digi-pachi and a type referred to as a wing mono. In a pachinko gaming machine called a digi-pachi, a game ball, which is a game medium, is fired into a game area of a game board by an operation of a launching device by a player, and the game ball enters a start port provided in the game area. In this case, a random number lottery for judging whether or not a big hit is made is performed, and the lottery result is changed and stopped by the display means, and the player is notified of the lottery in a stop display mode of the identification symbol. For example, if the stop display mode of the identification symbol is a specific display mode (for example, a three-digit double-row pattern such as “777”), a predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) are given to the player. The game shifts to a jackpot game state where the game can be performed.

  Also, in a pachinko game machine called a feather mono, a game ball, which is a game medium, is fired in a game area of a game board by a player's operation of a firing device, and the fired game ball is provided in a game area of the game board. When a game ball enters the opened chucker, the wing member of the winning combination opens, and the game ball can enter the winning combination. When the game ball placed on the blade member enters the winning combination when the blade member is opened and the game ball enters the V winning opening in the winning combination, the opening time of the blade member increases. Then, the state shifts to a jackpot game state in which the game balls easily enter the winning combination. A predetermined number of game balls (so-called prize balls) are given to the player according to the entry of the game ball into the winning combination. Further, conventionally, a pachinko gaming machine having both a digi-pachi and a feather mono-game has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2001-079195).

(17th task)
By the way, the pachinko gaming machines called digi-pachi determine the big hit by lottery, so by changing the winning probability, that is, by providing a so-called probable change function, it becomes a big hit multiple times in a short time, and many prizes It is possible to provide a playability such that a ball can be acquired. On the other hand, a pachinko gaming machine called a feather mono determines a jackpot by entering a V winning hole in a winning combination, so that the jackpot is relatively rarely continuous. For this reason, it is difficult for a pachinko gaming machine referred to as a feather mono to gain an interest in a pachinko gaming machine referred to as a digi-pachi.

  The thirty-seventh gaming machine has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can obtain a new interest by further improving the playability of the wings. .

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention has the following configuration.

(1) a game board (for example, a game board unit 17) having a game area in which game balls roll,
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 420) provided in a game area of the game board and through which a game ball can pass;
Preparation state transition determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S133 and S136) for determining whether or not to transition to the special game preparation state when a game ball passes through the start area;
A preparation state transition unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S134) for transitioning to the special game preparation state on condition that the preparation state transition determination unit decides to transition to the special game preparation state;
Identification information display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, the liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying the determination result of the preparation state shift determination unit to the player so as to be identifiable;
A game state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing steps S168, S169, and S171) for switching a game state according to a display mode of the determination result on the identification information display means;
An operation area (for example, a pass gate 49) provided in a game area of the game board and through which a game ball can pass;
A special accessory (for example, a normal electric accessory 470) that can be switched between a first state in which a game ball rolling in the game area can enter the inside and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter easily. ,
A drive determining unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S194) for determining whether to switch the specific accessory to the first state in response to a game ball passing through the operation area;
A drive control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S192) for controlling the drive of the special accessory based on the determination result of the drive determination unit;
An internal accessory (e.g., a cloon device 903) that is arranged inside the specific accessory and changes a movement path of a game ball that has entered the specific accessory;
A special area (e.g., a V-passing opening 904) that is arranged inside the specific accessory and through which a game ball that has passed the internal accessory can pass;
Special area passage detection means (for example, a V passage gate switch 950) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the special area;
In the special game preparation state, when the special area passage detection means detects a game ball, the special game state transition means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S118) for shifting to a special game state advantageous to the player. )When,
The game state control means, when the display mode of notifying the shift to the special game state in the identification information display means is a specific display mode, the game state after the end of the special game state, the preparation state transition The high probability state in which the determination unit determines affirmatively is set to a high probability state, and when the display mode is not the specific display mode, the low probability state is set to the low probability state (for example, a main state capable of executing the processing in steps S168 and S169). CPU 101),
The drive control unit is characterized in that, when the gaming state control unit sets the high probability state, a time for switching the specific accessory to the first state is extended as compared with a case where the low probability state is set. A gaming machine.

  According to (1), it is determined whether or not to shift to the special game preparation state when the game ball passes through the starting area, and it is determined to shift to the special game preparation state. The state shifts to the special game preparation state, and when the game ball passes through the operation area, the specific accessory is activated, and the game ball can enter the specific accessory. Then, when the game ball that has entered the inside of the special combination passes through the specific area, the state is shifted to the special game state. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to proceed with a game with a sense like a gaming machine called a feather. Moreover, if the display mode of the identification information display means for notifying the transition to the special game preparation state is a specific display mode, the probability of transition to the special game preparation state after the end of the special game state becomes a high probability state, and The time during which the game ball can enter the inside of the accessory is extended. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine called a feather thing provided with a so-called positive change function, and it is possible to obtain a new interest by further improving the playability of the feather thing.

  (2) In (1), when the game state control means sets the low probability state, the drive control means sets the identification information display means to the preparation state shift determination means after the end of the special game state. A game machine that extends the time for switching the specific accessory to the first state until the result of the determination is displayed a predetermined number of times.

  According to (2), after the end of the special game state, the time for switching the special accessory to the first state until the identification information display means displays the determination result of the special game state transition determination means a predetermined number of times is a normal probability. Is extended as compared with the case where the game ball is set. Thus, if it is determined that the game mode shifts to the special game preparation state at the predetermined number of times, the possibility of shifting to the special game state increases. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine called a feather thing provided with a so-called time-saving function, and it is possible to obtain a new interest by further improving the playability of the feather thing.

  According to the above-mentioned thirty-seventh gaming machine, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can obtain a new interest by further improving the playability of the wings.

  In the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described.However, all inventions described in the present specification may be implemented without departing from the spirit of the invention. It can be applied to machines and all other gaming machines.

16 Liquid Crystal Display 49 Passage Gate 73 Special Symbol Display Unit 101 Main CPU
103 RWM (Main RAM)
201 Sub CPU
420 First starting port 460,470 Normal electric accessory 500,510 Attacker unit 540 Big winning port 541 Count switch 630,903 Cleaner device 633 V area passage gate 940 Blade opening / closing solenoid

Claims (2)

A game board having a game area in which game balls roll,
A start area provided in a game area of the game board, through which a game ball can pass;
Game state determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player, triggered by the passing of the game ball through the starting area,
Identification information display means for displaying identification information that allows the player to identify the determination result of the game state determination means,
Identification information display control means for performing variable display of the identification information, and performing control to stop and display the result of the determination by the game state determination means on the identification information display means;
A variable time determining means for determining a variable time of the identification information,
While the identification information display means is performing the fluctuation display, when a game ball passes through the starting area, hold information storage means capable of storing a plurality of information necessary for the determination as hold information,
Measuring means for measuring the time from when the storage number of the hold information in the hold information storage means becomes one before the maximum storage number to when it becomes the maximum number;
Determining means for determining whether or not the time measured by the measuring means exceeds a prescribed time;
With
The fluctuation time determination means determines a fluctuation time in the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold information stored first in the hold information stored in the maximum number in the hold information storage means, based on a determination result by the determination means. And
The game wherein the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display when the determination means determines that the predetermined time is not exceeded is shorter than the average fluctuation time when the determination means determines that the predetermined time is exceeded. Machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the prescribed time is 1.2 seconds or less.